The Many-Splendored Society. Book 4. "Six Realms Born Free and Equal" by Hans L Zetterberg.
The text has five parts called Books. This is a draft of Book 4 dated 2009-05-10. It is is open for vetting and comments by email to the author. The file is updated from time to time. You can ensure that you have the most recent version by checking "Current project" at www.zetterberg.org.
How to cite this web page prior to its publication as a book in print
THE MANY-SPLENDORED SOCIETY
by Hans L Zetterberg
© The author.
Table of Content.
Current Book shown in bold text.
Book 4.
Introduction: Societal Realms as Units of Analysis and Co-Authors of History
The following chapters contain portraits of the six grand societal realms, science, art, economy, religion, polity, and morality. Each of these chapters opens with a repeat presentation of its easily recognized lifestyle, also mentioned in Chapter 1. All are products of mankind's language brain. As shown in our opening review of this work, they are ingrained in European history. But, as mentioned, it is my assumption is that they also will be found in other civilizations since their roots are in a universal language brain, not in a specific culture.
We begin with the two realms that are grounded in descriptive symbols and expressions, that is, science and art. (Chapters 18 and 19) A hundred years ago, progressive thought held that mankind could use reason and art to change or transcend its unsatisfactory circumstances. Two World Wars and one Great Depression in the 20th century undermined many such hopes. The promising development of science and technology was met by public suspicion of the institution that had created the atomic bomb and the technologies that brought us global climate change. At the same time, not surprisingly, art turned from a focus on harmony to a focus on chaotic depths of life.
After a commentary on the describing realms of science and art, we turn to the two realms grounded in evaluative symbols and expressions, that is, economy and religion (Chapters 20 and 21). Economic development has been in focus since the discovery in England in the decades around 1800 AD that the country became richer and richer decade after decade in spite of a growing population and unchanging natural resources, circumstances that the then prevailing Malthusianism and mercantilism had declared impediments to growth. Under the sway of progressive thought, religion was discounted as a force to change society, only to emerge in recent decades as a poorly understood factor that clearly shapes even modern history. We look particularly at the vitality of the Muslims.
We continue the review of the socio-linguistic societal realms by turning to the body politic and morality, areas grounded in prescriptive symbols and expressions (Chapters 22 and 23). Here we can explore how the remarkable century of democratic victories, the 1900s, and the opening into a new era in the twenty-first century that may be characterized as an era of diplomacy. The realm of morality has remained underdeveloped since the Middle Ages in European civilization. Being occupied by and subjugated to religion, it has lived a restricted life. It has recently become relevant as underpinning of the welfare state and as a force in the world's attempts to cope with issues of environmental degeneration and of terrorism.
We end with a review of how societal realms seek expansion and sometimes hegemony within their own society, and how some of them also seek and obtain a cosmopolitan reach. The latter opens a view with the intriguing perspective that the main actors in the history of globalizations are nothing but the societal realms!
However, when any one societal realm develops hegemony over other realms, contentious social movements emerge to seek and protect the autonomy of the subjugated realms; typically by defending and promoting their special liberties, i.e. academic freedom, free trade, civic liberties, artistic freedom, religious freedom, or freedom of conscience.
The students interested in the taxonomy of social science may note that the content of the six societal realms is summarized in separate tables with identical layout (Figures 17.1, 18.1, 19.1 20.1, 21.2, and 22.1) with the identical layout as our Periodic Table of Societal Realms in Book 2, An Edifice of Symbols. The categories from the Periodic Table point out what we think are relevant knowledge about these realms.
Chapter 18.
The Realm of Science:
A Search for Knowledge
Properties of the Science Realm
Figure 18:1. Science in Society
The Cardinal Value of Knowledge
Knowledge, Ignorance, Illusion, and Secret
Figure 18.2. Semiotics of KnowledgeIllusions of Knowledge
Secret Knowledge
Key Social Norms in the Realm of ScienceStratification and Rewards in Science
A Self-Correcting Spontaneous Order
Comparisons with JournalistsUniversities as Spindles of Organizations, Networks, and Media for Knowledge
The Organization of Research
Providing Classical Learning and Science in Schools
Providing Knowledge to Functionaries of Other Realms
Natural and Social Science; The Place of MathematicsAn Illustrative Interpenetration
Technological Aids to Science
Rationalities in Science
"Learning Buffs" have developed the search for knowledge into a lifestyle. They have dedicated their lives to learning ever more. Their self-image is shaped by how much they know. We find them in libraries, in study groups, at the bookstore shelf for non-fiction, in archives, and in laboratories. For them, learning is not a phase in life: it is a lifelong mission. They are exceptionally eager to uncover facts and connections between them. Technical vocabularies, foreign languages, or mathematics are their advanced instruments. Non-professional Learning Buffs subscribe to journals such as Scientific American and National Geographic or their counterparts in other countries. On the Internet they frequently consult the Wikipedia. In their reading they prefer non-fiction to fiction, and in their viewing they prefer documentaries to plays. They are very attracted to education and the realm of science.
The Heritage of Aristotle
Aristotle is the greatest all-round scholar of antiquity. He is more than a philosopher; he is an explorer of nature and society using scientific methods. He systematized and preserved his knowledge in books. He conveyed his knowledge in his lessons with students and consultations with the Macedonian prince who was to become Alexander the Great. (Unfortunately his notes from the latter activity have been lost.)
Aristotle, a genius, shows that the popular vision of a scientist as a lone genius is wrong. Even in his day science had to be organized as a part of society. Aristotle founded an Academy, the second in Athens. The first one was founded by Plato. These two academies were the foundation for Athens as a university town, a function it had for centuries after its commercial and military might had faded. The academy held seminars and disputations for students from near and far, young and old.
The books that Aristotle wrote were copied and distributed in small numbers in the Hellenic world, the nearest thing to a mass-medium of those days. Many of his writings were later translated into Arabic. In this form his ideas became known to medieval Europe. Previously European scholars had read Plato in Greek, and some Stoic philosophers from pre-Christian antiquity had been available in Latin. Until then Aristotle's efforts to publish had had only indirect consequences for European thinking.
The modern scholarly enterprise also rests on organizations such as universities and on the same four activities that Aristotle pursued. First and foremost is the scientific method, the accepted rules for the development and formalization of knowledge. Second, there is publishing and librarianship, i.e. methods for the orderly distribution and storage of this knowledge in scholarly journals, books, and databases. Third, there is pedagogy, methods to mediate knowledge in a series of lessons, explorations, audiovisual aids, exercises, and tests. This includes the task of popularizing science for the general public. Fourth, there is practice, applying established knowledge to concrete problems, for example in engineering and medicine.
Using the various functions in our schema for analyzing societal realms we can say that Aristotle, in one person, was a Maker of knowledge in his research on nature, man, and society, a Keeper of knowledge in his books, a Broker of knowledge to students in his Academy, and a Provider of knowledge to the elites of other realms of his society. He is rightly celebrated as a model in the societal realm of science.
One secret of Aristotle's success rests in the fact that all these functions had one aspect in common, a kategoriai. A basic categorical schema allows a scientist to ask the most profound questions, a librarian to provide the most efficient organization of research findings, a teacher to cover an entire field without the bias of omission, and a practitioner to be relevant and stop wandering all over the place in search of solutions.
Contributions to categorical schemes are not only made by professors. Critics, librarians and other data base operators such as officials in a patent office, journalists, teachers, and consultants have also contributed.
Properties of the Science Realm
A scholarly study of science and its place in society does not differ from the scholarly study of the economy, or of the body politic, or, of any other realm. We may in all these cases use categories developed in chapters 6 through 9 and summarized in our Periodic Table of Grand Societal Realms. In science we find specific lifestyles, stratifications, reward systems, types of rationality, types of freedoms, spontaneous orders, organizations, networks, media, and here we meet Makers, Keepers, Brokers, Takers, Providers, and Procurers.
Figure 18.1. Science and Other Societal Realms
|
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
|
|
A |
Societal Realm |
Science |
Economy |
Polity |
Art |
Religion |
Morality |
|
B |
Type of Symbol |
Executive |
Executive |
Executive |
Emotive |
Emotive |
Emotive |
|
C |
Lifestyle |
Learning |
Money- |
Civic- |
Aesthetes |
Believers |
Welfare- |
|
D |
Cardinal Value |
Knowledge |
Wealth |
Order |
Beauty |
Sacredness |
Virtue |
|
E |
Stratification |
Competence |
Class |
Power |
Taste |
Piety |
Rectitude |
|
F |
Reward System |
Honor of |
Monetary |
Positions |
Artistic fame |
Reverence |
Testimonials |
|
G |
Rationality |
Scientific |
Market |
Democracy |
Balance |
Salvation rituals |
Ethics |
|
H |
Type of Freedom |
Academic |
Free trade |
Civic |
Artistic |
Religious |
Freedom of |
|
I |
Spontaneous order |
Self- |
Market |
Public |
Art improvi- |
Non-ritual |
Unplanned |
|
J |
Organizations |
Laboratory |
Firms |
Bureaucracy |
Theatres |
Temples |
Humanitarian |
|
K |
Networks |
Learned |
Bazaars |
Electorates |
“La vie de |
Sects |
Moral |
|
L |
Mass media |
Lectures |
Marketing |
Tribunes |
Stages |
Holy texts |
Appeals to |
|
M |
Makersof cardinal value |
Scholarly |
Innovators |
Legislators |
Creative |
Prophets |
Creators of |
|
N |
Keepers |
Librarians |
Bankers |
Judges |
Critics |
Clergy |
Ethicists |
|
O |
Brokers |
Technocrats |
Tradesmen |
Officials |
Entertainers |
Preachers |
Moralists |
|
P |
Takers |
Research |
Consumers |
Subjects |
Fans of |
Believers |
Decent |
|
Q |
Providers of cardinal values |
Physicians |
Central bankers |
Legal |
Esthetics |
Chaplains
to |
Ethics |
|
R |
Procurers of values from other realms |
Research |
Tax men |
Lobbyists |
Persons and organizations on the outlook to other |
||
The letters marking the rows and columns are those introduced in Book 2 An Edifice of Symbols. They are also found in our summary of various language-products in The Table of Societal Realms in Chapter 9 of which the present table is a replica with the column of Science given emphasis. Note that Rows C though G help define social phenomena, while the phenomena mentioned in Columns 1 though 6 rows J through R provide illustrations of social phenomena, not their definitions.
If you read the all words in italics, in Figure 18.1 you encounter categories of elements found in any societal realm. If you read the bold text you find their counterparts in the societal realm of science. Some examples in the same style are added in the center of the diagram to illustrate the structures and functions of science in a modern society.
The Cardinal Value of Knowledge
The realms of knowledge and learning are connected primarily with executive descriptions, for example, facts and generalizations. Science seeks objective truth, that is, truth that can be verified by others. There are always old and new versions of such truths, and the tensions between them are the stuff of academic life. Academic tradition includes rules for the use of the scientific method and the publication of the fruits of scholarship. Academic freedom is the oxygen vital to life in this sphere.
The pursuit of knowledge – at least in Western civilization – rests on three principles (Berlin 1999, pp. 21-22). First, all real questions have an answer. You may not know the answer, but wise men may know it — either in the past, present, or future. Second, there are methods to discover and learn the answers. Third, says Berlin, all real answers are compatible and do not contradict one another. In this sense all real knowledge would be rational. The latter may be an end-state for science, but we are not there, and may perhaps never get there. All really existing sciences, including physics, embrace some ambivalence.
Knowledge, Ignorance, Illusion, and Secret
By sharpening Berlin's principles, science emerged in the Enlightenment as a separate societal realm in Europe. The answers to our questions were not to be sought in revelations, not in dogmas, not in tradition, not in inner contemplations. The answers were to be sought in empirical studies and logical reasoning based on such studies. The semiotic square, presented in Figure 18.2, helps us to delineate what is knowledge and what is not.
Figure 18.2. Semiotics of Knowledge

In addition to outright 'ignorance,' the semiotic analysis found 'illusions' and 'secrets' as related concepts that must be demarcated from pure knowledge to have a complete picture.
Illusions of Knowledge
In Book 1 of this treatise we have learned the difficult task of identifying the illusions of knowledge: spuma, magic, and defensive bilge. These phenomena are antitheses to science, but one can be scientific about them. We wanted to keep all concepts introduced in The Many-Splendored Society scientific, which is why we introduced their mortal enemies in the form of spuma, magic, and defensive bilge in Chapter 2 rather than in this later presentation of the realm of science. They are a good start to the study of science; those who have not read about them are encouraged to do so now. Here is a reminder:
Spuma consists of confabulations, language governed by biological spontaneities, and not controlled by the language brain. This babble is not admissible in constructing scholarly definitions and propositions, nor in the reporting of research findings.
Defensive Bilge is verbiage of excuses, including projections and sour grapes. When used by scientists, journalists and others it distorts reality and is unacceptable in scholarly discourses.
Magic is based on five principles that are not admissible in scientific discourse:
1. In time, all events that happen simultaneously belong together in some way.
2. In space, all things that have once touched each other thereafter hang together in some way.
3. What holds true for the part always also holds for the whole, and vice versa.
4. All happenings and creations are willed by some being.
5. One can find a special verbal formula that produces a quick change from anything evil to something good, and vice versa.
These conceptions of causality belong in pre-scientific thinking.
Secret Knowledge
Another concept that a semiotic analysis of knowledge delivers is the secret. Secrets may or may not be true, but generally speaking they are unusable in the societal realm of science where all relevant discoveries are published.
Secret knowledge has always been found in the military, about weapons, resources, and plans. The United States Atomic Energy Act of 1954 goes beyond the normal range of classifying military secrets. It makes parts of the science of physics and its calculations forbidden knowledge. However, it is difficult for a government to to sue a professor who lectures about the forbidden part or a blogger who reveals them. A trial would have to make at least some parts public what the law intended to keep forbidden (Laughlin 2009).
Industrial secrets abound, as is evident by the prevalence of industrial espionage. Secret agendas are found in corporate planning. Findings and methods of market, medical and industrial research with secret elements are often labeled "proprietary," that is owned by someone. This is not compatible with a norm in the societal realm of science that a scientist shall give up any property rights to his findings in return for the honor of being cited as the one who made the discovery.
There are business secrets helpful in a competition. Some of them are produced by "market research" based on scientific canons. But most findings in market research are not published and thus cannot be cited or checked by outsiders, nor used by outsiders in building the cumulative knowledge base of a science. It is, however, in the nature of markets to overflow with public information about prices, volumes and specifications. Researchers (and journalists) can combine this in published reports. My experiences in market research tells that marketers who put an effort in understanding and use of publicly available knowledge, for example in the form of branch statistics, do quite well in the competition for customers. Joint and common efforts by competitors to provide good branch statistics is almost always worthwhile to them; they win by being good at using public knowledge. Proprietary market research is essential when launching new products or services, or when old ones need repositioning, and also when branch statistics no longer correspond to the actual market.
In advanced countries it is possible to patent genuinely new industrial advances of production, products, or processes. A patent gives the owner control of the use of the innovation during a period of time, usually 20 years. When the time runs out the knowledge lodged in the patent is free for all to use. During the patent period the owner enjoys all established property rights. He can keep the discovery for himself, license it to be used by others for a fee, or sell it on the market where patents can be bought and sold, pass it on to heirs, or simply give it away to anyone. The copyright is a similar intellectual property right that gives control for a stated period of time to the creators of written or artistic works.
It was long an established praxis that no patent office can grant such exclusive rights on two phenomena, laws of nature and mathematical equations. It is a sign of intrusion from the realm of economy and its business interests into the realm of science when patents are issued to the composition of genes and to computer programs of mathematical algorithms (Laughlin 2009).
Legislation about engineering patent and artistic copyright is a great achievement of Western jurisprudence, a genuine contribution of the body politic to the realms of science, art, and economy. Unfortunately it is about to go haywire by an attack by the economy on science that lets the rules of trade invade the realm of science. The invaders assume that scientific discoveries and regularities, such as the genetic code, can be patented, and that such "property right" can be defended in courts. This turns the bold spirit of discovery into an anxious watch not to use immaterial rights of powerful patent holders. It pushes normal university teachings into a criminal activity. Needless to say, it is incompatible with a many-splendored society. It breaks the first key norm of science that discoveries are offered for free to the scientific community.
Key Social Norms in the Realm of Science
The realm in search for knowledge is not just an arena for a bunch of learning buffs and masterminds like Newton and Einstein. It is an enterprise with all the attributes of a full-fledged societal realm. The one who perhaps more that others has brought this to the fore is Robert K Merton, the American sociologist. From an immigrant family without much education he entered Harvard as graduate student who became an astute sociological observer of a campus with great science and scholarship at work. Here he came into contact with one of the pioneering historians of science, George Sarton, and with a learned giant in sociology, Pitirim A Sorokin, whose assistant he became for the preparation of a chapter on science in the latter's Social and Cultural Dynamics (1937-41). His doctoral thesis had these two advisors and dealt with this emerging realm: Science, Technology and Society in 17th-Century England (1938). By 1942 he had some main generalizations ready about the constitution of the scientific realm. Its key norms are Communism, Universalism, Disinterestedness, Organized Skepticism, or more specifically:
Communism: the property rights to scientific discoveries are published and offered for free to the scientific community.
Universalism: contributions by scientists are not dependent on their race or nationality or on any other ascribed attribute
Disinterestedness: scientific work is carried out in the same way without regard to the scientist's religious faith, political, or other persuasions.
Organized Skepticism: claims to novelties in science must be subject to scrutiny by other scientists before being accepted and credited to the scientist.
Merton called these norms CUDOS because their initial letters formed this word, which also is Greek for honor given to an achievement. (This kind of cuteness appears now and then in Merton's writings.) Off and on during his life he returned to the field of sociology of science with new insights, for example, in On the Shoulders of Giants (1965), and a general summary in The Sociology of Science (1973). His Travels and Adventures of Serendipity (with Elinor Barber) was long in the making and published posthumously in 2004.
Stratification and Rewards in Science
All scientific research is subject to scrutiny by other scientists. First and foremost, a scientist must publish his methodology, and, secondly, if asked, also make the sources on which his publication is based available to other scientists. (If the information is sensitive and threatening to personal integrity there are usually ways of making it anonymous to all except the original researchers.) Scientific discoveries must be replicable (nachvollziehbar). Experiments in physics and chemistry can always be replicated, but historical events cannot. A variation of the above German term, such as "aftercontrolable," is perhaps more adequate to convey the credo in the humanities and social science. References are made in the published research to all archival sources. All original data, if any, collected specifically for the research, should, if possible, be saved. Statistical or other choices of methods of data summaries and analyses should be accessible to inspection.
In science, a firmly established pattern ties the name of the scientist to his published contributions to knowledge. Scientific articles and monographs get into print only if they contain some new knowledge. Anonymous peer reviews have a decisive say when an editor of a scientific journal publishes an article. Some journals are more read and cited than others, and to publish in them is a particular achievement. English, even somewhat broken English, is the language of science, and to publish in English has become a near-must for an aspiring scientist with a non-English background.
In the main and in the long run, the publications cited establish a scientist's competence. Not to perish in science you must publish. Oral publications at scientific conferences help, but written ones count higher. Any new scientific report is expected to recognize in text or footnotes the authors of the more relevant ideas that form parts of a new discovery, technique, or argument. A scientist’s own publications can become dearer to him than his worldly possessions, but they are never a substitute for regular pay to fund the activities of needs and lusts in daily living in a market economy.
The originality of a scientific work can be rated, but only approximately, by counting the number of citations by other scientists. The success of a scientist is an accomplished fact when some of his or her publications find their way into the bibliographies of the papers by the authorities in a field. There are statistical indices available of such rankings of scientific work. Unfortunately, the common indices of citation are mechanically calculated on the basis of unanalyzed data in which positive citations are counted as much as negative ones, and no rating is made of their informative content. It is a peculiar lack of rationality in science that such data can make or break careers in science. A helpful practice enters when a scientist's standing in the opinion among his or her colleagues is used to modify and round off the messages from indices of publications and citations.
Scientists who have achieved a high level of competence attract job offers from more prestigious universities or research organizations, for they have a policy of hiring the best they can get. This is the way they stay ahead. Heads of departments with research activities are supposed to keep track of the yearly increments in competence among their staff and promote and raise salaries accordingly. Otherwise they lose staff to competing institutions. When a scientist who has a attractive job offer from another institution tells his boss about it, the latter has the choice of saying "Congratulations" or "We will certainly match and improve on this offer, if you stay with us." The experienced science administrator has prepared for such events, and his response is well considered. By saying "Congratulations" to some with outside offers he hopes to increment the competence of his own institution by finding a still more competent replacement. In this way scientific institutions stay dynamic without tampering with reasonable tenure rights of its staff.
At universities, publishing scholarly and scientific papers and monographs is the main avenue to recognition as a scientist and a good career with a good income. Most scientists, it must be emphasized, are satisfied with modest recognition, or the mirrored recognition that comes from the achievements and reputations of the laboratory or research organization where they work (Glazer 1964).
The quality of a professor's teaching is also considered for his standing, particularly if they have developed a new and popular course for their department. A published textbook has its own rewards in the form of royalty, and is often considered a very minor merit. Popularizations of research for the general public, and participation from a professional perspective in the public debate on current issues are encouraged at many universities, but they are not given much weight in evaluating competence. To be able to attract research grants to your university, however, is rewarded. Such grants are not given without proven competence, so here is a win-win situation for a professor with a bent on being a research entrepreneur.
As we have repeatedly underlined, the scientist gives up all rights to his work when it is published in a scientific journal. In return, the honor of authorship is given to the scientist, or to the joint authors in the order in which they appear at the head of the paper. The order in which joint authors of a scholarly paper is given normally indicates their relative contribution to the research. Nobel laureates, however, tend to put their names last, once they have won the prize, that is.
We are dealing here with a unique aspect of the scientific endeavor without counterpart in any other realm. To immediately put your cardinal value into a public domain is a pattern that makes science different from engineering with its patent rights, different from art with the sale by a painter or the royalty to a novelist, and is different from the rewards of politics that can garner a paid seat in an assembly and power to rule. It is also different from market transactions, for in these both buyers and sellers are satisfied that they got the best of deals, given their circumstances. The scientist gets nothing of this. Therefore, it becomes essential to a scientist that all the above described contextual rewards of position and salary are in place, for no one in the modern world can live on honor alone, at least not in the style that behooves a successful researcher.
A Self-Correcting Spontaneous Order
The number of journals devoted to science and scholarship is one of the measures used to measure the growth of the societal realm of science. The Royal Society in London started the first one in the 1660s. In the first decade of the 21st century there were over 300,000 active scientific and professional periodicals in the world, and libraries held an additional large number of defunct scholarly journals.
In the beginning, scientific journals had an editor or a board of editors as gatekeepers; such periodicals are now usually called "professional journals." Later the role of gatekeepers was extended. Anonymous colleagues to the authors review each manuscript. When their judgments determine what appears in print or on line we have "peer review journals." For scholarly books the publishing companies also employ anonymous readers, but the process is not as formalized as for contributions to journals. Here an economic restriction enters: each book must have a fair chance to recover its publishing costs. There is no such requirement for each journal article.
To publish is essential for the accumulation of knowledge in science. As a principle, no article with research results shall be published unless it contains some new knowledge. However, replications that confirm claims to important discoveries by others are publishable, as are corrections and amendments to previously published discoveries. These confirmations, corrections, and rejections of scientific results constitute a spontaneous order; they are not ordered by any authority. This spontaneous order is effective and makes science self-correcting.
It might be noted that the Internet began as a medium for exchange of scientific information. As always in science, the information exchanged have no ownership and do not bring royalties; therefore, all files with scientific information transmitted over the net were freely shared as a matter of course. This situation changed when the Internet grew and became a major medium for other than scientific communications. The conflicts over file sharing of copyrighted songs, pictures, and literary products on the Internet is not due to ill will of the parties, but is caused by the different reward systems in science and the arts. The controversy is also infected by the tradition in countries with full freedom of speech, which implies that political messages on the Internet are freely shared. Other countries filter and censor political messages on the Internet
Comparisons with Journalists
The great advantage of journalism over science is its speed, broad coverage, and its accessible and entertaining presentation, even of difficult topics. In science, also everyday topics tend to be complex, as is well documented in the present text. The competition for discovery in science, however, is as severe as the journalistic competition for news, but it is a marathon race compared to the 100-yard dash for daily news.
It is interesting to contrast the reward pattern of science with that of journalism. Both scientific knowledge and journalistic information are public and has to be open for public scrutiny. Journalism is ideally based on facts, but its methods of controlling facts are not those of science, not even notoriously loose social and cultural science. Journalists in the Western tradition do not have to tell or show anybody how their information was obtained, or who their sources are, or what work notes they have. Only an editor-in-chief or a legally responsible publisher can ask for this information, a privilege they rarely exercise. The credibility of journalists is therefore rightly seen as more precarious than that of scientists and scholars who must document their methodology and make their source material available.
There is a big market for news and features, unknown to most readers and viewers. This makes for a second difference between the rewards systems of journalism and science. Journalists can claim intellectual property rights, copyrights, for their products. Free-lance journalists survive on this market. The copyrights of employed journalists may be routinely assigned to their employer-media in return for salary and support, but they may be activated when texts or photos are sold to other media. With a good employment contract, the employed journalist then shares in the proceeds.
As we have noted, a scientist, by contrast, gives up economic gains from his discoveries and analyses in return for the honor of being formally remembered as the first who found out and understood their importance. When using previously published material of a discovery, it is not a required routine in journalism as in science to give credit to the original authors by name and reference. Journalists may have bylines so that they can build personal reputations, but they are not normally cited by other journalists who build on their stories. There is a greater willingness to mention the name of the original medium that first reported a news item, but not the name of the journalist. An informal honorific reward system does exist among the staff in an editorial office. Honor to a journalist comes from having many contributions flashed on the front page or in the introduction of a newscast. Such things are unknown in the reward system of science.
Journalistic practice has within its power to seduce and corrupt science and scientists. It does make a difference to a scientist when major media publish his findings and when small peer-reviewed journals of his specialty publish them. The latter is most prestigious in the scientific community, but the former attracts more attention and fills the minds of many people and of the scientist himself. One should be routinely skeptical of scientists who spill findings on threats to health and the environment to big media before they have been accepted for publication by their own journals.
Universities as Organizations in Networks of Knowledge
Karl Jaspers taught philosophy at Heidelberg University until he was suspended by the Nazis in 1937. After the defeat of Hitler in 1945, German universities found themselves in shambles in intellectual terms and in many places also physically. Jaspers was reinstated in 1946 as President of his university, which had not been damaged by bombs but by persecutions and gross violations of academic freedom. Jaspers inspired and led the intellectual renaissance of his own and other German universities by publishing a new edition of a book he had written in 1923, The Idea of the University. This book opens with these words:
The university is a community of scholars and students engaged in the task of seeking truth. It is a body which administers its own affairs .... it derives its autonomy — respected even by the state — from an imperishable idea of supranational, world-wide character: academic freedom. This is what the university demands and what it is granted. Academic freedom is a privilege which entails the obligation to teach truth, in defiance of anyone outside or inside the university who wishes to curtail it.
– – –
The university is a school — but of a very special sort. It is intended not merely as a place for instruction; rather, the student is to participate actively in research and from this experience he is to acquire the intellectual discipline and education which will remain with him throughout his life. (Jaspers 1959, p. 1)
Several traditional universities in continental Europe were closed in the wake of the French revolution; they were seen as belonging to an earlier aristocratic era. In France, Napoleon recreated and transformed the French universities into merit-based schools to educate students for the professions. The privileges of the aristocracy to the higher positions in society had been eliminated by the Revolution. Just as a capable corporal could become general in Napoleon's army, so could a clever pupil in a youth school become a man of distinction in the state administration and judicial system. The youth schools for advanced education had the role of sorting out the students who had talent and ambition as candidates for university.
When the University of Berlin was to be formed in 1810, Wilhelm von Humboldt started a campaign against the then rather popular French transformation of universities. In a memorandum Über die innere und äussere Organisation der höherenwissenschaftlichen Anstalt zu Berlin he linked up with the organization of the best in the long tradition of European teaching universities — those in Bologna, Paris, Leiden, Utrecht, Göttingen, and Halle. But, like Napoleon's higher professional schools, the new German university was clearly to be a meritocracy, not an institution already reserved for established elites. As in France, the German students were to be prepared and screened by selected youth schools (Gymnasium) with an academic orientation. In contrast to the centrally controlled French system, a professor at the new German university was to have unlimited freedom to pursue research and teaching in any direction his inquiring mind took him. In practice, the professors also were given considerable autonomy in administrating their university. Freedom of thought and academic self-management were von Humboldt's ideals.
In Humboldt's university, professors were to do research and teach. Thus they functioned as both Makers and Brokers of knowledge. This had not always been the norm. Since the Middle Ages, European universities had been institutions for teaching. The first generations in modern times of great research scientists also had other bases in society. Neither Galileo, Kepler, Faraday, Lavoisier, Darwin nor Mendel were professors in universities, although some of them had appeared at universities on occasions. Among the great pioneers of natural science, Newton and Linnaeus are the exceptions. Newton became professor in mathematics at Trinity College, Cambridge, where he had been a student. Linneaus cut short his start as a practicing physician and became attached to Uppsala University, the base for all his research in botany. But in Humboldt's university professors would advance by virtue of their merits in research, not because of their ability to teach, which one simply presupposed that they mastered. Within a few decades, this priority came to attract most researchers in modern societies to the universities.
Almost all universities subsequently founded were deeply influenced by the University of Berlin. And almost all universities already in existence were changed by ideas inspired by Humboldt and the example of the University of Berlin (Shils 1997).
The self-management of universities in Humboldt's time usually meant that the faculties created one institution with one professor in one subject. The professors were no better than other elites, and they used their freedom to govern their universities by monopolizing the realm rewards, a regularity we know as Proposition 7:4 from Book 2. They created monopolies for themselves.
| 7:4. "Monopolization of Cardinal Values" |
| In any society, people who have a large amount of a cardinal value (knowledge, wealth, power, beauty, sacredness, virtue) tend to act to preserve this situation. |
So long as he kept to his specialty, a Humboldtian professor was protected from challenges from inside his own uni¬versity. Also, in his own institution he single-handedly controlled the academic rewards of its personnel and students. Against this background one can understand the saying "what is truth in Berlin and Jena is merely a poor joke in Heidelberg."
It was not until the scholarly networks of learned and professional societies and their journals first got into cross-country scope (type “The German Association xx Research”) and then grew into multi-national “invisible colleges” (type “The international Association of XX Study) that the authority of the local professor that the local authority of a Humboldtian professor could be challenged.
| 7:7. "The Netorg System of Realm Expansion" |
|
A cardinal value and its societal realm extend their reach |
This development of scholarly networks and journals is the untold but necessary complement to the success of the Humboldtian universities. They became organizations in networks of science, combination of Row J and Row K in our Periodic Table reproduced as Figure 18.1 above. As such they also obtained the force of a Netorg System of Realm Expansion presented in Chapter 7.
Schools in which the curriculum included the advancements of skills to evaluate research done by others, and in which qualified students received training for their own research. A growing number of academic (and semi-academic) units have been linked with these institutions and their backyards. Today, under the same umbrella, there are many research institutes, professional schools, centers for applied science, centers for advanced studies, etc. In addition to allocations in the state budgets, they have diverse financing, including student fees, grants from foundations, and big contracts to do research for business and government.
The University of California, which became one of the leaders, had a visionary president, Clark Kerr, who aptly called his creation a "multiversity." It was an untidy collection of establishments in which traditional university departments were a minority. It was also a multi-campus structure. And it became a miracle of scholarly creativity. By obtaining their financing from many sources, not only from student fees and taxes in the state of California, Kerr and his faculties could successfully resist both excessive demands from student revolts in the 1960s and from Governor Ronald Reagan's attempt to restrict academic freedom. In general, it is true that the diversity of financial support in American universities has increased their chances to live and survive as independent institutions.
More mass education of undergraduates and less research training and discoveries in science and humanities became the fate of most universities in the latter half of the 20th century. European universities depend overly on state financing, and few have the level of protection in getting public money without political interference in university missions, as is the long privilege of Oxford and Cambridge. At the time of this writing, many Mediterranean universities are shadows of their former selves. The German university system, to name only one, is grossly underfinanced. Few European universities have been able to resist government interference in areas to be taught or not taught. Most state-financed universities have been forced by governments to cater to local and regional policy and often also to pet partisan projects in the fields of energy, the environment, state welfare, and gender studies. The old image of universities as the epicenter of European culture (as the Germans conceived it) and European civilization (as the French said it) is still good rhetoric, but has poor contact with reality.
The ethos of the university is the search for the truth in the humanities and science. This thesis of Jaspers about the truth mission of universities also has a negating part that is their last line of defense against intrusion: "Don't believe anything for which there is no reason or no evidence, and, above all, avoid stating it with conviction!" A campus of a modern multiversity, in spite of its meandering and bewildering content, will retain Jaspers' idea of university so long as staff and students test the quality of their presentations and conversations against this criterion.
The Organization of Research
The idea of a professor as a man with unchallenged learning living in solitude and freedom, however, was an image that would soon change. With the expansion of science, this form of organization would have to be modified. Research proved to be an activity that was very amenable to teamwork. A special breed of professors emerged, the research administrators.
No administrator of research can guarantee scientifically interesting and sound discoveries. The best one can do is to organize work in a laboratory to make possible discoveries of the kind that are of particular interest and to ensure that discoveries that lie outside this particular area are not lost due to over-efficiency or negligence. The latter really means that — in the spirit of a many-splendored society — we ought to cultivate a much freer work environment for researchers than the one that exists in business and in public administrations. A research institute should not be organized like a copy of a state bureaucracy, or like a business on the market, nor like a hospital in a welfare state. This was the experience of the many Kaiser-Wilhelm-Gesellschaften that were founded in the first half the 20th century to conduct research independently of universities and government departments in Germany. They made Germany a world leader in advanced research. After World War II they were reorganized as Max Planck Institutes.
During and after the Second World War an increasing number of big and small research institutes emerged outside the university campuses. Some were related to the defense effort, for example Rand Corporation, sponsored by the US Air Force; others like Bell Laboratories, the research and development arm of American Telephone and Telegraph Company had a commercial base. A Center of Advanced Study in the Behavioral Sciences was established in Palo Alto, California, financed by the Ford Foundation. It got a counterpart in Europe in Wissenschaftszentrum Berlin für Sozialforschung (WZB) financed by Stiftung Volkswagenwerk and German taxes.
Other research missions called "think tanks," such as the Brookings Institute and the American Enterprise Institute in Washington DC, began systematic delivery of social science research of political relevance. Of the government-financed think tanks in Europe, the Adenauer, Ebert and Neumann foundations in Germany are outright partisan in their use of applied social science, each serving a major party. The governments of the richest countries have sponsored a common think tank in Paris, the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development, OECD.
The examples cited signal that Humboldt's design to draw most research and all major researchers into universities has became a by-gone chapter in the history of science. The universities must now admit that there is as much research done outside their campuses as within. The ranks of university professors, however, still provide most of the peer reviewers and most of the leadership in learned societies, most of the editors of scientific journals, most of the chairmanships at scientific conferences. The downside of this is that ranking professors spend an inordinate amount of time reviewing and evaluating the research of others. And, of course, they also have students to teach. As educators they have one of the most important functions in a society as Providers of competent people to all realms of society.
Providing Classical Learning and Science in Schools
Around the middle of the 1700s and for more than a century thereafter, the so-called new humanism guided the philosophy of education in the German-speaking areas of Europe. The concept “humanism” was introduced into the school debate in 1808 by the pedagogical reformer F.J. Niethammer. The new humanists believed that the key to bringing up good citizens lay in antiquity, in the legacy from Athens, Rome, and Jerusalem. Bracing quotations from the Romans would steer youth toward that which is right, true, and beautiful:
Whoever, in the manner prescribed, reads the classical authors and also studies the foundations of mathematics, acquires a disposition to differentiate the true from the false, the beautiful from the distorted; his memory is receptive to pleasant thoughts, he becomes adept at grasping the intents of others and at skillfully expressing his own, he acquires many good maxims to improve his reasoning and will.
Thus wrote the pioneer of pedagogy, Johannes Mattias Gesner (1691-1761), as quoted by Sjöstrand (1954, p. 186). Professors in the new discipline pedagogy wrote learned volumes and encyclopedias about classical heroes and events, and the wisdom that youth could obtain from studying them. These professors were themselves “learned,” and wanted their students — at least those who continued their education beyond the elementary level — to be “learned,” with an ability to read Latin and Greek and Hebrew in the original. The model for the virtues of citizenship was to be found in antiquity, not in the present, in antique heroes and Christian saints.
The attempt to offer generations of youth significant others from the classics ran out in the sand. Wilhelm I, the nationalistic German emperor, declared in 1890 at a school conference he himself had initiated: “It is our duty to educate young men (sic) to become young Germans, not Greeks or Romans.” But already the Enlightenment had ushered in the idea that schools ought to be in the service of the new scientific knowledge, not merely classical learning. Their main purpose was not the inculcation of classical virtues, religious beliefs, artistic taste, political or administrative skills or the practices of commerce. Their duty was the dissemination the positions of science on current issues. By the middle of the 1700s, the perspective of education in Europe was shifting from an emphasis on the concerns of religion and the state toward a fast-growing, increasingly autonomous pursuit of knowledge on scientific grounds.
In the spirit of the Enlightenment’s view of education, the job of schools — irrespective of the subject — was not only to impart knowledge but also training in seeking the truth and understanding the approach to life of the subject matter. Schooling should not be dependent on the prospects of getting a good paying job or prestigious position after graduation, even if they were welcome and viewed as natural results. The ideal was that schools would provide an exciting place for serious young people to develop their intellects. Without personal intellectual development, a pupil or student or teacher would find life rather boring. An insight or a discovery can turn a gray day or sleepless night into a joyful experience.
After World War II, educational systems in many countries favored early specialization. That which is called studium generale, (“general studies”) and precedes occupationally geared studies or research has accordingly been cut back.
In the United States a heroic attempt to re-establish general studies with a new (or rediscovered) pedagogy was made at the University of Chicago, a private university. Its studium generale was a set of courses in certain subjects with a tradition of basic research. In small, compulsory seminars, all freshmen read, discussed, and analyzed the most important original works in philosophy, physics, history, and social studies. The aim was not that the students should learn the whole series of “Great Books” chosen by Robert Maynard Hutchins and Mortimer Adler. The goal of the seminars was to develop critical thinking, not only through exchanges with fellow students and teachers, but also with the pre-eminent thinkers of the Western world.
Different and sometimes watered-down versions of the Chicago model soon came to Columbia, Harvard, Yale, Brown, and other ambitious undergraduate colleges in the United States. Most have been met with a declining interest, and waned in importance. They suffered from some students’ desire to choose easier courses, and their contents are subject to criticism by Marxists, ecologists, feminists, and multiculturalists.
Realization of the Enlightenment’s educational ideal has been frustrating and difficult. During the two hundred years that the Enlightenment has been with us, the world has seen many highly educated individuals — some even well-known participants in the public debate and in public service — who have been charlatans or almost charlatans. Without incurring personal risk, they have mixed proven and unproven ideas, without clarifying the difference.
Providing Knowledge to Functionaries of Other Realms
Napoleon's, Humboldt's, and later Kerr's type of university assumed the privilege of educating leaders for the various realms in modern society.
During the time of feudalism in Europe, the political elite had been educated through the practice of letting selected men attend the court. During the time of the guilds the economic elite was recruited by the practice of selecting men to serve as apprentices to a master. It was characteristic for the universities that were reformed or created in Napoleon's and Humboldt's spirit; their open admissions not only reproduced and renewed the academic elite, but also educated almost all other leaders of society. In the twentieth century a university education remained of little or no significance only for the recruitment of good trade union leaders, stockbrokers, and pop singers. In all probability, however, a central zone of a modern society functions best when its members are educated and share a similar symbolic environment with roots in university campuses.
University researchers would probably become more effective scientists if they did not also have their teaching function, but then the universities would lose in the balance of power in society. As long as an academic meritocracy is accepted for the recruitment of political, economic, and other elites, the professors can assert themselves, not only within their own territory, but also in relation to politicians, entrepreneurs, and other elites they may have educated.
My forecast is that the universities as we know them will eventually lose their position as spindles in the societal realm of knowledge. As knowledge grows, the pressure for a division of labor will be too great. The research university was an efficient structure when less than three or four percent of young men and women of each generation attended. When 30 or 40 percent attended, as happened in many countries after World War II, it became an inefficient structure, less appropriate for both research and teaching. In the United States volumes of teaching take place in community colleges where faculties have little or no pressures to continuously publish research. In Germany volumes of advanced research are located in Max Planck Institutes. A bifurcation of universities into colleges for advanced mass teaching with scientific outlook and research centers of excellence is emerging in the 21st century.
There are also other ways besides neglecting teaching for the benefit of research that can cause universities to lose in the balance of power. Max Horkheimer (1937) had observed that students and professors had a simple choice as scholars: either to search for an understanding of things as they were or to be critical of them. He argued forcefully for "critical theory" in philosophy and the social sciences. When some university institutions in practice became outposts for radical political movements — as was the case in much of the Western world around 1968 — a number of talented students bypassed them. Fed up with the radicalization of campuses, they dropped out of their universities.
When, in Sweden in the 1990s, I first wrote down these thoughts about universities, some of the conservative dropouts from those universities with campuses and later faculties steeped in the 1968 mentality were recruited to become prime minister, minister of education, and editor-in-chief of the country's largest conservative newspaper. The lesson for the universities may be: if you want to be relevant for the total society you should stick to the search for truth, critical or not, and leave the running of the realms of power and money to others.
Natural and Social Science; The Place of Mathematics
The difference between natural and social scientists is shaped by the properties of their respective subject matter and how they are recorded. In modern natural science the subject matters of both microcosmos and macrocosmos are taken as given, and the main task of scientists is to record the differences between various objects. These differences and their relations are recorded as mathematical expressions. Physicists are less comfortable in telling us the "nature" of their subject matter. So we are left with the impression that the very nature of physical nature is mathematical. At any rate it is apparent that physical science cannot rely entirely on the language brain. It needs the use of the mathematical platform of human intelligence. Often natural science also needs the skills of geometry found in the spatial brain to analyze and present its knowledge.
We have seen in Book 1 how classifications summarized as Tri- and Bisections of Language Usages provide main building blocks of social reality. Here the subject matter of both macro- and micro-social science are not mathematical but grammatical expressions. In accounting for the grammatical expressions of the human drama social scientists cannot avoid the use of logic, some mathematical notions, and some basic statistical measurements, i.e. standard tools of natural science. In that sense social science is quite similar to natural science. Modern economics and demography are obvious cases in point. But social scientists are by no means obliged to translate everything into mathematics. In many instances in economic history, anthropology, sociology, and political science it would actually be more meaningful to translate the findings into Latin than into mathematics. For their subject matter is grammatical, not mathematical.
The point of view we take is a modified version of the old divide between Naturwissenschaften and Geisteswissenschaften that the German philosopher William Dilthey explored in 1883. He cemented a gulf between the two. This led to the breakdown of communication between the sciences and the humanities that C.P. Snow (1956) diagnosed as The Two Cultures. With our formulation the gulf is not insurmountable, nor incomprehensible.
Natural science must always use the mathematical brain in addition to the language brain. Creativity in natural science is in large measure a product of the scientist's mathematical brain. Social science and the humanities have in the main products of the language brain as raw data. In coping with these data a social scholar can also make good use of mathematics, particularly statistics. But in the social sciences a rule that everything fit a mathematical model would be an unbearable straitjacket on creativity and reality.
When scientists give attention to the human beings who, with the help of their tools, overcome biological and physical exigencies and manage to enact human society, they enter an area of interpenetration between the social and biological and physical worlds. Social science meets natural science. In this process they are no longer just social scientists but are also more or less dependent on natural sciences, nor are they just natural scientists but also more or less dependent on social sciences. For example, if you by using natural science happen to discover a climate change that is due to mankind's social activity you may need knowledge from political science and communication research to do something about this activity.
An Illustrative Interpenetration
Any interpenetration of natural and social science requires more than professional courtesies to colleagues in other fields. They may involve surprising discoveries, unanticipated by either field.
BIO TECH
Consider designs to cope with human stress. Our ancestors evolved into the present species over millions of years, when the conditions for survival were entirely different. They adapted gradually to an environment which changed very slowly. And it was the slowness of the change that made adaptation possible. With the industrial revolution, about two centuries ago, the rate of change began to increase drastically. And in the electronic era, that counts its age in decades rather than centuries, the rate of change keeps accelerating.In striking contrast, the human brain and body have remained essentially the same over several thousand years. Bodily spontaneities are adaptive in Darwin's sense. Or, they were adaptive in an earlier era or another environment. For example, in eating, the urge for fat was a hedge against famine and the urge for sugar built up the ability to run away from predators. Such spontaneities, as we now know, are less adaptive for healthy living in a rich modern city. In a society in the main based on language brains adaptations in food habits spread rapidly through networks and mass media.
Today's demands for the workplace and communal life, which may be both psychological and physical in nature, trigger the same bodily stress responses that served our ancestors by making them "fit for fight" or "fit for flight." Any situation perceived as a threat or challenge requiring effort, takes signals from the brain to the adrenal medulla, which responds with an output of adrenaline and noradrenalin. These "stress hormones" make the body fit for fight or flight. In the event that the situation induces feelings of distress and helplessness the brain sends messages also to the adrenal cortex, which secretes another stress hormone, cortisol, which plays an important part in the body's defense.
Jobs for human beings should be designed to reduce not stress per se but distress the feelings of helplessness and of "giving up" that are likely to occur when people experience that events and outcomes are independent of their actions. Helplessness is accompanied by an outflow of stress hormones, particularly cortisol.
A number of studies of working life support the view that personal control and influence over the work process are important "buffering" factors, helping workers to achieve a state of effort without distress. Demands are experienced as a stimulus rather than a burden. Under such conditions, the balance between stress hormones is changed: adrenaline increases whereas the cortisol-producing system remains at rest. This means that the total load on the body, the "biological cost of achievement," will be lower.
When we design modern jobs that enhance positive challenge, effort, determination, and involvement, we use medical theories of stress and social theories of leadership in organizations as well as the knowledge of production engineering in which speed and energy efficiency are paramount. It seems meaningless to say that one of these three specialties is more important than the others in solving the problem. We need them all.
In many instances of interpenetration, social scientists have tipped their hats in respect and allowed, say, medical science, to dominate the interpretations made. For example, we have let our understanding of old age be dominated by medical diagnoses of failing bodily functions, deteriorating memory, and dimming of the senses. In other cases social scientists have chosen to ignore any biological interpretation and treated underachievement in schools, crime, poverty, and any social disorder as being socially caused, and something that could be ameliorated by counseling or governmental welfare programs. The results have often been more misleading than illuminating.
This monopolization of knowledge and particularly the applications of knowledge by one or the other of the interpenetrating fields is unwise. We had better let the evidence decide which discourse — biology, physics, or social sciences — is most informative, and search for a synthesis that explains more than each can do by itself.
Technological Aids to Science TECH
Albert Einstein came from a family of skilled instrument makers. Scientific progress thrives on closeness to instruments and other opportunities for observation.
TEXT TO COME
Rationalities in Science
In both the natural and social science we find two modes of rationality. The world, nature, life, technology, culture are, as always, a complicated diversity, into which the scholarly mind has tried to bring some order. But the ways that have been devised to bring order out of this chaos have varied throughout the history of knowledge. We distinguish two major varieties of scientific rationality: analyses and systems.
The different eras in the history of science can be distinguished by bringing together those that were used to wrest order out of chaos during the same periods of time. We have had a somewhat homogeneous period from the time of Francs Bacon (1561-1626) to Albert Einstein (1879-1955). During this era, “modern times,” the sharpest thinkers were of the opinion that man was capable of fully understanding the world, and that the method to attain that understanding was analytical thinking. Max Weber, who has inspired many of our categories used in this book, was a man of those times. But he also created bridges and ushered in emerging systems thinking. Russell Ackhoff (1999) has successfully applied systems thinking to management theory and practice. I will follow some of his views on the difference between the analytical and the systems approaches.
On Analysis
Analytical thinking passes through several steps.
Reductionism. We “go to the bottom,” pulverize and divide complicated phenomena into their components. We can carry this step of the analysis as far as it will go and reach components that do not seem useful to break down further. These were the elements in chemistry, the cells in biology, the particles in physics, the phonemes in linguistics, the genes in the study of heredity, natural laws in certain judicial systems, “one man, one vote” in the tenets of democracy.
Determinism. We seek the underlying causes behind the elements. Analytical thinking holds that everything happens for a reason, and that nothing occurs by pure chance. The causal chain may be complicated, but it can be unraveled and mapped. One must be absolutely definite when describing reality, and the ultimate goal is to uncover rules that do not allow for exceptions.
Causes that have been charted in the study of the elements are held to be necessary and sufficient to explain everything. There is no need to turn to circumstantial factors as causes. The purest illustration of cause and effect is a laboratory situation, an innovation of modern times where all factors can be controlled. Randomization in assigning objects to experimental and control groups control both known and unknown factors; all recorded effects come from the independent variable. Laboratory experiments let us study how one variable at a time can affect the result.
Deduction. The understanding of complicated phenomena can be attained by assembling what we have learned about their component parts. The aim is to find a pattern in the causal chains between the elements in order that we may construct a general explanation, a theory, about the components. A theory captures the most important characteristics of the components and summarizes all the instances of cause and effect that we have observed into the most general and informative propositions, i.e. laws of nature. Such laws describe future observations as well as those already made. The theory is usually constructed and reported as a hierarchy of propositions.
During the modern era, the patterns of thought described here were applied, more or less consciously, not only to science but also to forms of government, legislation and constitutional issues, organizations and business, and even to the fine arts. Their success was formidable.
A certain distrust of analytical thought has emerged in today’s cultural climate. It is nourished by ideas from Gödel, Heisenberg and quantum physics, ideas to be found in hermeneutics and ecology, among other sources. Eastern intellectuals, who have seen Western analytical thought make inroads into their culture as well, would like to see alternatives that are more congenial to Eastern traditions.
On Systems
Analytical thinking aims to shape order out of chaos. An alternative with the same aim is usually called systems approach, but other names are also in use, for example, holism.
A category is normally defined by at least two attributes. It shares one element with a larger class; another element is peculiar to the category defined. This way of organizing knowledge by genus proximum and differentia specifica is an old-fashioned one. It was once the only standard qualifying as scientific. It is still a cornerstone in any "analysis."
The concept of "system" is more recent. It is used rather loosely in most social science, merely signaling that some elements are interconnected. Terminology varies somewhat between different systems theorists, but they all agree that a system is a way of organizing knowledge of elements and wholes.
-
The behavior of each element has an effect on the behavior of the whole.
-
No element has an effect on the whole that is independent of other elements.
-
The elements are so connected that no subgroup of them has an independent effect on the whole.
Systems with an environment – usually consisting of other systems – are said to be "open" while systems without an environment are "closed," i.e. self-contained. A living system has "autopoiesis," meaning that its whole and subgroups are maintained while their constituent elements are periodically consumed and reproduced, disassembled and reconstructed, discarded and invented in new forms.
System thinking can be formalized in equations like analytical thinking. But it need not be. Computer modeling and simulations can often more easily than equations represent a complex system.
Holism. The whole has characteristics that cannot be found in the parts. This thesis debunks what we called the third principle of magical thinking which says that what holds for the part also holds for the whole, and vice versa. The whole, says the systems theorist, acquires unique characteristics through the interaction of its parts, not by the influence that each part has on the whole. No discrete part can do the job of the whole.
If not overloaded, the hull of a sailboat floats on water. If the sail has not been hoisted we cannot be transported over the water, nor does the hull without the sail suffice for the task. The characteristics of a sailboat are not the sum of the characteristics of the hull plus the characteristics of the sail plus the characteristics of the water. The characteristics are created by the interaction of sail and hull, not by the action of the sail and hull taken separately. Moreover, the wind does not only transfer its force to the sail, but also to the water when creating waves. And waves affect the way the hull floats. As a system, a sailboat cannot be understood – or at least cannot be defined in an understandable way – by an analysis of the conventional method of deconstruction. A good understanding of a sailboat begins with the whole, not its component parts.
Teleology. Events are governed not only by cause and effect but also by means and ends. Aristotle identified three causal connections in analytic thinking: a material one (“there is a sail”), a formal one (“the sail is turned toward the wind”), and the effective cause (“the wind transfers its force to the sail”). He then included a cause that was contingent on purpose (“we sail because we want to come to a point in another part of the water”). The latter was banned from analytical thinking, but has returned in holistic thinking. Even in respect to machines — and machines are the triumph of analytic thinking — it has been difficult to exclude teleological ideas (Cf. Rosenblueth & Wiener 1950).
Unique historical and geographic circumstances. Sailing requires a specific environment: water of a certain depth and wind of a certain force. Control of the environment, which is so obvious in laboratory situations, is replaced in system thinking by a full appreciation of the unique situation that makes some things possible and others not.
There are many other things to be said about contemporary systemic and holistic thought, some of which reveal rather fuzzy thinking. The above account will be sufficient here.
A basic claim of the system thinkers is that analytic thinking does not help us to understand systems that actually exist, for example the respiratory, circulatory, and digestive systems of our bodies, or the climate system of our planets. Since analysis starts by taking things apart and studying each part one by one, it destroys the essentials of a system.
In practice, however, this has not turned out to be a serious drawback. It has forced scientists in the analytic tradition to search for, not only the main effect of Factor A on Factor B, but also all the side effects, a routine, for example, in medical research. Interventions in economic and political and other societal systems, even those that have been carefully analyzed in advance, also produce side effects. Human history is full of unplanned consequences of planned events. Reliance on good intentions is far from sufficient for planning or predictions; it is only one factor among many.
Systems in the Social Sciences
The problem of teleology in social science is tied to human intentions. Max Weber, as mentioned, was a scholar of the era of analytical thinking, but he accepted some parts of what we now call systems thought. He saw areas of social science that cannot be studied without paying attention to the teleological considerations found in human intentions. In fact Weber included intentions (subjective meanings) in his very definition of "social action" (Handlung) i.e. behavior invested with intention.
If the intention of an action is to use effective means to reach a rationally chosen goal, Weber called the action "instrumentally rational (zweckrational); for example, a young person who intends to become a judge and he (or she) starts by the rational choice of going through law school. If the intention is to use rational means to reach an uncompromisable goal Weber called the resulting actions "rationally committed to a value" (wertrational); for example, a young person gets a fixed idea that meat is bad for mankind and she or he buys vegetarian food and chooses vegetarian cookbooks and restaurants with vegetarian menus. If an action is a conscious outflow to cope with a person's emotional state Weber calls it "affective"; for example, a young couple are in love and act accordingly. If the action is not consciously new in any of its ways of dealing with means and ends Weber calls it "traditional"; here young and old intend to do and choose to do what they did yesterday and before. This classification of Weber’s has proven useful in the social sciences in many different contexts.
Full-fledged system thinking in the social sciences belongs to the latter half of the twentieth century. The anthropologists then talk about the cultural system, sociologists about the social system, and psychologists about the personality system. Titles of some of important books in social sciences now include the word system, for example, The Social System (Parsons 1952), A Systems Analysis of Political Life (Easton 1965), Soziale Systeme (Luhmann1984), and Social Rule System Theory (Burns & Flam 1987), Comparative Economic Systems (Conklin 1991). It must be said, however, that these books rarely attempt to empirically show that their topics have the strict properties of systems that we have presented above.
For nearly a century the mainstream of social science has broken up human life into four areas, a corporal, a psychological, social, and a cultural level. Or, in the words of Clifford Geertz:
Attempts to locate man amid the body of his customs have taken several directions, adopted diverse tactics; but they have all, or virtually all, proceeded in terms of a single overall intellectual strategy: what I will call, so as to have a stick to beat it with, the "stratigraphic" conception of the relations between biological, psychological, social, and cultural factors in human life. In this conception, man is a composite of "levels," each superimposed upon those beneath it and underpinning those above it. As one analyzes man, one peels off layer after layer, each such layer being complete and irreducible in itself, revealing another, quite different sort of layer underneath. Strip off the motley forms of culture and one finds the structural and functional regularities of social organization. Peel off these in turn and one finds the underlying psychological factors — "basic needs" or what-have-you — that support and make them possible. Peel off psychological factors and one is left with the biological foundations—anatomical, physiological, neurological—of the whole edifice of human life. (Geertz 2000, p. 37.)
Social scientists have usually assumed that these layers, in addition to being separate, are systems. I believe it is time to question both their separateness and their universal possession of strict system properties. By old-fashioned analysis starting from a few products of the language brain we have sketched in this work on The Many-Splendored Society the whole edifice of social life. The totality may have some or all attributes of a system — this should be empirically tested — but many of the systems that fill the social science literature are probably branches of the tree of delusion. This position, of course, will not be popular among those who work in universities organized in departments based on established disciplines, and among those who have investments in academic degrees based on specialties believed to have unique subject matter both in content and as systems.
Providers of Knowledge; Applied Science
The applied scientists dominate over the researchers in the societal realm of science . There are legions of physicians, nurses, engineers, ecologists and many others. Social sciences are applied by social workers, social relation therapists, PR consultants, and others, including many political scientists and economists.
Knowledge becomes more permanently integrated into the social structure through courses that lead to a written recognition of competence or certification. Such certified know-how has becomes a pre-requisite for an ever increasing number of jobs. Most students seek to qualify for such recognition after completing compulsory school, in order to enter a wide range of occupations. The old academic professions, such as priests, jurists, accountants, physicians, engineers and teachers, always carry certification.
An increasing number of new and old non-academic jobs are certified in the advanced countries, be it cooks, electricians, welders, pediatricians, animal wardens, security guards. The certification is done by the state, or by branch organizations. Lacking that, some independent schools provide special diplomas.
The certified are technocrats, a word that is not synonymous with engineer. Technocrats have specialized knowledge; they have become the group in society that administers production, the caring professions, teaching, and communication. They have taken over more and more from the bureaucrats, who are the agents of the leadership’s ubiquitous desire to govern and control. Among the latter we find the officials of the state and local authorities, the ombudsmen of organizations, and the head linemen in companies. They ground their thinking in the instructions of the powers-that-be, or in resolutions passed at a congress or similar authorities. The technocrats, on the other hand, justify their positions on the grounds of reason and facts acquired as a result of their special competence and schooling.
A technocrat wants to be able to question whatever he considers to be superstition within his area and therefore requires freedom of expression. Bureaucrats in administration, on the other hand, argue only in terms of the goals that their superiors have set up; moreover, they are apt to regard freedom of expression to be but an annoying factor at the workplace.
In many areas in democratic states, liberation of the technocrats from the bureaucracy of the powers-that-be has been evident. However, in authoritarian and totalitarian states, the process is constantly threatened by one of the characteristics of Stalinism: the subordination of technocrats to the bureaucrats of the political administration.
Are the schools for young people certifying technocrats steered to a greater or lesser extent by bureaucrats (school authorities) than by technocrats (teachers)? The answer suggests a paradox. The very system of education that has transformed larger segments of the total society from bureaucratic rule to technocratic rule is itself often ruled in painful detail by a bureaucracy!
Engineers TECH
In earlier days engineering tasks – weaving cloths, building fireplaces, making cooking utensils, providing weapons for the hunt and the wars – were not very formalized. Also, at the first schools of engineering in the modern era one would study construction, road building, shipbuilding, mining, and other practical trades. Only later did science proper enter, and engineering became organized under headings such as mechanical engineering, chemical engineering, electrical engineering, outer space engineering, et cetera, i.e. disciplines defined by the areas of scientific knowledge as they applied to practical ends.
In a study like ours that looks at society through the window of language, the most relevant technologies concern transmissions of symbols. The development at the turn of the century of handheld communicators combining cellular phones (oral) with input by hand (written), SMS messaging, email (printable), voice mail (audible) and cameras (pictorial) gave a person of the new century an easily used device with all symbol-carrying modes in one handy tool. (In Britain it was actually called "a handy.") This device may also include a computer with a memory more exact than the human one. Here you can store or download your archive of writings, your catalogue of relatives, friends, and contacts, your calendar, your favorite music, books to be read by you — or to you by an artificial voice. The facilities include the downloading of your newspaper, and live radio and television. The device may also include a GPS so that you know where you are and can find the way to where you want to go. You may also use such a device as a remote control to open your doors and to run your home theater, etc. It may also be used instead of a credit card for purchases or bank transactions. Such a super-handy helper in mass production in the 2010s may change everyday life to make it seem almost magic by earlier standards. The amazing fact is that the devices will be cheap and simple. So-called "cloud computing" stores programs and databases on the network to be available in your device only when you need them, thus cutting down its size and market price. The old advertising slogan "the network is the computer" becomes a reality when networks become practically as fast as computers. The once unsurpassable difference between the small world of private encounters and the global world is shrinking dramatically.
Physicians Bio
Hippocrates of Kos (ca. 460 BC – ca. 370 BC) created a practice of medicine void of magic for the ancient Greeks. (More)
The bodily spontaneity of mankind can be suppressed by Freudian Unbehagen norms. They can also be enhanced by different social designs. A most remarkable such design is the system of modern medicine. It is modifying the most fundamental spontaneous bodily sequence of birth, growth, decay, and death.
more to come
On Books Organizing Applied Knowledge
As professions based on applied science develop, there emerges a need to organize knowledge as manuals, which differ from both the analytic and the systemic paradigm. The engineer's handbook differs from a textbook in physics. A manual for teaching is different from a book on psychological theory. Manuals for ecologists are still rare, and may look much like an old-fashioned flora of botany. This may be due to the fact that ecology only recently has developed into a major profession. In medicine the last hundred years have seen a drastic reorganization of its knowledge to better serve a physician at work.
”Definition,” ”History of Knowledge,” ”Incidence,” ”Etiology,” ”Symptoms,” ”Prognosis,” ”Diagnosis,” ”Treatment,” and ”Prevention” are the subheads used by Sir William Osler in his classical work Principles and Practice of Medicine (1892) to organize medical knowledge for fingertip use by physicians. This format proved superior to both the analytical and systemic presentations in anatomy, histology, physiology, etc. Rather it is centered on the needs of the situation in which a physician examines a patient. In a standardized fashion Osler tells the physician where to look, what to look for, and, depending on what he finds, how to treat the patient. At the same time, the author reminds the physician of the relevant knowledge acquired in the systematic study of anatomy, histology, physiology, etc., and also points out where knowledge is missing. He often gives a reference to the history of knowledge about a disease. For half a century new medical knowledge could easily be fitted into this schema and Osler's textbook enjoyed numerous editions.
A main task of physicians is to relieve mankind of deceases. However, they have also another task: To provide excuse that relieve sick people from work and other demanding obligations. Instead, the excused are expected to follow their doctor's orders. Since this is a book on social science, not medical science, we have, as the reader soon will see, something to say about the latter task. In writing out sick certificates in welfare states the doctors do not seem to have much formal training in medical school, nor any binding handbooks!
In a book dealing with societal realms such as the one you now read, it is of considerable interest to look at the sciences that specialize in particular realms, for example, economics and political science. To a considerable extent economics is an applied science centered on the goal of a sustainable maximization of the cardinal value of riches. Looking at the micro-level of encounters, the economists who are followers of Leon Walras' general equilibrium show how prices transplant and travel through networks of markets, accumulating increasing wealth. Looking at the macro-level of total societies, Keynesian economists show how riches grow by investments.
Political science has few theories with the formal elegance of economics, but it has a good body of non-mathematical theories. On balance, they assume with Locke that consent of the governed is the most efficient way of achieving and maintaining order.
There is basic research and confirmed theories in both economics and political science. But most research in these fields is applied; the vision of economists and political scientists is narrowed to concerns with wealth and order, respectively. Economics and political science cannot fully account for a many-splendored society that has other cardinal values in addition to riches and order.
Procurers of Science
The American business community is slowly coming to realize that you cannot buy research findings the same way as you buy other goods for your enterprise. The American polity has slowly come to realize that research findings do not follow any politically approved plans. The failed attempt to squelch stem cell research by the Bush administration is a case in point.
Such insights are not so common in Europe. Europe's (in Gaullist fashion) micromanaged research policies cannot provide Europe with a more creative research environment than the American one. Politicians and businessmen can, of course, desire to investigate a certain subject and pay for the work, but they cannot control how researchers work. There exist many false hopes about the relation between science and politics and other realms; some altogether too smart science entrepreneurs play on these false expectations, and make extravagant promises in return for big appropriations.
In a many-splendored society, knowledge that is politically steered is as much an anathema as is politically dictated art, religion, or ethics.
The role of Procurer of resources from other realms of society to the realm of science is not standardized. We have some fragile mechanisms that permit politicians to determine an overall scope of allocations of tax money for scientific research but not how they should be used. A research council is such a mechanism. There are also research foundations with private (non-government) funds that operate like research councils. An example is Stiftung Volkswagenwerk in Germany. The core of the research council model is the work of groups of scientists, usually called "panels," that rank projects proposed by other researchers in terms of scientific merits. It is the voice of the research community that is heard in a research council, not that of politicians, of businessmen, or of council administrators.
The panel system of research councils can be made ineffective by monopolizing the realm's rewards (Proposition 7:4 cited above). Most councils I have encountered have too many panels, as many as there are scientific specialties. This is actually what professors usually favor in order to monopolize their real rewards, as we noticed also in the organization of the Humboltian universities. Then dead-end specialties survive and new specialties may be blocked from the support they deserve. Research councils with few panels manned by scholars who have a broad view and who have expertise in several fields deliver the best decisions of support to research.
A research council is not a perfect system for financing research. Research done in non-university hospitals, private-sector institutes, and museums seems by and large unrepresented in existing councils, which is an unnecessary limitation. European research councils, in particular, have obvious difficulties to adjust to the fact that the lion's share of research takes place outside the universities. If you attended a meeting or read the minutes of the Nordic research councils around the millennium you would think that all research is university research.
Self-censure, favoritism and fashion may certainly affect the work on a research council, and their presence suggests that professors are not altogether the independent thinkers they believe they are. But it is the best system we have. It is a system that gives chances to individual projects that cannot fit into the big, politically approved research programs. And it is clearly better than the rigid and centralized system of sponsoring research practiced by the European Union under the Lisbon accord that shall harness the realm of science to make Europe competitive with North America and the Far East.
Please send your comments after reading this chapter by email to the author.
Chapter 19
The Realm of Art: A Search for Beauty
Figure 19.1. Art in Society
Organizations, Networks, and Media in the Realm of Art
Makers, Keepers, Broker, and Takers in Art
The Pre-dominance of Emotive Symbolism
in Art
Kitsch
Aesthetes have a lifestyle that constantly makes them look for
opportunities to stop and contemplate something beautiful or artistic. Aesthetes need beauty in order to feel good about themselves and life, to
reveal and tolerate the drabness and imperfections of everyday living. An aesthetics lifestyle can permeate all aspects of living. In many ways it is
true that most anything – food, pots and pans, furniture, housing, sewing,
boxing, sex, conversations, ice hockey, marching, military battles, and what
have you – can be more or less artistic. It can also be totally inartistic, or
kitsch. Aesthetes may themselves be practicing artists, but need not be, and
most are not. If
available to them, they visit art galleries and museums, frequent concerts, the theatre
and the ballets, read the recipients of the Nobel Prize for literature, and have
an eye for interesting architecture. They keep informed about dramas on TV and
on video, or of recent pieces of fiction, have an eye for interesting
architecture and for beauty in the home. When choosing a vacation destination they prefer
Florence to a beach resort.
The Western history of art has broody three phases. In the long classical phase
from antiquity to end second half of the 18th century art was seen as a mirror, usually a
beatifying mirror, showing objects, persons, or ideals. In the following romantic
period art became lamp producing a new light radiating as artistic reality (Abrams 1971, Chap 2-3). In a third period, from the end of the 19th
century through the 20th century, modernist art not only radiates but shapes its
objects into new-fangled gestalts.
The image of the arts as a place for lone geniuses is as wrong as is the image
of science as a playground for solitary whiz kids. Artists are embedded in a
community with all the attributes of a full-fledged realm, as seen in Figure
19.1. Today we accept the varieties of art, not only as individual showpieces,
but as social products (Becker 1982). As such they are part of and also shaped by the structuration of
the total society, an idea that many have touched upon and that was entered into cumulative
sociology by Loewenthal (1963).
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
Societal Realm
Science
Economy
Polity
Art
Religion
Morality
B
Type of Symbol
Executive
Executive
Executive
Emotive
Emotive
Emotive
C
Lifestyle
Learning
Money-
Civic-
Aesthetes
Believers
Welfare-
D
Cardinal Value
Knowledge
Wealth
Beauty
Sacredness
Virtue
E
Stratification
Competence
Class
Power
Taste
Piety
Rectitude
F
Reward System
Honor of
Monetary
Positions
Artistic fame
Reverence
Testimonials
G
Rationality
Scientific
Market
Democracy
Balance
Salvation rituals
Ethics
H
Type of Freedom
Academic
Free trade
Civic
Artistic
Religious
Freedom of
I
Spontaneous order
Self-
Market
Public
Art improvi-
Non-ritual
Unplanned
J
Organizations
Laboratory
Firms
Bureaucracy
Theatres
Temples
Humanitarian
K
Networks
Learned
Bazaars
Electorates
“La vie de
Sects
Moral
L
Mass media
Lectures
Marketing
Tribunes
Stages
Holy texts
Appeals to
M
Makersof cardinal value
Scholarly
Innovators
Legislators
Creative
Prophets
Creators of
N
Keepers
Librarians
Bankers
Judges
Critics
Clergy
Ethicists
O
Brokers
Technocrats
Tradesmen
Officials
Entertainers
Preachers
Moralists
P
Takers
Research
Consumers
Subjects
Fans of
Believers
Decent
Q
Providers
of cardinal values
Physicians
Central bankers
Legal
Esthetics
Chaplains
to
Ethics
R
Procurers
of values from other realms
Research
Tax men
Lobbyists
Persons and organizations on the outlook to other
The
letters marking the rows and columns are those introduced in Book 2 An
Edifice of Symbols. They are also found in The Table of Societal Realms in
Chapter 9 as a summary of various language-products that are constituent of
social reality. The present table is a replica with the column of Art given
emphasis. Note that Rows C though G help define social phenomena, while
the phenomena mentioned in Columns 1 though 6 rows J through R provide
illustrations of social phenomena, not their definitions.
Art is not something aloft in society. Like other societal realms, art has a community of organizations, networks,
and media (Se Figure 17:2, Columns J-L).
Beauty as the Cardinal
Value of Art
Figure 19.2. Semiotics of Beauty
Beauty and Beast
Accumulation of Beauty
Art and Brain Functions
Stratification and Rewards in Art
Order and Leadership in Art
Spontaneous Order In Art
Rationality in Art
Debunking Magic in Art
Technology in the Creation of Art
Providing Art Education in
Schools
Embedding Beauty
A Coda on Science and Art
Properties of the Artistic Realm
Figure 19.1. Art in Society
description
evaluation
prescription
description
evaluation
prescription
Buffs
Centered
Minded
Minded
Order
discovery
rewards
Tributes
method
economy
diplomacy
Congruency
freedom
liberties
license
freedom
conscience
corrections
prices
opinions
sations
prayers
civilities
Academy
Unions
Legislatures
Museums
Cloisters
civil society
societies
Markets
>
Rallies
Bohème”
movements
Monographs
Advertising
Propaganda
Exhibits
Cults
idealism
researchers
Entrepreneur
Civic leaders
artists
high norms
of cardinal value
“Educated”
Insurers
Persecutors
Performers
Monks nuns
of cardinal values
Teachers
Freighters
Civic workers
Exhibitors
Missionaries
of cardinal values
students
Customers
Citizens
culture
Seekers
people
Engineers
advisors
guides
other realms
counselors
applicants
realms for something beneficial to the realm of artOrganizations, Networks, and Media in the Realm of Art
Art also has its networks. There are coteries for dance, visual arts, theatre, music, literature, et cetera. There are colonies of artists. Some networks of artists join in what outsiders call la vie de bohème, networks with a mysterious mix of spontaneities and oddities. Some of their elements may be less welcome in polite society. But there are limits to an artistic, individualistic, and bohemian lifestyle. It is set by the stable organizations in the societal realm of art. In theatres, art galleries, publishing houses, et cetera there are staffs, rules, schedules, budgets, and bosses. La vie de bohème is also hard work.
Special mass media for art have developed in the form of stages, galleries, and publishing houses. More than other societal realms, however, the arts are their own media. Many works of art speak directly to its public. But they are helped by a clear view, and are also benefitting from an allowance of perspective. A copy of the original equestrian statue of Emperor Marcus Aurelius from 176 DC stands 3.5 meters tall on its platform in the middle of Campidoglio, a square on the Capitolium hill in Rome, easily seen by all. For full effect, the square slopes somewhat against the edges; this gentle cone broadcasts the centerpiece.
A reverse and steeper cone-shape marks classical and modern theatres in which an audience is seated to focus on a limited stage. In another arrangement, the Guggenheim Museum in New York leads its public along a spiral path that allows you to see exhibited pictures from above and below, as well as from left and right as in other museums.
On balance, the arts need less booming advertising than other social realms to reach out with its cardinal value. It is usually helped by an environment conducive to contemplation by its audience.
Makers, Keepers, Broker, and Takers in Art
A division of labor in the realm of art separates central figures of the creative artists, who belong in the category of Makers (Row M in Figure 19.1). The most creative artists are on the same level in society as prophets in religions, famed researchers in science, great statesmen in political life, and the legendary business entrepreneurs. Makers of fiction and poetry are the natural examples in a book focused on language and society. All art, however, is not language in the usual sense. There is much more than literary pursuit under the umbrella of art: painting, sculpture, the dance, singing and music, architecture, are all non-language pursuits, wholly or in part. But with language we can talk about art in all its different forms. This is done by Keepers, such as critics, museum curators, and theatre producers. They guide Brokers such as actors, dancers, and other performing artists to bring art to the ultimate Takers, the fans of culture.
The leadership Keepers and Brokers of art is not quite the same as the discipline and leadership in the body politic or in business. In art, good leaders usually emphasize another style. Ingmar Bergman, the movie and theatre director knew the secret of stirring his co-workers to strive for excellence and to surmount conflicts in the interest of a common goal. How many men would even contemplate bringing together in the same project a number of their ex-wives and lovers on the premise that they will work in harmony and deliver optimal performances? What was his secret?
Bergman was not only an accomplished director of motion pictures; he was also an intuitive guide of human potential. Frictions that might plausibly be expected to arise on the set are dissipated by an even more compelling force. To each member of his cast Bergman seems able to give a unique gift: to gain access to the undiscovered and richest lodes within one’s being and be guided in mining them to one’s own delight. This is a reward of an entirely different quality and power than conventional praise or tangible compensations for performance. It spurs one to the highest level of accomplishment because of the sheer pleasure in growing as an adult, as a craftsman, as an artist, and as a professional. Unlike traditional incentives, the effects are long-lasting and cumulative. And so Bergman could orchestrate his players so that each strives to summon the finest tones out of his own instrument — himself — in the creation of the final total product (Frankel 198x).
Some Takers of art, often with much knowledge, money, and a critical bent, become collectors, a special brand of Keepers. Contrary of having a passion that has gone desperate or astray that people tend to attribute to collectors, the plain fact is that collectors love art and repeatedly fall in love with some object of art. They collect because it make them happy, others do it because they want to become rich in due time, still others collect to live out their big egos, or what have you. A well-known type is the art dealers who invest their profits in private collections.
The social role of modern art collectors has been vividly analyzed by James Stourton (2007). He finds that the collectors of paintings in the latter half of the Twentieth Century are less of private collectors than earlier generations. They usually print at least partial catalogs of their collections. They lend their most celebrated pieces to museums, or they show them in other ways to the public. The advertising mogul Charles Saatchi, for one, collects exclusively to exhibit. In this way the collectors are not only a sophisticated Takers of art products, but they join the Brokers of art to the general public, and also to budding and active artists, who may thus find new shoulders to stand on in their creative pursuits.
The Predominance of Emotive Symbolism in Art
Art has a special but limited place in a book focused on language and society. All art is not language in the usual sense. There is much more than literary pursuit under the umbrella of art: painting, sculpture, the dance, singing and music, architecture, all non-language pursuits, wholly or in part. But with language we can talk about art in all its different forms.
The arts of words, i.e. poetry, fiction, recitation, and theatre, remain our key concerns as students of society and language. These art forms make use of all the various usages of symbols that we have delineated – descriptions, evaluations, and prescriptions. Their most typical form, as we have pointed out in Cell B4 in our Periodic Table of Societal Realms (Figure 9.6 and 19.1), is the emotive description, not any one, but those deemed worthy of contemplation. Not all describing, not even all emotive descriptions, is artistic. A big concentration of emotive portrayals is found in what we call entertainment, the artistic content of which varies a great deal.
Prose is the given form of language in fiction. Some novelists – Hemingway, for one – tell us about a series of events and the lines of speech of their personages. The readers have to infer their feelings. Most authors, however, also name feelings, thoughts, memories, thus presuming that the selves of the readers can respond. This is not self-evident; many grew up with a poor vocabulary of feelings containing mainly an abundance of swearwords.
James Joyce's autobiographical Finnegans Wake is an experiment in using speech rather than prose as the main vehicle of a novel. Speech, as we know, depends on understanding gestures and knowing a context that can fill in the missing words or sentences. It takes considerable effort to do this on the basis of the pages of the novel. The tongue spoken in the book is Dublin-English of the early twentieth century with many juicy sayings unknown to us. The difficulty is augmented by some hilarious mispronunciations and also some puns on words from other languages that Joyce commanded. But some connoisseurs swear that this has been the reading experience of their lifetime.
Poetry is language using words to peak far behind words. "Über allen Gipfeln / Ist Ruh" brings restful calm. "Tiger, Tiger, burning bright / In the forest of the night" brings fear and trembling. An amazing number of human experiences seem reachable by poetry and its tools of meters, rhythms, alliterations, rimes, et cetera.
Beauty as the Cardinal Value of Art
"Art is harmony," said Georges Seurat (cited in Gayford and Wright 2000 p 570), one of the last of the great artists to subscribe to this classical doctrine. Seurat was the neo-impressionist French painter who, like a scientist, explored how adjacent tiny brush strokes of different colors – later in the digital age called "pixels" – made paintings shimmer. The year was 1890 and Saurat's innovation was the last one in painted beauty before art swung away from naturalistic renditions. The new agenda of art became a search beyond the logic of the language and mathematical brains and beyond the infatuation of the spatial brain with symmetry, in short, beyond most everything that the old called "beauty." The daring of art should not stop at beautiful nudes.
"Beauty is a mess, a sinkhole, a trap." So starts Arthur Krystal (2005) his review in Harper's Magazine of the English translation of Storia della bellezza, a volume edited by Umberto Eco and Girolamo de Michele (2004). As we know, modern art can very well be a stinking sinkhole. For example, it may be installations of hanging meat, popular at the turn of the century and shown in Stockholm in 2004. After a few weeks in the museum the meat stinks and must be replaced by fresh meat. Well arranged, however, such an installation reaches into an old bodily spontaneity to acquire for human use the protein accumulated by animals. Also, it becomes a rendering of man's lust to slaughter his cattle and hunt and kill animals. We would agree, however, that the word "beauty," as most people know it, is too narrow to fit such art.
To begin to orient us in the complexities of beauty let us place it in a semiotic square, the device we use to tell what something is and what it is not. Greimas' Semiotic Square, we recall from Chapter 2, is an aid to make clarifications and innovations in social reality.
Figure 19.2. Semiotics of Beauty
The main poles of this semiotic square have well-known attributes. Umberto Eco in a parallel volume on ugliness to the one about beauty has a long list:
If we examine the synonyms of beautiful and ugly, we see that while what is considered beautiful is: pretty, cute, pleasing, attractive, agreeable, lovely, delightful, fascinating, harmonious, marvellous, delicate, graceful, enchanting, magnificent, stupendous, sublime, exceptional, fabulous, wonderful, fantastic, magical, admirable, exquisite, spectacular, splendid, and superb; what is ugly is: repellent, horrible, horrendous, disgusting, disagreeable, grotesque, abominable, repulsive, odious, indecent, foul, dirty, obscene, repugnant, frightening, abject, monstrous, horrid, horrifying, unpleasant, terrible, terrifying, frightful, nightmarish, revolting, sickening, foetid, fearsome, ignoble, ungainly, displeasing, tiresome, offensive, deformed, and disfigured. (Eco 2007 p.10)
Pictures, sculptures, architectural structures, the ballet are art media that have
what the Germans aesthetics call Erscheinung, something appearing from a
surface that becomes emotively moving and inviting contemplation.
This is the
core of spatial beauty. A picture or sculpture of an animal, such as a Temple
Cat from ancient Egypt, may bring Erscheinung. A landscape painted in a certain
season and in a certain light may likewise have special Erscheinung. (In most
periods of human life, however, this piece of nature, our beautiful landscape,
has merely been a dangerous territory.) The surface may be a human body in
ancient Greece throwing a discus, as sculptured by Myron. Or, it may be 2711
cement blocks (Stelen) spread over 19 000 square meters in the memorial
of the victims of the Holocaust erected close to The Brandenburg Tor in Berlin.
Visitors walking through this area find themselves in a labyrinth with passages
that can only be passed one person at a time, a walk that often lingers long in
sorrow or anger in memory.
Erscheinung
is a common denominator in classical and modern art. Mark Rothko's "Green on
Maroon" is a modern version of the classical sublime.
Kitsch
Most surfaces evoke no Erscheinung at all. To package such a surface as beauty or art is a sham and an illusion. We have called it Kitsch in the semiotic square. It is uninteresting and does not inspire contemplation.
There have been efforts by some famous critics to be profound about kitsch. I think the term serves us best as something superficial, a simple label of the considerable amount of tacky, uninteresting stuff and tastelessness that fills the planet. Non-art pretending to be art is kitsch.
Beauty and Beast
When the beautiful is spiced with something ugly we enter a fourth area in the semiotic square, here labeled Beauty & Beast. It is not kitsch, nor sheer ugliness, because it has elements of beauty. The element of beauty and the element of ugliness may be separate, as in illustrations of Little Red Riding Hood and the wolf. Or, they may be integrated. In his volume on Ugliness in art, Umberto Eco selected Rembrandt '"The Anatomy Lesson of Dr. Nicolaes Tulp," in which an ugly corpse is integrated in the lesson on anatomy. [This painting is reproduced in Chapter 1 where its significance for the development of the European realm of art was discussed.] X-rays have revealed that Rembrandt originally painted the corpse with a hand cut off, a punishment inflicted by criminal courts in his days. Later he reduced the ugliness by restoring a full hand. Apparently Rembrandt's instinct was that ugliness must be rationed if a painting in the category we call Beauty & Beast shall be worthy of contemplation.
Accumulation of Beauty
Beauty accumulates. In some sense, all generations of Makers of cardinal values such as knowledge and riches stand on the shoulders of predecessors. So do the artists in their creating beauty. New generations of painters, architects, and composers are inspired by bygone generations in exploring new angles and themes. The poets can explicitly relate to one another in the medium of their art. Virgil cites Homer, Dante brings in Virgil as guide in his Divine Comedy, and TS Eliot interacts unambiguously with both Virgil and Dante. Thus Makers of art stand in touch with one another over time and space.
In most cases we learn about how artists find inspiration from one another by studying comparative art, or the history of literature. The artists do not stand on each other's shoulders in the same erect and domineering positions as scientists of different generations assume when they nullify old knowledge by new knowledge. In the realm of art, old beauty survives. And the artists may be more dependent on the pursuit of beauty by predecessors than they usually admit.
Art and Brain Functions Bio
Art gets us in touch with older sites in the human brain than its language function. In our review of the image of the human brain (Chapter 1) we distinguished reptilian, spatial, gesturing, pictorial, musical, mathematical brains, in addition to the language brain. Art finds expressions of congruity with all these brains. The artists have secured a special freedom, artistic license, in this task.
Two-dimensional images in mosaics, tiles, frescos, paintings, or photos are recorded in our picture brains. Three-dimensional images such as sculptures or architectural structures are recorded in our spatial brain and interpreted in the picture brain. Images of ballet are recorded in our spatial and interpreted by our gesture brains.
Dance takes us into the brain of gestures. Music and singing activate their own special site of the human brain. In chansons they combine with the poetry produced by the language brain. In opera, music is combined with the libretto of the language brain, with the gesture brain in its ballet scenes, with the pictorial brain in the decor of the wings, and with the spatial brain in the design of the stage. The opera house itself is a product of architecture, the pursuit of beautifully engineered shelters for human activities. Other art forms that entirely depend on language, such as poetry, literary fiction, and theatre, can reach deeper sites in our brains. If they fail in that, they are only words, words, words.
An artist can thus take us to the level of biological spontaneities, be they
sleep, awakening, sex , violence, and what have you. Hungarian children and
adults and scores of tourists visit the National Gallery in Budapest in search
of "The Yawning Journeyman" by Mihály Munkácsy. Sleep is a topic of all forms of
art. "The Sleeping Beauty" is a fairy tale by Charles Perrault from 1697, a
watercolor (guache) by Sir Edward Burne-Jones in 1871, a ballet by Tchaikovsky
in 1890, a film by Walt Disney in 1959.
We recall that the music brain precedes the development of the language brain. Children meet art in lullabies that reassure them that the world is still there while they sleep. This one was dedicated by Johannes Brahms to a young attractive singer and her infant:
And children also recognize the end of sleep, for example in their own beloved musical wake-up calls:
Sex is a favorite topic in art. Pablo Picasso, with a teenage lover,
Marie-Thérèse Walter, presents her sensual curvilinear body in a red armchair.
Her round face is painted white, intersected by a profile in blue.
The
profile can also be seen as a second figure leaning over to embrace the nude
with his arms and a kiss, a gesture of closeness that has become a symbol of
love. In this painting Picasso has turned common sex-related spuma into art and a
message of love.
Successful artistic forays into the deep waters of human existence inevitably stir up our emotions. We are moved when encountering the spatial symmetry the figures present in ancient Greek sculptures. There is an aha in seeing the golden rule divide the surface of a wall in architecture. There is terror and a sting of fear in reading Conrad's Heart of Darkness or attending Shakespeare's King Lear, and fear and anger in seeing Goya's Execution of the Defenders of Madrid. There is amazement as Beethoven's overtures Egmont or Leonore mobilize our sphere of emotions of freedom. The Taj Mahal complex in Agra in India evokes more feelings than mere admiration: is this the dwelling of the dead?
Tolstoy (1901) was right in telling us that an emotional impulse is ever-present in artistic expressions. To share in this impulse widens our sensibilities. The strength of emotions may range from total stillness where also the shadows sleep to a total roar of unbearable pain or excitement. The latter extreme, however, may be counterproductive, at least in literature, as it is an obstacle to any verbalization and is unfit in poetry as we know it (Götlind 1961).
Spuma – words that come after our bodily spontaneities but have no part in guiding these spontaneities – in the hands of Shakespeare's genius may become great art, as in the familiar Sonnet XVIII:
Shall I compare thee to a summer’s day?
Thou art more lovely and more temperate:
Rough winds do shake the darling buds of May,
And summer’s lease hath all too short a date:
Sometime too hot the eye of heaven shines,
And often is his gold complexion dimm’d;
And every fair from fair sometime declines,
By chance or nature’s changing course untrimm’d;
But thy eternal summer shall not fade
Nor lose possession of that fair thou owest;
Nor shall Death brag thou wander’st in his shade,
When in eternal lines to time thou growest:
So long as men can breathe or eyes can see,
So long lives this and this gives life to thee.
The vocabulary of this poem is borrowed from meteorology, botany, and from gerontology, the knowledge of aging and death. But the meaning of the words is not the usual. A bodily spontaneity of observing a man — the poem may be assumed to be a male-to-male homage — produced this lovely spuma. A lust of forbidden love-making shines through, and there is also a deeply genuine and emotively engaging recounting of eternal love, and of course, an admirable play of words, as behooves a sonnet.
Stratification and Rewards in Art
Like knowledge, beauty cannot be achieved without an effort to learn. It is telling that the German word Kunst (art) has the same root as können (having knowledge and/or skills). There is a satisfaction in "knowing art" that adds to aesthetes' experience of art. The knowledgeable element in art — in making, keeping, and purveying to its consumers — is brought out in what is called "taste." Taste can be achieved, taught, and measured. It is reasonable to give grades in courses in art, and it is right to have academic degrees in arts. All depiction is not artistic painting. All stonework is not sculpturing. All body work is not ballet. All emotive descriptions are not literature. The difference between no art and art, and between bad art and good art, that is "taste."
An extensive interview survey in France by Pierre Bourdieu (1979) covers home decor and home architecture, leisure-time activities, literature, music, pictorial art, and theatre. It shows how class position is reinforced in everyday life by distinctions in taste. Traditionally defined good taste is dependent on a separation from the necessities of daily labor. This traditionally good taste is positively correlated with other forms of stratification, mostly economic class and political power. Working class taste and culture certainly exists, but it tends to define itself not on its own terms, but with reference to the taste of higher and more leisured classes.
Art critics are the arbiters of taste. To read a skilled critic is generally helpful, but no substitute for partaking of the real work of art. It takes openness to pre-language brains to create and appreciate art. The critics and commentators on art are stuck with using words when they review art. This is why their job is so special and difficult. It is not a main task of the artist to be articulate about art; it is the chore of the critic. Their counterparts in other realms, for example, judges in the court system, accountants in the economy, and professors of social science, have easier jobs; they use words to describe and analyze subject matters that are words or figures.
The main modern rewards in all realms of art seem to be five. First, billings at performances and exhibits, second, appreciation by critics and colleagues, third, big crowds of attendance giving loud and long applause when appropriate, fourth, medals, prizes, stipends, and fifth, good publicity in mass media. But the reward patterns in art seem less clear-cut to add up than in, say, business, science, or politics. For a contemporary painter, for example, they would include the number of his private shows, the number and kind of reviews by critics, the rating of the galleries in which his paintings have been exhibited, the number of solo exhibits, the prominence of the collectors who have acquired his paintings, the number of his paintings hanging in museums. Such credits are recounted at auctions and art sales and assist in setting market prices for the paintings. In art, however, the economic rewards are not all that matters; if so, all artists would seek work at advertising agencies or industrial design departments.
Order and Leadership in Art
The social order in art is not the same as the discipline and leadership in the body politic or in business. In art, good leaders have another style. Ingmar Bergman, the movie and theatre director, had the secret of stirring his co-workers to strive for excellence and to surmount conflicts in the interest of a common goal. How many men would even contemplate bringing together in the same project a number of their ex-wives and lovers on the premise that they will work in harmony and deliver optimal performances? What is his secret?
Bergman is not only an accomplished director of motion pictures; he is also an intuitive guide of human potential. Frictions that might plausibly be expected to arise on the set are dissipated by an even more compelling force. To each member of his cast Bergman seems able to give a unique gift: to gain access to the undiscovered and richest lodes within one’s being and be guided in mining them to one’s own delight. This is a reward of an entirely different quality and power than conventional praise or tangible compensations for performance. It spurs one to the highest level of accomplishment because of the sheer pleasure in growing as an adult, as a craftsman, as an artist, and as a professional. Unlike traditional incentives, the effects are long-lasting and cumulative. And so Bergman can orchestrate his players so t final total product (Frankel 198x)
Some Takers of art, often with much knowledge, money, and a critical bent, become collectors, a special brand of Keepers. This is another meaning of accumulation in art. Contrary to a passion that has gone desperate or astray that people attribute to collectors, the plain fact is that collectors love art and repeatedly fall in love with some object of art. They collect because it make them happy, others do it because they want to become rich in due time, still others collect to live out their big egos, or what have you. A well-known type is the art dealers who invest their profits in private collections.
The social role of modern collectors has been vividly analyzed by James Stourton (2007). He finds that the collectors of paintings in the latter half of the Twentieth Century are less of private collectors than earlier generations. They print at least partial catalogs of their collections. They lend their most celebrated pieces to museums, or they show them in other ways to the public. The advertising mogul Charles Saatchi, for one, collects only to exhibit. In this way the collectors are not only a sophisticated Takers of art products, but they join the Providers of art to the general public and also to budding and active artists, who may thus find new shoulders to stand on in their creative pursuits.
Spontaneous Order in Art
Improvising poets are known at ancient Greece festivals and celebrations. The great Sappho, a female poet, was one of them. Improvising master singers compete and inspire one another in Wager's 1868 opera from about them, set in Nürnberg. Graffiti is often improvisations. Susan Sontag (2001, p. 148) dates the acceptance of graffiti by modern artists to 1844 when Grandville (Jean-ignace-isidore Gérard), a French artist mostly remembered for his caricatures and cartoons, made a self-portrait showing himself drawing alongside a small child on a graffiti-covered wall. Its message is “we are in this together, inspiring one another.”
A full-fledged and successful spontaneous order of music came with the jazz band, an early twentieth-century American black music innovation. Improvising jazz players differ from members of a symphony orchestra since they have no common score and are much freer to express themselves as they please. When a jazz player takes the lead in a solo and shows musical articulacy the others wait him out, getting spurred to match him, but never to drown him out. Terry Eagelton, the British professor and critic, elevates this spontaneous order to the very meaning of life:
There is pleasure to be reaped from this artistry, and — since there is a free fulfillment or realization of powers — there is also happiness in the sense of flourishing. Because this flourishing is reciprocal, we can even speak, remotely and analogically, of a kind of love. One could do worse, surely, than propose such a situation as the meaning of life — both in the sense that it is what makes life meaningful, and — more controversially — in the sense that when we act in this way, we realize our natures at their finest. (Eagelton 2007, p. 172)
Rationality in Art
The rationality of classical art is its symmetry, harmony, and clarity. Its rationality combines those of the spatial, musical, gesture brains. The spatial brain contributes the beauty of geometry. The musical brain contributes the beauty of melody with its accords. Clarity is essential to both, but particularly to the gesture brain for which the ambiguous gesture is a mark of irrationality. But strangely enough, the Parthenon in Athens is not a geometrically square box: it tapers off ever so little. And Mona Lisa's face is not absolutely symmetrical. It is as if classical and great art winks to you with a message that there is something more to come.
The rationality of modern art is harder to grasp. In 1917 Marcel Duchamp, a member of a French family of artists who became an American, took a ready-made urinal, laid it on its back, added a graffiti signature "R. Mutt 1917," named it "Fountain," and sent it to be exhibited. Consciously or not, Duchamp brought not only a ready-made into art, but also a more trivial biological spontaneity than sleep, sex, and violence into art.
Eighty-eight years later "The Fountain" was voted the most influential artwork
of the 20th century by 500 selected British critics. The motivations for
Duchamp's fame are expressed in floods of fancy words. In the terminology used
in these pages there is an
Unbehagen norm
in modern cities that you must not urinate in the streets.
This prescription becomes a part of toilet training, and what we have learned
from Freud applies. Duchamp's Fountain is a utensil from a public toilet, a
place of relief for male city dwellers. The simplest motivation for the fame of
"The Fountain" is that it signaled that art had found its congruence with a most
basic bodily spontaneity, urinating.
But in the end it isn't quite as simple as that. Not any mass-produced utensil you see when you pass a torn-down house, a garbage dump, or a garage sale is art. Nor can it be turned into art by mailing it to a gallery. There is an esthetic selection in Duchamp's urinal, not unlike that of finding a most striking shell when walking on a beach full of shells. Duchamp picked up an unseemly shell. When brought into a collection, such a piece that is not art becomes a work of art, a work of Erscheinung inviting contemplation.
This was 1917 when Western society had not yet become so dependent on the language brain that the idea of male superiority has lost its base. Duchamp's Fountain is for the male standing urinating. The piece of art to be chosen as the most important for the twenty-first century will predictably be more gender neutral. At any rate, with his Fountain, the search for beauty, seen as the search for congruency with pre-language brains, won an important victory. I would suggest that the element of rationality of modern art is its congruency with pre-language brains of all kinds, including urinating guided by the reptilian brain.
Debunking Magic in Art
Rationality, as we know, implies the debunking of magic, Entzauberung, to use Max Weber's word. For better or worse, any rationalism, even that of art, causes the world to lose its mystery and magic. There is no magic left in Duchamp's Fountain; it is a mass-produced commodity known to all urban men in its days.
Many artists have argued that art should be exempted from any requirement to debunk magic. In 1922 the Finnish poet Edith Södergran, writing in Swedish, expressed her own use of rational simplicity in writing as a loss rather than a gain.
|
|
|
Translated by Greta Frankel |
|
Technology in the Creation of Art Tech
New technologies have opened for new art forms and, above all, opened art to worldwide distribution of copies.
The uniqueness of art, says Walter Benjamin (1936) in a pioneering article on the world of art in the age of mechanical reproduction, is inseparable from its embedment in the fabric of tradition. However, reproduction for masses of new readers, viewers, and listeners removes it from any specific traditional context. For the first time in world history, mass art is emancipated from an established tradition of art. The statue of Venus that had been fixed in a temple as an object of veneration to the Greeks and had been an ominous idol to some clerics of the Middle Ages could now, placed in any corner of the world, be any dame. Only to those who per chance knew its original contexts, the reproduction would be engaging and prized as a wink of an original aura. But its beauty remains undeniable and could now be appreciated by many more. In fact, freed from its tradition, the reproduced art could be based, for example, on some practice of politics.
Benjamin, who was not only an art critic but a political critic, hated Fascism for its use of reproducible art to mobilize the public for war. He hoped that Communism would be the new basis of reproduced art. With hindsight we do know that neither the Nazis nor the Communists became the ruling inspiration of film and television drama, nor did any other political movement. Hollywood took the lead, spreading American values and world-views using thoroughly commercialized criteria.
Superficially many Hollywood products use scripts critical of the American way of life, for example, business men are rarely heroes and often villains. But the Hollywood characters have American masculinity and femininity. By the measures of the majority of mankind, they have an overwhelming living standard and freedom of choice. Most backgrounds of Hollywood productions are tantalizing contemporary American city skylines or landscapes of the Wild West. Such facts have as much impact as the spoken words and plots, initially often more impact; an emotive appeal is at least in the beginning stronger than a rational appeal, as we know from our Proposition on Rules of Emotive and Rational Choice.
|
4:4. "The Rules of Emotive and Rational Choice” |
| (a) In scanning a symbolic environment or part
thereof man first reacts to the symbols, if any, that have emotive
charges and then to the executive symbols. (b) In this reaction, negative emotive symbols have greater effect than positive emotive symbols. (c) If all symbols are roughly equally executive, i.e. emotive meanings are spread evenly or are absent, man exercises rational choice. |
The age of Benjamin's mechanical reproduction has been followed by an era of digital reproduction. Digital technologies of copying have replaced the mechanical ones. Each movement in a concert performance of a Beethoven symphony becomes a long digital number that can be copied without error as many times as you want, and the copies can be checked for absolute accuracy by the method of calculating check sums. The same is true of digitalized pictures. No wonder more and more art became designed for copying from the beginning. Digital reproduction is used is used for contemporary pop art and for commercial art in advertising. As usual, mass production brings riches to the realm of the economy as well.
Pop music has become our most widespread global form of communication. This is a new chapter in the book of human art.
|
15:4."Circular Reactions" |
| When participants in a face-to-face encounter converge their emotive communications according to Proposition 15:3a, they enter into a spiraling process of circular, emotive, converging reactions |
Worldwide tourneys of pop concerts establish an original context with a special sense of crowd and excitement – circular emotive reactions we called them – around the stars and their new songs. But after these galas the music lives on in digital reproduction. This is business and its rewards are not only those of art but also those of big business.
Artistic Freedom and License and The Internet
Digitalized art is easily used on the Internet, the network once invented for free scientific exchange of information. However, file sharing of copyrighted songs, pictures, and literary products has caused conflicts due to the different reward systems in science and the arts. The scientist gives up economic property rights to his findings in return for the honor of being recognized as the discoverer. The artist sells his product for a lump sum or for royalty. Then it cannot readily be freely available on the Internet, except as a gift from the artist.
Freedom on the Internet could be informed by a reading of Row H in our Periodic Table of Societal Realms (Reproduced as Figure 19.1 above). Artists, like all others in a democracy have freedom of expression. The Art shared on the Internet is not necessarily a case of freedom of speech and demonstrations, nor of freedom of press and other media. These freedoms are conceived in the societal realm of the body politic and give a right to citizens to find out and criticize what governments do or omit to do. Internet is very congenial to such freedom of political information and opinion.
Artistic freedom, however, has an element that is different from the civic freedoms, appropriately called "artistic license," since it can stand for the breaking of taboos, not only the taboo about covering up nudity or the one of using language that breaks the rules of the school grammar. Thanks to artistic license, bodily spontaneities ranging from sexual passion to the violence of war can, in the hands of an accomplished artist, find its way into congruence with an Erscheinung for the public that is worthy of contemplation.
The artistic license is not a freedom for anyone who wants to break a taboo. It is society’s allowance to genuine artists. Producers of kitsch have no right to this license. Nor have pretending creators of art any of its privileges. Artistic license is for use by serious artists. Of course, they should not abuse the license and use it to steel, destroy, or put other people in danger. It behooves the artistic community to guard and defend artistic license. It is a precious necessity for opening new vistas of art.
When artists want to call attention to legislation encroaching on human freedom and dignity or the way police and courts overstep their authority they can – like any other citizens – shape their protests as civil disobedience. This is a non-violent and honorable demonstration by resistors to unbearable laws or police practices. The resistors, if and when caught, are prepared to take the full prescribed consequences of the existing laws and practices, and use also their arrest and appearance in court to further publicize their grievances. We have dealt with civil disobedience in Chapter 16.
An act of civil disobedience performed with artistic flair may be very effective. But there is no special right for artists to use civil disobedience that other citizens do not have.
Providing Art Education in Schools
Like other societal realms art has its Providers who spread and teach its cardinal value to others and to new generations.
Aristotle observed that art has a cleansing effect on the viewer and specifically that music brought well-being to the listener. In our time, therapies have emerged around several forms of art: we have dance therapy, music therapy, picture therapy, and psychodrama. They reach behind the cognitive therapy of the language brain. Strange at it may sound; it has been easier to demonstrate that the Providers of art have a given place in public health than to demonstrate its benefits in the polity, economy, science, religion, and morality (Carey 200?).
In modern society the Providers of art have have had a limited but important success in their fight for a place for art in the curriculum for mass education.
A common criticism of the schools that grew out of the spirit of the Enlightenment was that they neglected students’ emotional and artistic development. Nonetheless, thanks to some dedicated school administrators, the obligatory school curriculum in most countries came to include music and drawing. The ability to play an instrument was long a criterion for admission to seminars in elementary schools. Drawing from memory or inspired by imagination was adopted in the standard curriculum of elementary schools; it had previously been included in the practical subjects of elementary schools, often in connection with lessons in geometry and handicraft
Pedagogical pioneers like Maria Montessori in Italy created children’s schools that were better at dealing with children’s aesthetic spontaneity, curiosity, and feeling for order. Rudolf Steiner, a Goethe admirer in Switzerland, who had formulated an “anthroposophical” philosophy, created the so-called Waldorf schools for children and young people, which encouraged self-expression with a greater degree of aestheticism. These schools, which provided alternatives to the pedagogy of public schools, have been healthy exceptions to a very closed and homogenous universe of state and municipal schools in Europe and America.
Embedding Beauty
Like other societal realms art has its Procurers. Gaius Maecenas, a rich and generous friend of the emperor Augustus's, sponsored many artists and authors, including Virgil. He has given the name "mecenate" to those who give patronage to the arts. Maecenas was a Count, and both before and after him, patrons of the arts have been drawn from aristocracies in Europe and Asia. After the fall of West Rome, the Church became the main patrons of art. In modern days aristocrats and priests were both replaced by plutocrats. The the mecenates took the name "sponsors."
In recent decades governments have used tax revenue to set up endowments for art. They are similar to the research councils that we analyzed in the previous chapter and they have the same advantages and drawbacks. There are counterparts to the "panels" in systems of support for science in the systems supporting art. Tax-financed collegial commissions for fiction and poetry, theatre, and film support promising endeavors and practitioners. In the sometimes celebrated French system there are also inspectors of paintings and sculptures from the Department of Culture who buy for finished pieces for public collections and for exhibiting art in public places. A many-splendored society in which art manages its own priorities would abstain from such governmental inspectors.
Politicians have traditionally used Procurers of Art to consolidate and enhance their standing. Portraits and statues of rulers are commissioned from the best artists. Styling and beatifying are normal. When the Roman emperor Augustus issued a coin with his image to be used throughout his empire, the artist was to present him, not with his normal posture of a tough world conqueror, but as a benevolent body and a face of concern and wisdom. Rulers have specially decorated the rooms in which they receive the members of the public. Ambassadors from foreign powers are greeted in exceptionally beautiful rooms. The throne is a chair that is more artistically elaborate then other chairs.
A Coda on Science and Art
The executive description is the modal language of knowledge and science, while the interesting emotive description worthy of contemplation is the language of beauty and art. We learn from both of these, and would be less than human and civilized if we only had one of the two. Our minds are organized by both, but most easily by art, as I. A. Richards (1924, p.132) argued in a pioneering work on literary criticism. His conclusion conforms to "The Rules of Emotive and Rational Choice" (Proposition 4:4) that emotive choice is the default mechanism for mankind.
After this review of science and art, can we begin to argue that all societal realms are born equal and that no one should be put ahead of another? At present, science and art are societal realms that usually take second place to the economy and the body politic. However, there is no reason to believe that this is a natural order of things. In his remarkable book, Human Accomplishment. The Pursuit of Excellence in the Arts and Sciences, 800 B.C. to 1950, Charles Murray (2003) has presented in facts and figures the world history of arts and science in a way that rivals any statistical economic and political history. The shining accomplishments of the West in arts and science, not the least by European males and by Jews, are quantified.
| Recent centuries have seen an increasing expanse of mankind's language-based activities, both in absolute and relative terms, in comparison with mankind's pre-language activities and bodily spontaneities. |
The present signs may point at a decline, particularly for the quality of the arts, according to Murray. I believe that the decline will be reversed as the master trend of civility brings more women into the the full pursuit of knowledge and beauty. This trend is a moving force toward equality for women in all societal realms.
Please send your comments after reading this chapter by email to the author.
Chapter 20.
The Realm of Economy: A Search for Riches
The Norms of Business
Figure 20.1 Different Norms in Economy and Polity
Attributes of an Economy
Figure 20.2. Economy in Society
Firms and Markets
Functionaries in the Economy
The Cardinal Value of Riches
Figure 20.3. Semiotics of Riches
Riches
Poverty
Swindlers
Misers
Property Rights
Free and Planned Economies
Economic Rationality
Market Economy and Profit Seeking
Welfare Economy and Rent Seeking
Rent Seeking in Glamorous Social Life
Stratification and Rewards in the Economy
Providing Precious Money
Providing Paper and Fiat Money
Producing Riches by Manufacturing
Industrial Revolutions
Creative Destruction
Technological Change and a Wage Model
Development Blocks
Producing Wealth by Finance
Cycles, Bubbles, and Panics
The Stock Market
Providing Economic Education in Schools
Procuring Services from Other Societal Realms to the Economy
Education and the Growth of Wealth
Providing Flows of Money from the Economy to Other Parts of Society
Toward a Hegemony of the Economy
Toward a Cancerous Economy
Money and Social Relations
The Money-Centeredness, the generic life style of the economy, is focused on wealth. The Money-Centered persons are concentrated on making money, saving money, investing money, and, not to be forgotten, to spend money. Quick to spot their own needs or the needs of others, they scan the horizon for value for money, be it in traditional goods and services or in novelty, in quality, or in outright bargains. They may be quality consumers, or bargain consumers, pioneering consumers, or consumers of the tried and true. Producing or consuming, they know prices, and they can tell what is profitable or not. They usually spend more time on the advertisements and business news in their media than on politics and culture.
The Norms of Business
In Book 1 of The Republic Plato and a circle of people discuss what is "right," in some translations called "justice," that is, the legal and moral commandments that concern different roles and parts of society. Socrates asked Cephalus, a businessman of the third generation, who had created a larger fortune than the one he had inherited, what was the greatest blessing that his money had brought him. Cephalus, an aged man, looks back on his life in business, and says he has not had any reason "to lie to or cheat others, whether inadvertently or deliberately." These are the thoughts of a man who suggests that throughout his life he has entered business deals based on honesty and voluntariness, that he has always kept his part of agreements and has repaid all debts. He can therefore meet death with peace of mind.
Socrates thought that this was well put, but was still not satisfied with the answer. Not because he doubts Cephalus or suspects that he is just a cheap crook, but because answers from the business community cannot be generalized to hold for all of society. He gives an example which shows that good business ethics do not always apply.
“Justice, what is it? — to speak the truth and to pay your debts — no more than this? And even to this are there not exceptions? Suppose that a friend when in his right mind has deposited arms with me and he asks for them when he is not in his right mind, ought I to give them back to him? No one would say that I ought or that I should be right in doing so, any more than they would say that I ought always to speak the truth to one who is in his condition“.
Faced with this difficulty, Cephalus thought it best to leave the conversation. But the gathering agreed that "a friend should always do good to his friend and never do him harm." Plato had thus revealed that moral dictates in the economy are not only different from those in the socially small world of friends, but that some of those dictates can conflict with those based on friendship. We can generalize this in modern terms to mean that the discovery of the basic social norms of the business world differ from and in some cases conflict with those of the civil society. (Here I use the term "civil society" in its present meaning to connote family life, neighborhood circles, associations, religious and cultural life. In antiquity, "civil society" meant something quite different that was more in line with the realm of body politic.)
The dictates of the guards also differ from others. Socrates asks: "Is then the best (man) to watch the camp the one who can sneak into the enemy's camp?" The gathering responds, "Of course:" For a guardian, stealing the enemy's plans is honorable.
Plato's norms for statecraft and business have been effectively updated by Jane Jacobs (1992). Like her antique model, Jacobs uses the form of a dialog. She regards the problem of whether or not to return the deposited weapon as a gulf between the commercial moral syndrome and that of the guardians: not to return the weapon is seen “as a form of policing” (p.30). Jacobs is forced to this conclusion inasmuch as she does not acknowledge that civil society has its own moral syndrome, which differs from the syndromes of both the guardians and businessmen. A slightly modified version of Jacobs that includes also some norms from Moses is given in Figure 20.1. Under the heading "Civil Society" we list three universal candidates from the Decalogue.
Figure 20.1 Different Norms in Economy and Polity. Freely after Jacobs (1992)
BUSINESS:
Create wealth
Reach voluntary agreements
that are advantageous
Respect contracts
Compete
Never use force
Be open to all information
Cooperate with foreigners
Take initiative and be enterprising
Look for innovations and inventions
Invest in effective production and trade
Be industriousCIVIL SOCIETY:
Do not lie
Do not steal
Do not kill
STATECRAFT :
Maintain order
Use force effectively
Maintain discipline
Respect the power hierarchy
Be loyal, promote the loyalty of others
Do not enter into business deals
Use information selectively
Be generous in order to attain goals
Enjoy pomp and circumstance
Stand up for your rights and honor
Be courageous
The oppositions between the norms of the state and business are usually not apparent, but they are obvious to an inquiring Socrates. In the civil society we may assume that compassion is to rule, not the dictate of business to compete. In the civil society one shall not lie, steal or kill, but in the name of the state the soldier is commanded to deceive, steal from, and kill his enemy. Such conflicts, as familiar as they are irreconcilable, have always plagued sensitive young people in differentiated societies.
It is significant that the three norms in the civil society that we have listed from the Decalogue are fully compatible with the norms of business but not of the polity at the time of war.
Attributes of an Economy
For at least a couple of centuries the economies of the great civilizations have exhibited all the attributes of full-fledged societal realms. These attributes, dressed in modern words, are shown in Figure 20.2. The headings in this table are the same as we used in presenting science and art. But the illustrations are different for we are now dealing with the economy.
Figure 20.2. Economy in Society
|
3. |
Societal Structures |
Societal |
||||||||
|
Organi-zations |
Networks |
Media |
inside realms |
between realms |
||||||
|
with |
with |
Create |
Preserve |
Disperse |
Receive |
Export |
Import values |
|||
|
with |
the cardinal value of wealth |
|||||||||
|
Maker |
Keeper |
Broker |
Taker |
Provider |
Procurer |
|||||
|
B |
Symboltype |
J |
K |
L |
M |
N |
O |
P |
Q |
R |
|
|
Executive |
Firms
Coops
Trade organiz-ations
Cartels
Unions
|
Bazaars
Markets for goods, services, raw materials, money, patents, etc.
|
Marketing Advertis-ing Annual reports |
Inno-vators Entrep-reneurs |
Bankers Insurers |
Dealers Traders Freighters |
Cus-tomers Con-sumers |
Currency guardians Central Invest-ment advisors to other realms
|
Persons and
organi- zations outlook to other realms for some-thing beneficial
for the economy e.g. free-trade legis-lation, contract law,
patent rights, low taxes
Budgeters and buyers in other realms
|
|
evaluations |
||||||||||
|
A |
Realm |
|||||||||
|
|
ECONOMY |
|||||||||
|
C |
Lifestyle: |
|||||||||
|
|
Business Minded |
|||||||||
|
D |
Cardinal Value | 0
|||||||||
|
|
wealth |
|||||||||
|
E |
Stratification: |
|||||||||
|
|
Class (purchase clout) |
|||||||||
|
F |
Reward System: |
|||||||||
|
|
Monetary |
|||||||||
|
G |
Rationality: |
|||||||||
|
|
Market economy |
|||||||||
|
H |
Type of Freedom: |
|||||||||
|
|
Free trade |
|||||||||
|
I |
Spontaneous Order |
|||||||||
|
|
Market prices |
|||||||||
The letters marking the rows are those found in a summary of the various language-products in society called Table of Societal Realms in Chapter 9. The letters after "I" continue as columns to make space in the center for some illustrative examples.
Each cell in this table deserves a thesis of its own describing how it contributes to wealth. Here we must be selective and will only look at a few cells in the columns J through P.
Firms and Markets
Wealth can be created in many ways, from gathering, hunting, fishing, cultivating the earth, mining, collecting war booty, or cutting the hair of your fellowmen for a fee. An agriculture that produced more than was needed for the sustenance of the farming household, so that the surplus could be traded, was the main base of wealth in early times.
Apart from agriculture and trade there are three dominant modern ways to produce wealth: manufacturing, services, and finance. The first deals with material goods such as kitchen utensils and cars and other forms of "materiality" produced in factories. They are assigned monetary value when bought or sold, when the materiality changes hands.
The second way, organized or personal services, are not produced in factories but in households, shops and offices. Services can be traded for money and have markets just like goods from factories. Unlike goods, services can usually not be stored in inventories; a haircut is consumed at the same time it is delivered. So is a transport of people or goods. A service may, however, be a standing entitlement. Then it is available when you draw on it. For example, a health insurance gives you the services of a doctor and a hospital when you need it. The service economy in a mature capitalist system actually employs more people than manufacturing.
The third modern road to wealth is finance, a very special service that must be treated separately from other forms of service. It makes money with money. Monetary instruments, papers with texts and numbers, so-called "immaterial" values are created, bought and sold. Many of the symbols communicated in finance are what we called Saussarian, i.e., refer to other symbols to get their meaning. A string of them may easily loose contact with anything expressed in down-to-earth Meadian symbols. Some financial interactions thus take on qualities of what we know as hyperreality.
Like any other societal realm the economy has an anatomy of organizations and networks. Among the organizations found in an economy are households and firms. The main actors in an economy are firms involved in agriculture, trade, manufacturing, services, and finance. Note that these major economic actors are organizations, not individuals. They enter and interact in the networks we call markets, and these interactions are what is called trade. Of course, individuals also trade. One person who strikes an economic transaction with another person is actually the most common illustration in the elementary textbook of economics and also in much abstract economic theory. But in real life in a modern society, the market of "individual-to-individual" is not as big as "firms-to-individuals." There is also a huge market for "organization to organizations" — it includes "firms-to-firms," and the huge subclasses "firms-to-households" and "firms-to-governments."
|
7:7. "The Netorg System of Realm Expansion" |
|
A cardinal value and
its societal realm extends its reach |
A firm usually has many more customers than employees. This is typical of a modern economy as a societal realm: its networks are bigger than its organizations, i.e. the markets are bigger than the firms. This has not prevented some multinational companies to grow very large and rich; some have more employees than have small states, and several are richer than the poorest states. Contrary to much libertarian thinking and particularly contrary to Ayn Rand’s doctrines, it is not individualist systems of pure market transactions that create most wealth. According to our Proposition about The Netorg System of Realm Expansion, “networking organizations”, i.e. corporations working in markets, are the most successful.
This Proposition also makes clear that firms stagnate and become defensive rather than expansive when they grew into monopolies or near-monopolies that become more or less immune to market forces and crowd out the market from the economy.
A Note on Corporate Leadership
Corporations are run by a leadership that includes a Chief Executive and a Corporate Board. A modern board has members who represent shareholders as well as members from the outside society.
An ideal corporate board should have creative and constructive members who are totally committed to look out for their corporation and not for themselves, members who make an effort to know the situation of their corporation and its branch. The ideal board may include someone knowledgeable in business history who can see when old stupidities are revived. Corporate boards may also have use for some skeptic from “the school of hard knocks,” (or from science or journalism) who can reveal argumentation which is more persuasive than sound. Also, a board needs members who are totally unimpressed by well-known persons from firms that have made much money on upticks when they think that they are competent to handle any downturn or off-beat situation. Consider also in recruitments to a board what a difference ethically responsible people can make to the quality of board decisions, be these persons morally gifted by nature, or persons who have struggled enough with issues of honor to become moral virtuosos. But such a member should not be put there for his or her PR-value. Lehman Brothers had apparently little moral help from a board member who was a former head of The Red Cross.
Recent events tell that corporate boards ought to have a member or two who understand politics to the extent that they can grasp the consequences of misguided bipartisan efforts to promote home ownership. One can also imagine what difference it would have made during the build-up to the 2008 financial crisis to have had a board with a member with enough mathematical skill to analyze a derivative equation and put reports and promises by salesmen of derivative bonds to task.
When all is said and done, there is no substitute for a board member’s good judgment. The good board member is not bound by prestige: If you do not know, you can ask. Any board member of a financial institution in Switzerland or elsewhere could have asked about the risks of American derivative housing bonds when the proposal of acquisition of such securities reached their board for final approval. When told that the risk had been calculated both by the issuer and the rating agencies by David X. Li's “Gaussian copula function,” the good board member could have asked about this formula. The answer would be that this formula in one and the same number summarizes all risks for the security. Yes, the same number for risks in both upturns and downturns. Yes, the same number for the risk assessment of these bonds is valid both when the prices in various local markets are different and when they rise or decline in the entire USA. The inquiring board member should then have had little difficulty in concluding that his institution was dealing with a charlatan.
Such a board member did not exist in reality. Much good recruitments are blocked by a special criterion for new members of a typical board. It is considered essential that the candidates are reliable and trusted by the other board members. The candidates are simply not chosen if they question the extraordinary compensation packages that prevail for the leadership in modern corporations.
Functionaries in the Economy
Entrepreneurs are the Makers of new wealth, a creative breed of people. Without them most of us would be poor.
The foremost Keepers or custodians of wealth have traditionally been bankers. Banking is a keystone in the economy, both in centrally planned ones and market economies. Bankers are popularly known as people who lend umbrellas in sunshine, and ask for them back when it rains. Thus they make the cycles of fortune for entrepreneurs, traders, and consumers easy in good times but harder in bad times. They are not always a major cause of business cycles, but as a rule they make them worse. The bankers are balanced by their cousins among the Keepers, the insurers, who collect premiums in good times and pay out when disasters happen. These conventional images of bankers and insurers have become less valid. Shortly we shall show how their own entrepreneurship and inventiveness have changed the roles of bankers and insurers.
The Brokers, wholesale or retail, are responsible for making the economic world go round. Trade, not raw materials, farms, or factories, is the fundament of a market economy. If and when trade is in place, the extraction of raw material, farming, and manufacturing can flourish.
Many carry an image that the manufacturing factory is the basis of capitalism. However, organization of factories for production of goods is a mark of industrialization, not capitalism. Capitalism depends on trade and markets, not only on factories, which are found also in pre-capitalist and socialist economies.
The Cardinal Value of Wealth
The realm of the economy in a society rests on exchanging sentences that include executive evaluations such as prices and costs. The economic realm is dedicated to creating, preserving, and using wealth. There are different paths to wealth, and competition is the stuff of business. Today business practice includes record keeping of all transactions, for example goods and services that have been bought or sold, as well as standardized measurements of profits, capital, and cash flow. In this sphere one seeks freedom of trade, the right to establish one's business where one wants, to do business with all kinds of products and services and over all boundaries.
Figure 20.3. Semiotics of Wealth

To learn more about wealth let us place it in a semiotic square along with its opposite, poverty, and its degeneration into swindling and miserliness (Figure 20.3). Let us first consider wealth and its measure in the form of money.
Wealth
Wealth and poverty are opposed. Both can be expressed in absolute or relative terms. To have exactly a million dollar in 2006 (the time of this writing) makes you just so rich in absolute terms. In relative terms you are then one of 8.3 million dollar millionaires in the United States. In this case there are 2.8 percent of the inhabitants of the United States who are richer than you. If the number of millionaires decreases or increases your relative wealth becomes greater or smaller, but your absolute wealth stays the same. Likewise, if you move to a poor country with your million dollars, you become a much richer person in that country than in your American home country. A person or a group of persons may become richer in absolute terms but poorer in relative terms. Or poorer in absolute terms but richer in relative terms. The failure to specify which kind of wealth and poverty we are talking about has caused confusion and needless acrimony.
Most people see riches as the number of rooms you have in a house, the size and make of your car, the content of your jewelry box, and the elaboration of you dinner menu, the quality of the services you enjoy, and other visible matters. But technically speaking, wealth is not things or services but the evaluation of them. In any advanced society wealth is evaluated in money, and money is measured by a currency scale.
A currency scale has equal and interchangeable units; a dollar is a dollar at the low end of the scale and at the high end of the scale. And there is a fixed zero-point; it shows that someone has no dollar to his name or that a firm has no cash and assets of its own left, i.e. is bankrupt. No scale of honor is so precise.
No other realm in today's society has scales of its cardinal values with zero-points and equal and interchangeable values. In the body politic there are approximate quantitative measures of power according to the number of votes for a politician and his party in elections. In science there are the count of the number citations received by a professor and his laboratory in scientific journals. However, political power and scientific competence also have other sources than popular votes and citations; here ratings must be supplemented by "good judgments" of those in the know. In the economy, by contrast, you can establish the net worth of an individual or organization and express it in a currency; you need no other information. In the case of firms, quarterly and annual balance sheets, certified by accountants, do the job. This is an obvious advantage for the economy in the ever present competition between societal realms.
The currency scales of evaluation employed in the economy are different and more sophisticated than scales of honor and achievement used in other societal realms. The former draw on the language brain like the others, but it also uses the mathematical brain. Economic evaluations are expressed in symbols that can be treated in arithmetic operations by producers, tradesmen, and consumers, and also by more advanced mathematics in finance. This fact has lent a special aura to the economic realm in society that is not necessarily commensurate with its relative contribution to society.
Money has long has been a universal unit of exchange in everyday life for individuals, households and organizations also in the realms of polity, science, art, religion, and welfare. People active in science, the body politic, art, religion, and welfare are rewarded both by honor and by money. In business there are few honorific rewards, and the reward system is in effect based on money and money alone. Government officials, scientists, artists, priests, and welfare executives have total rewards that consist much less than 100 percent of sheer money; the balance is honor. When rewards in the economy being practically 100 percent money are compared to rewards in the non-economic realms, a sense of resentment is close at hand. We can, for example, expect much public anger directed at extensive “compensation packages” for top management in those modern societies in which politicians and labor unions have destroyed the honorific reward systems in the name of equality.
Poverty
Poverty as we have come to perceive it, say, in large parts of Africa and on the Indian subcontinent of Asia, has been the normal state of mankind throughout its entire history. Wealth have been very spotty and found along some fertile river valleys, trading cities, royal courts, and aristocratic mansions. The eradication of poverty on a larger scale has a history of only some 200 or 300 years.
As part of its millennium goals for mankind the United Nations expressed that the number of poor be reduced by half by the year 2015. All member countries and all the world’s leading development institutions agreed on this goal. Living under one dollar a day was used to define poverty. This is an absolute measure, but ambiguous; the dollar fluctuates in purchasing power, and the definition of the poverty level must in principle be adjusted every year.
Poverty, like wealth, is expressed either in absolute or relative terms. Paucity may be reduced from one year to another in absolute terms, but increased in relative terms. Relative poverty depends on the rest of the income distribution. To measure poverty in relative terms you may ask for the percentage of total wealth that is possessed by the lowest ten (or some other low number) percentiles of the population. The United Nations did not declare any goal for the reduction of relative poverty in the world.
The world average of absolute poverty is being reduced at a rapid rate, not because any UN directive, but because institutions of private property, rule of law, and freedom of trade has allowed entrepreneurs grow in number, hire many, and pay wages high enough to raise entire households over the poverty level. At the time of this writing, it is primarily due to China's rapid development that the world figure on reduced poverty shines.
Swindlers
Looking to the right side of the semiotic square of wealth (Figure 20.3) we meet economic swindlers who engage in deceptions for personal gain. The oldest form is the use of counterfeit money. In a typical modern con game the swindler is not as rich as he (or she) pretends, and the presumed wealth is used to draw those who are richer into schemes that transfer their money to the swindler. F. Scott Fitzgerald novels The Great Gatsby and This Side of Paradise revealed swindling and questionable identities on more than a petty scale.
Max Weber rules out personal greed as useful in the definition of capitalism:
‘Acquisitiveness’, ‘striving for profit’ — for profit in terms of money, for the largest possible pecuniary gain — have, as such, nothing at all to do with capitalism. This endeavour has existed and exists in waiters, doctors, coachmen, artists, prostitutes, corrupt officials, soldiers, brigands, crusaders, gamblers, beggars, indeed one might say in all sorts and conditions of men, during all periods in all countries of the world in which the objective opportunity to do so has been or is in some way available. It is part of the ABC of cultural history that one should, once and for all, refrain from this naive definition of concepts. Unfettered acquisitiveness is in no way tantamount to capitalism, and even less with its ‘spirit’. Capitalism may quite simply be synonymous with the subjugating or at least the rational tempering of this irrational instinct. But capitalism is indeed tantamount to the quest for profit — in continuous, rational capitalist business operations; for constantly renewed profit; for remunerativeness — since this must be so. Within a capitalist order that embraces the whole economy, an individual capitalist company would be doomed to failure if it did not orient itself according to the chances of achieving remunerativeness. (Weber 1922b/1986, p. 31)
Personal greed may not be the motor of capitalism, but it is the sure source of corruption in capitalism, as it is in other systems. The long version of the tenth commandment reads: "You shall not covet your neighbor’s house; you shall not covet your neighbor’s wife, or male or female slave, or ox, or donkey, or anything that belongs to your neighbor." If it had been written in capitalist times it would have included another clause: "You shall not covet the cash flow of your employer, or his suppliers, or his customers." Top management of other people's factories, offices, wealth, and assets are the new robber barons. In the first half of the twentieth century they began to replace owners as day-to-day leaders of firms (Berle & Means 1933). In the second half of the century they formed the majority of most corporate boards. This made for professional governance by graduates of business schools. It also paved the way to the practice of non-owners to give fanciful "compensation packages" to each other.
To covet the cash flow of one's employer is an ever present temptation to enrich oneself, for all employees to be sure, but particularly for modern management.A swindling process that became highly visible in the United States about a half century ago has spread to other capitalist countries. Though a process of institutionalized evasion of norms it has become widely acceptable. The boards of the larger corporations and their chief executives is a network, as described in Chapter 6, that is formed around a common identity of participants. This particular network has developed into an informal Fortune Creating Circle that anoints (i.e. installs and blesses) their members with fortunes. These fortunes are built by regular honoraria and salaries, perks of many kinds, year-end bonuses, stock options, huge pensions, and/or anything else that may fit compensation packages. In recruitment processes to the top, the issue is always raised: “Can we trust him (her)?” This query may be a code for several things; it always includes, explicitly or implicitly, the candidate’s loyalty to the general level of compensation and its annual rises are current within the Fortune Creating Circle. In early capitalism you had to be the owner-entrepreneur to reach high fortunes. In the mature capitalism it is enough to be top management and/or board-member.
Critics call the Fortune Creating Circle “a culture of greed.” *Government officials who are set to run socialized enterprises are rapidly drawn into its reward system. The same seems to be true when official from labor unions join the boards and participate in the setting up of compensation packages for executives and fellow board members
With the advent of money documented only in computerized accounts, economic swindling of big corporations and government institutions has become easier for the technically proficient. The possibility to have inappropriate transactions outside of balance sheets without mentioning them in footnotes — sometimes in collusion with accountants — provides a golden opportunity for high-level corporate swindlers.
The borderline between sophisticated banking and swindles became blurred when firms on Wall Street invented a combination of "derivatives," "securitization," and "off-balance-sheet accounting with special purpose entities". *They were innovative financial products that unexpectedly crippled the world's banks in 2008.
Anything that has reasonably regular payments — installment debts on credit cards, mortgages, car loans, aircraft leases, toll payments at super-highways, music royalties — has long been used as collateral for a an advance in the form of a loan. An innovation is to make such transactions by securitization. A trust is set up by a bank to receive the money from such collections. The trust issues bonds and pays bondholders interest, and at the appointed time, the principal. So far so good. Combinations of mortgages from different districts and from home owners with different credit ratings can be combined and packed as a "derivative" and also sold as a bond. Obfuscation is close at hand with securitization of derivatives. Here starts much trouble. The risk and value of such bonds is in principle calculable, but in practice difficult to calculate. A swindle begins with an assertion to the buyer that there always will be a market and a fair price for such securities.
The trust, or what remains of it after initial sales of any bonds, may get off the books of the bank by including it in a so-called special-purpose entity, preferably incorporated in a low-tax place such as the Bermudas or Cayman Islands. With this innovation in off-balance sheet accounting, the bank no longer eats into its capital requirement for further lending. The bank merely books profits from such lending transactions. It does not have the normal costs for increasing its base of own capital when lending more, nor the risks of defaults in the stream of payments from credit cards, mortgages, or whatever was included in the trust.
Is securitization of derivatives combined with off-balance sheet accounting a swindle or just financial inventiveness? Joseph Stiglitz, professor of economics at Columbia University, had his view formulated at the beginning of the bank crash of 2008 when on October 21 he told a congressional committee, that this "securitization was based on the premise that a fool was born every minute. Globalization meant that there was a global landscape on which they could search for those fools — and they found them everywhere."
Most of these fools born every minute have birth certificates in the form of MBA-degrees from business schools. After the turn of the century there has emerged an unfortunate conformity in curriculum and attitudes of the business schools and their student bodies. Business school graduates the world over were given unrealistic birth rights to expect excessive compensation packages. But the main problem with these schools is wider.
In a Many-Splendored Society an MBA-degree should be considered de-meriting until the business schools learn, not only to better separate swindling from wealth creation, but learn to better see business and economy as a part of a total society in which other societal realms are their equals. To get rich is not anything superior to the holding of political office, have scholarly competence, deliver artistic beauty, or to carry sacredness or virtue to your community in the course of every-day living.
Misers
Looking to the left side of the semiotic square of wealth (Figure 20.3) we meet misers. The typical miser hoards gold and other symbols of rich and does not spend money on investments or charities. Misers are stingy also when it comes to buying comfort for themselves. They do not want to reveal that they are wealthy.
It is not illegal to be a miser. Morality rather than law is invoked to cope with miserliness. But the moral message is mixed. Many moral doctrines actually say that it is better to save money than to spend it. But are hoarders of money actually nobler than spendthrifts? On a personal level they may or may not be. But on the societal level they are not superior according to the rationality of economics. A nation of misers is not conducive to economic growth; too many trades that add to wealth are simply left undone. People do not notice businesses that do not start so we never know the damage done by misers.
Moral doctrines that affect misers hold that you must share your wealth with the poor. Dickens' master miser, Ebenezer Scrooge, is rewarded with happiness when he finally does so. However, there are also moral arguments to the effect that providing workfare is better than providing welfare in the form of the dole. A job gives a person new social encounters at the workplace. It gives discipline to the individual. It gives taxes to the body politic, something appreciated by politicians. Public welfare carries big costs for the body politic. But welfare legislation gives its promoters among democratically elected politicians many votes.
Philanthropy is not the same as charity. Charity is giving to people who are without food, clothing, shelter and the other necessities of life. Philanthropy is giving donations to projects and institutions within the areas of culture, science, religions, health, and others that lack sufficient sources of revenue from taxes or sales. Philanthropists can be private citizens, non-profit organizations, companies, or foundations. Individuals may donate their time as well as money. Their names may appear on bronze plaques in buildings, on a page in a theater or concert programs, in the title of a professor’s chair, in the Foreword to a technical book, next to an exhibition in a museum. Foundations are the most sophisticated forms of modern philanthropy.
Tax legislation is decisive to philanthropy. In the United States at the time of this writing, a philanthropic foundation must give five percent of its total resources (capital, interest, dividends, and capital gains) annually according to its charter, or, send this money to the tax authorities. Interviews carried out among the many private individuals in New York who are philanthropists (Ostrower 1995) included a question as to whether the deduction for contributions should be eliminated and let the state use the additional tax revenues for the philanthropic projects. One of the respondents answered “If I wanted this I would move to Sweden." Any country sensitive to the detailed needs of its population should have legislation that encourages and facilitates philanthropy. Ministers for culture, research, health, and education may assume omnipotence and promote the idea that they, themselves, can meet all needs of their society through political channels. Surely they can do much, but we can extend a well-known thesis thesis – Hayek (1954) – and say that they don’t have information about all that has to be done. There is always room for private philanthropy.
Property Rights
The economy is a continuous exchange or distribution of belongings, or rather their representations in the form of property rights. The most common exchanges are between money, on one side, and titles to goods or of services, economic or personal, on the other side.
We know from our discussion of Hohfeld (1913) that any right is defined by four conditions: claim, liberty, power, and immunity. The ‘claim’ is an explicit expectation that others should accept my actions. The ‘liberty’ is the expectation that I have other options and am not forced to do everything I have a right to do. The ‘power’ is that I am allowed to do it as long as it does not violate the rights of others. The ‘immunity’ is the expectation that others will respect these rights of mine. These four expectations in exchanging goods and services are formalized in the right-hand column of the dialog below. We recognize them as one of the most important impelling vocabularies of contemporary living. We discussed them in Chapter 11 and exemplified with the right to learn English.
In the left-hand column below we record everyday words in a dialogue that takes place when we buy a car from a car dealer In the right column we enter the needed analytic concepts. We use X=buy/sell a car.
In the right column we have Hohfeld's distinctions supplemented in three ways. First, by separating the goods involved in a transaction from the title to the goods. This is a more recent development in economic theory than Hohfeld's days: we now talk about economics as the exchange of titles to property, rather than as the mere exchange of actual belongings. Second, by separating transactions that involve barter, money, and credit. The growth in the credit economy has been enormous since Hohfeld wrote his analysis. Third, by including guarantees. Consumer protection has also greatly advanced in the modern economy.
Epic language
Emic language
Driver: Please, sell me a car.
Dealer: Yes, I am a car dealer.Ego: I have a claim that Alter does X.
Alter: I have a duty to do X.Driver: I can choose you or someone else to sell me a car.
Dealer: Yes, you don't have to buy a car from me.
Ego: I am at liberty do or not to do X.
Alter: I have no claim that Ego does X.Dealer: If you do buy it from me it will cost you Y dollars.
Driver: I want to leave my old car to you as part of the deal. And I will pay you in installments. and give you Z dollars in down payment.
Ego: I want the title to X for Z money, the barter B, and the credit C.
Alter: The title to X is yours in exchange for Z money, the barter B, and the credit CDriver: I can use the car that you sell me any way I want except recklessly against any other vehicle or person on the road since that would violate the latter's claim to be safe from such attacks. I may drive the car, let someone else drive it. When the credit is paid off I can rent it out for money, sell it, give it away, destroy it. Dealer: I do not care how you use the car that I sell to you.
Ego: I have the power to dispose of X when the credit is paid off, and as long as I don't violate any rights of others.
Alter: I surrender my claims about any disposition of X.Driver: What help will you give me if this car does not work as expected?
Dealer: We pay for any fabrication faults in the car for three years or 10'000 miles, whichever comes first.
Ego: I have after-the-purchase claims regarding X.
Alter: I give the guarantees G.Driver: I don't want to allow you or anyone else to change these conditions.
Dealer: I shall have no possibility to change the ways you use the car that I sell to you.Ego: I am immune from any attempt by any Alter to change my powers over X.
Alter: I have no power to change Ego's conditions for disposing of X.
The above illustrates the hidden background of norms for transferring a conventional property in a correct way. A market in a modern economy is a continuous exchange of properties until they end up with the person or organization that is willing to pay the most. As you see, it is a very intricate process, and there is nothing self-evident in an exchange in a market economy. It is a complex human achievement. Please note that what you actually pay for is the title to the car. With a title come the listed powers to dispose of the property and the mentioned guarantees and immunities.
Property rights are held by collectives or individuals. Properties may be peacefully transferred in other ways than trade: by inheritance, by gifts, and by taxation.
Note that "property right" is not a unitary concept. The power to dispose in a property right includes a series of separate functions, i.e. to personally use or consume the property, lend it to others for pay or for free, use it as a collateral for a loan, give it away to anyone, sell it, or destroy it. A seller on a market may restrict the buyer's use of these functions until the property is fully paid.
In any transaction in a modern market economy it is the money that is central, not the goods. A change in the car dealer's wealth is correctly measured in the accounting system by the money he makes on transactions; it is at best only proximate by the change in his inventory of unsold cars. Speaking strictly, as many economists nowadays do, a market economy is a continuous exchange of titles to goods and entitlements to services until they end up in the power of the highest payer. Price controls by governments, churches, cartels, or mafias do not belong in a market economy.
Free and Planned Economies
The fact that property rights refer to a series of separate functions means that governments can enter restrictions on private property by other means than by expropriating it. For example, it can control the housing market in a city by a series of measures such as rent control, rationing available apartments, taxes on sales of apartments and buildings, requirements to let a welfare agency select residents to prevent discriminations, subsidizing public housing so that construction of apartments by private investors becomes unprofitable. Thus the economy may be politically planned.
The free exchange and enjoyment of property rights is a landmark of capitalism, a free economy. The draining of property rights is commonly promoted in the European movement of social democracy (Adler-Karlsson 1969). It lets the owner keep his name on the title of his property but takes over or restricts some property functions. (In the United States and Canada this political program, strangely enough, is called "liberalism.") It is a pattern separate in degree, not in kind, from communism, which lets the state take over all aspects of property and prohibits all private exercise of the different property functions. Here the economy is totally politically planned.
There are some scientifically established limits to planning which we formalized in the proposition on "The Limit of Knowledge about Others."
| 5:4 "The Limit of Knowledge about Others" |
|
If Dunbar's number is surpassed in encounters and the members' relations to
one another have a low degree of familiarity, then (a) actions of the members, particularly speech acts, tend to occur which are, not only unknown to, but unpredictable by other participants; and (b) the members' accounts and presentations of themselves and their situation have low barriers to dishonest editing. |
|
|
The price system in a market can collect information in large and complex systems more efficiently than a centralized bureaucracy can do. This has been the insight and message of Friedrich Hayek and his students.
Needless to say, capitalism, social democracy, and communism are not only different economic systems. They are also political systems that differ fundamentally in their views on the freedom of citizens, the distribution of individual and household resources, and the use of revolutionary violence to transform society.
Economic Rationality
The rational pursuit of wealth can follow many paths including systematic robbery and organized extortion. Two more peaceful and rational avenues are the procedures of profit seeking and rent seeking. Rational profit seeking is the pursuit of long-term gains through continuous economic exchanges (Weber 1923). Rational rent seeking is the pursuit of work-free income guaranteed for long periods (Tullock 1989). The former abounds in the market economy and the latter in the welfare economy.
Market Economy and Profit Seeking
A nascent social and economic order in Scotland and England based on profit seeking was codified by Adam Smith in his work The Wealth of Nations 1776. "The desire to improve our conditions, a desire that comes to us in the womb and never leaves us until we go to the grave" was what Smith saw as the source of economic progress. It gets a chance where "natural freedom" prevails, i.e. where every individual has the right and capacity — without fear of punishment from officials, priests, criminals, or Besserwissers – to do what seems best to him or her in the current situation. Individual interests are realized in a division of labor where anyone can establish his shop without restrictions and enjoy free competition with others.
When everyone thus pursues self-interest, overall wealth and welfare are also promoted. Thus, society need not be held together by commands and threats from the government, as had been thought from Plato to Hobbes. In Smith's view, it can cohere through mutual self-interest. "It is not from the benevolence from the butcher, the brewer, or the baker that we expect our dinner, but from their regard to their own interest" is a much quoted insight in The Wealth of Nations. (We have also already quoted it.) In our terminology we would say that Smith sees the the economy, not as an organization, but as a network. It is not a state or a monopoly that runs – or necessarily grants permissions to others to run – industry and trade. It is a market of free agents and free exchanges.
The core of the market economy is profit seeking by means of a continuous exchange of titles to properties, an exchange that comes to a halt, usually temporary ones, when no one wants to pay more than the current bid for the right to the goods or services offered. This point of balance between demand and supply sets a market price.
Adam Smith's recipe for economic growth is an all-inclusive competitive market with increased division of labor. It leads to an increased specialization of firms, making them large and efficient. Here he made the biggest discovery so far in the social sciences: the division of labor on a market is the cornucopia of mankind. In a society with division of labor and free trade between different practitioners all parties benefit. In the end, even the weaker party in an exchange benefits! This seems so unbelievable that politicians in most societies have set up structures to stop or control the tapping of this horn of plenty.
TECH
Later Joseph Schumpeter added technological and organizational innovations leading to the destruction, transformation and renewal of products and services, and to mobility and flexibility of the staffs of firms. The Smith model may best fit the mature industries producing established commodities, and the Schumpeter model may best fit new emerging product fields.In the decades up to the last millennium, the Schumpeterian growth by "creative destruction" has been somewhat more used in the United States than in Japan and Europe. In twentieth-century Japan, the corporations were exceptionally reluctant to destroy or to renew by bankruptcy. They rather borrowed money from the banks to avoid it, and the banks became stuck with volumes of "non-performing" business loans. In Europe — particularly in France with its heritage of mercantilism and in Germany with its heritage of corporative hegemony — it has been common to counter creative destruction in the economy with various public systems of subsidies or other protections to industries and agriculture in decline. There are, for example, unemployment benefits that do not require the recipient to abandon his or her more or less obsolete occupation for a career in a new field or a new place.
Weber’s twentieth-century version of the market economy is "rational capitalism" (Weber 1923). It consists of firms (i.e. organizations) that operate as units in markets with many buyers and sellers, and themselves are traded on a stock market. Capitalism, he says, exists when most, not just some, everyday needs of the population are covered by products and services from such firms. The factors of production (land, buildings, machinery, technologies, input goods, inventions, financial capital, raw materials, labor and finished products) are controlled by entrepreneurs in rational capitalism. The art of entrepreneurship lies in utilizing one's access to such factors of production, not to satisfy the personal lust for power, avarice, or private desires, but to gain a lasting rise in value of the firm.
Rational capitalism presupposes that all business events are entered in an accounting system in which data are registered, processed, calculated, and reported to facilitate business decisions. This enables firms to systematically work to retain or improve profits (according to the operating statement) for every business period, and to attain assets that exceed their liabilities (according to the balance sheet) at the end of each accounting period. Rational capitalism, in short, is the pursuit of good accounts for a firm.
To pursue good accounts efficiently, the capitalist management should be free to hire and fire workers, to divide the work between them, and alone command them in the work place. To see workers in such machine-like ways obviously creates conflicts with their lifecycles, and cannot be sustained (see Chapter 30). In his days Weber dismissed this rather lightly as a conflict between formal and substantive rationality. Actually, it is a further illustration of Weber's discovery of the severe conflicts in our everyday life and our institutions that are caused by Western rationalism.
Profit seeking may be rational from the point of the total economy but not necessarily from the point of the individual. To be sure, the market economy produces great wealth. But it is a “wealth of nations,” not necessarily the wealth of any individual. It carries no guarantee against a relative individual poverty or misfortune.
Welfare Economy and Rent Seeking
The guarantees against poverty and any drop in riches are found in rent seeking. The workings of this phenomenon were observed and analyzed by the liberal economist Knut Wicksell in the early decades of the twentieth century. He called the Swedish pension reform of 1913, “rent hysteria,” a choice of words indicating that he was opposed to the reform. This very original version of Social Security payments for old age was delivered in roughly equal amounts by the state to all elderly Swedes regardless of their needs, whether they had been employed or not, and regardless of how much they had paid in taxes.
The reform was originally conceived as a copy of Bismarck's German welfare program for the first big generation of industrial workers, a generation with a rural background who no longer had a farm to retire to in old age. The industrial employers of the period had a routine for paying wages but no routines for paying pensions. They argued that the state ought to run a pension scheme for industrial workers as it did for civil servants. The farmers then wanted the same cash pensions as the factory workers. The universal features of public welfare in Sweden were thus born by the consensus of joint rent seeking of workers, employers, and farmers (Zetterberg & Ljungberg, 1997, Chapter 5).
Rent seeking is a modus vivendi of households. We deal further with this in Chapter 25.
Rent Seeking in Glamorous Social Life
Rent seeking, like Weber’s case of profit seeking, has individual expressions that have little to do with the rationality of the total economy. Peggy Hopkins Joyce (1893-1957) was a gregarious Virginia blond without education and money, married for the first of many times as a teenager. She acquired an insatiable taste for fine clothes, diamonds and a glamorous social life. As a hostess or guest she made most every party a success, and she was a joy in bed. She helped many millionaires separate from their money. She was the model for Gentlemen Prefer Blondes and the hit song Diamonds are a Girl’s Best Friend. The gossip columns of the popular press of the 1920s tabbed her ”gold digger.”
Rational economic welfare has nothing to do with such individual rent seeking.
Stratification and Rewards in the Economy
The economy, more than other realms, can reward its participants with its own product. Those who make money for a firm are rewarded by money, not medals, statues, or publicity.
The Makers of riches, the entrepreneurs, depart from the simple rule that in the economy you are simply rewarded by money. This has made them mysterious to most politicians and academics, even to academic economists. A first key to the understanding of entrepreneurs is the fact that the economic reward system in most countries allows an entrepreneur to attach his name to his enterprise. Local streets display stores and workshops with names of the owners in highly visible signs. And in the streets of the economic capitals you can see corporate headquarters with the family names of the founders, e.g., the Rothschild Bank, the Ford Motor Company, the Krupp Works, E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. In the use of such nomenclature, the rewards in the economy are similar to those in art and science where your name or signature also may be attached to your achievement. Their sense of achievement and its visible aspects are important to them. For many, good yearly accounts for their firms means as much (or more) as the amount in their personal bank accounts.
Although numerical scores are available for the economic stratification of riches, the economic reward system contains other units, more visible ones to the public than the bank accounts. The signs of economic position and success that are honored by the larger community in a capitalist economy are based on slacker scales. As Veblen (1899) had elaborated, they may consist of conspicuous goods and services, number of residences (rated as to size and location), number of servants and/or labor-saving devices in the household, annual charity contributions, and so on. Generally speaking, a person's wealth was proven to outsiders by his or her conspicuous consumption.
The reward pattern in the economy is solidified by a series of auxiliary social prescriptions; for example, if a rich man does not show a normal amount of the display of wealth and its obligations he may be denounced as a miser. If a visitor to the successful does not choose to notice or appreciate displayed goods and services in the rich man's home, he may be seen as ungrateful.
In many instances there is a certain self-generation — success by virtue of success — in the reward system of the economic realm, the so called Matthew effect. For example, the economically successful individual may become a creditor and investor, receiving additional income in the form of interest or dividends and perhaps homage from those who may want to borrow money from him.
Also with monetary rewards added, the non-economic realms retain their systems of honor and respect. At the turn of the century, members of the non-economic elites are usually addressed with their title as Doctor, Judge, Warden, MP, Reverend, et cetera. In business you are simply Mr. or Ms. and your formal reward is money and money alone.
Providing Precious Money
Tokens to stabilize economic evaluations were invented to facilitate an exchange of properties. Coins from about 6000 BC, stamped with a lion, have been found in Lydia, the present western Turkey. Coins are standardized pieces of a precious metal that trade at the value of that metal. When in olden times, household were no longer self-sufficient, they first traded for their wants in kind: exchanging cattle for cooking utensils, brides, or whatever that could be used in barters. There was an obvious advantage to using coins in such exchanges, and coins became essential to households.
With coinage, most everything — tools, produce, cattle, and slaves — could begin to receive generally known prices. Augustus put his picture, retouched to be a symbol of benevolent power, on Roman coins. This practice was how a sovereign power guaranteed to the users the weight and purity of coins. However, subsequent Roman emperors replaced increasing parts of the base metal in the coins with cheaper metals, thus "debasing" the currency, causing a general increase in prices, i.e. inflation in which too many tokens chased available products and services.
Inflation also occurred when the supply of gold increased. There was a scarcity of money in much of 14th and early 15th century Europe, driven by a decline in gold and silver production and a chronic deficit in European trade with the Levant. The Spaniards of the era who conquered and colonized South America had one overriding mission: to bring home gold. The scarcity reversed into its opposite. Gold and gold coins flooded Spain and Europe. This was a largely illusory wealth due to the resulting inflation. In hindsight, this could probably have been avoided if the golden capital had been invested in productive pursuits in agriculture and manufacturing instead of in glamorous lifestyles as favored by the Spaniards. But the idea of productive investments was beyond the horizon of the economists of the day. They advised the kings that gold should be hoarded in state coffers. This mercantilism is not the only false theory that economists have brought to the world.
Providing Paper and Fiat Money
In the Middle Ages, Venice came to function as the principal bullion market for all Europe and the Mediterranean. Zecca, the mint of Venice, produced in successive periods the Penny, the Grosso, the Ducat, and the Soldino.
Paper instruments as tokens for coins of precious metals first developed in Venice and Genoa to finance loans to the state. Eventually foreign states, not just royal personalities and households, could become borrowers. Loans to states could be guaranteed by promising the lender a share of some tax. Special banks emerged to provide these loans and other banks came into being to manage these public debts; the latter we now call central banks.
For merchants, temporary tokens of coins in the from of financial instruments on paper also developed in Genoa and Venice. It could begin with something as simple as the arrival of German merchants to the Venice bullion market with unminted gold from their mines. They got negotiable receipts — we would call them bills or checks — from the Zecca. While waiting for the coins to be delivered they could, if necessary, use these receipts for their expenses and purchases in the city. In 1528, the mint in Venice broadened its assistance to private individuals and firms and began to pay market rates of interest on specie deposits, the so-called depositi in Zecca, a service to manage private capital.
Venice and Genoa succumbed in political strife and wars. The rest of the development of modern finance is located in Amsterdam, London, Philadelphia, and New York. For governments, raising money via bond markets became a form of deferred taxation to finance wars and infrastructures. For example, the young state of Pennsylvania raised money on the Amsterdam bourse to build canals. States need money most when they go to war. Wars have accelerated the buildup of the system for handling national debts.
In February 1797 war loomed between England and France. A frigate from the French fleet off Ireland landed a small number of soldiers at Fishguard in Pembrokeshire. The incident is often called "the last invasion of Britain." The alarming news travelled throughout the country. People wanted the safety of silver and gold coins hands-on, and not only as a promise on paper bank notes that, on demand, they could be exchanged for coins. An impulsive run on the country's banks occurred.
The reserves in the country banks and of the Bank of England quickly run down. Bank of England asked and got permission to suspend cash payments with coins. After February 26, the Bank would exchange only paper for paper. Paper notes of less than £5 in value, which previously had been prohibited was now printed en masse. The promise to pay in coins was replaced by a promise, or rather an unproven assertion, that the new notes were worth £1 and £2 and could be used as tender just as the old coins. This kind of monetary instrument is nowadays called "fiat money" in technical vocabulary.
To the surprise of the British bankers, the new money was accepted by the public and by merchants without any serious protests. Paper money in small denominations, not backed by real precious metals, functioned in the markets! Not until 1821 was the exchange to silver and gold coins reintroduced. However, the habit of suspending gold standards at times of war continued. A suspension was also a common prerequisite for other big expenses such as taxing the economies of the Twentieth Century for the creation of state-run welfare, rather than using communitarian or market-based welfare measures. On balance, however, the gold standard meant that national economic realms were immune from large-scale political manipulations of the money supply, an essential requirement of a many-splendored society whose societal realms cherish their independence.
The growth of wealth in the 19th and 20th centuries is the greatest story never told in full to the rank and file of mankind. They hear more about relative poverty than about absolute wealth. The expansion of wealth was not matched by an expansion of the production of gold. An increased role for paper money was inevitable. Country after country left the gold standard. The United States kept the gold standard into the 1970s. With the US still on the gold standard it became self-evident for governments to have US dollars in their treasuries. The triggering event for Washington to leave the gold standard was a debt of about 3 billion dollars to France that had helped the financing of the Vietnam War. In August 1971 the US government received a request that this loan be repaid in gold. Afraid that other nations would follow the French example, The Treasury did not see fit to dispense with so much gold from Fort Knox at that point in time. President Nixon immediately took the country off the gold standard.
The United States remained, however, the biggest and most stable economy in the world. Its market for Treasury bills was larger and more liquid than the markets of other government securities, including Bunds in Frankfurt and Guilds in London. The United States Treasury continued to serve as the world's mattress in troubled times. With this in flow of borrowed money, the country could develop a dependency on imported oil, conduct limited but expensive wars, and develop affordable houses to less moneyed households, all without raising taxes. In the first decade of the twenty-first century, the latter involved a selling of toxic derivative securities by government chartered mortgage corporations to banks and money managers not only in the United States but in Europe and Asia and to other takers. This swindle contributed to a world-wide economic depression. It added a very concrete grievance to the anti-Americanism in the world that otherwise was mostly sour grapes and defensive bilge.
TECH
The fiat money took new shapes in credit cards ("plastic money,") and in electronically controlled accounts ("digital money"). The central banks learned to add (or subtract) to the total money supply by pressing the keys of a computer connected to the banking system; no need to start printing presses. In increasing numbers ordinary consumers also learned to press their computer keys, link up with their bank accounts via Internet, and do their transactions electronically.With fiat money there is no limit to the money supply. But there is nevertheless a firm limit to the amount in circulation that has the value of money, money that keeps its value over time and space.
All modern nations have developed a "square of power," to use a wording from Ferguson (2001). First, there is a tax-gathering bureaucracy, i.e. organized procurers with legal backing who claim money for use by the body politic. If necessary they use force to collect the taxes and they fine or imprison those who balk. (We will deal in more detail with taxation in Chapter 22 on the body politic.) Second, nations have parliamentary institutions, in the beginning not necessary based on universal franchise, that authorize taxation and also specify the state's use of the money. Consent of the governed, as represented by members of parliament, is a prerequisite for smooth tax collection. Third, there is a system of national debt, that is, in effect a system for delayed taxation. It has been essential to develop and maintain trust that these debts will be repaid. The state of Venice honored all its debts, but delayed payments did occur. Fourth, a central bank is needed to manage this debt. This bank is an agency of the state or of the parliament as in Sweden which has the world's oldest central bank.
Nowadays the advanced central banks have charters that stress their independence. They are not obliged to take all instructions from the governments of the day. The latter often face the temptation to debase the currency, to "print money" as the saying goes, to get funds for their political programs. Incumbent governments in democracies usually wish low interest rates in election years to please the electorate and thus get enough votes for reelection. Such practices are made more difficult by charters of independence, provided the central bankers know that their job is to be unpopular.
A somewhat covert version of "printing money" in volume is to issue government bonds that have no other buyer than the country's own central bank. When the venerable Bank of England increased the money supply this way in March 2009 they did not call it printing money but "quantitative easing," words with a Saussarian meaning as good as any.
Producing Wealth by Manufacturing
History shows many ways of building and handling wealth. We will review only two common ways that differ the most: producing riches by manufacturing and producing riches by finance.
Industrial Revolutions
The production of goods is intimately connected with technology.
An industrial revolution is a large-scale combination of a new technology with new social arrangements. Starting in the late eighteenth century and culminating in the nineteenth one, Europe’s first industrial revolution used the technology of the steam engine and the social organization of the factory. It gave us transport by rail and steamers.
A second industrial revolution began at the end of the nineteenth century and culminating in the twentieth one when combustion engines and electric engines reshaped the factories. The combustion and jet engines later opened for transportation by trucks and cars and eventually airplanes. With electric start motors automobiles could readily be used without a chauffeur's cranking the motor to a start. A mass market opened that included both men and women. Electric devices reshaped not only factory work but also offices and households and everyday living.
After World War II it was thought that the next technological revolution would be called "the atomic age." It was heralded by a big monument in Brussels. One kilogram coal produces energy amounting to 3kWh while one kilo uranium gives 50 000 kWh, that is 16 700 times as much. But the technology to harness this huge energy did not integrate well with existing technologies. Atomic energy did not lead to a new industrial revolution, at least not in its first 60 years.
Instead, the third micro-electronic industrial revolution began at the end of the twentieth century with the digitalization of all kinds of communication, print, music, pictures. Products and packages receive identities in bar codes and animals receive digital identities in chips; anything living can get a record of its unique variation from the DNA of the species. Most importantly, this revolution, unlike the previous two, gets at the core of civilized living, the use of communication by symbols.
Creative Destruction
The shifts in technologies in the three industrial revolutions have produced much wealth. This cannot be summarized in any smooth macro-economic law of equilibrium. In the spirit of Joseph Schumpeter (1942) we must rather focus on the role of entrepreneurs who take hold of the new and destroy the old. The entry of entrepreneurs with new technology is the force that has sustained long-term economic growth. In the first version of his theory, the creative roles of personal efforts by entrepreneurs were seen as critical. Later Schumpeter gave more credit to departments of research and development in big companies and to their innovative marketing departments.
The "creative destruction" that entrepreneurs may cause can be quite dramatic, particularly when the old technology has been in the hands of efficient companies that have acquired a degree of monopoly in the market. Labor unions usually favor the old technology since transformations includes closing factories and unemployment. Strikes, at times with violence, easily became the order of many days during a change-over. The more sophisticated labor economists in Sweden, Rudolf Meidner and Gösta Rehn, took an opposite view and proposed more civilized measures. To achieve as high wages for workers as possible the labor movement should not accommodate to the factories of old technologies but rather maintain a high wage pressure there. This so-called "Swedish wage model" is worth a moment of consideration.
Technological Change and a Wage Model
In 1951 a book by the German-born economist Rudolf Meidner entitled Fackföreningsrörelsen och den fulla sysselsättningen ("The Labor Movement and Full Employment") was presented to a Swedish labor congress. Its core principle is that all jobs, regardless of their line of work, that are the same shall have the same pay in all firms at all places of work throughout the country. This departure from market wages Meidner called "a wage policy of solidarity." Thus differences in wages would minimize between large and small, rich and poor employers, between city and country, between young and old employees, and, what was later emphasized much more than in 1951, between men and women. The less profitable firms would pay the same wages as more profitable ones. This would force out of business firms with old technologies along with those operating in declining markets, as well as firms with inappropriate organization, and/or weak leadership. Workers would then be free, particularly in good times, to move to the more profitable enterprises with new technology and modern organization and leadership of production and capacity to pay high wages.
This policy would maintain a high level of wages in a country, a central union goal. It required generous unemployment compensations between jobs and an active public policy of helping and training people to take new jobs, subsidizing if need be their moves to other towns where they could get jobs in new or expanding firms able to pay good wages. Around these ideas economists from the blue-collar and white-collar unions and the central patronage association could unite. The complaints from firms with marginal profit levels were not heeded. Complaints arose also among some unions (e.g. the miners) that the very rich firms did not have to pay higher wages than others. They were loud at times and often underlined by communists, but on balance the system was accepted. Sweden could embark on long-term big structural and technological changes without as much labor strife as in most other European countries.
A by-product of the model was that the government of Sweden, unlike its colleagues on the European continent, could stay out of wage negotiation in the private sector, a feat cheered by us who believe in a the aspect of the many-splendored society to keep societal realms out one another' hair. This was a silver lining in a society that otherwise suffers from a severe hegemony by the body politic over all other societal realms. Over time technologies and industrial organization became more complex, and the Swedes found it more difficult to tell which jobs were "the same" and thus deserving the same wage. Some locally set individual variations in wages became accepted, but the rules on seniority, working hours, vacations, pensions, and working environment could remain common throughout the entire county.
The silver lining was removed by a prime minister named Olof Palme. In a period with poor standing in the electorate for his social democratic government and a tight budget that did not allow the usual additional welfare measures, he decided to throw the power of the state behind the unions. They received more favorable rules about hiring and firing and about industrial conflicts, rules that they could not have achieved by negotiations with the employers. This legislation cost the government nothing in the budget. It damaged, beyond repair for decades, a memorable, splendored feature of Swedish society, a fair and rational labor market without government dictates.
Development Blocks TECH
A new major technology such as the steam, combustion, or electrical engines in the past or microprocessors in the present does not automatically produce high economic growth. Nor is competition enough to move it into dominance, as classical economics would have it. A new technology wins its economic successes by combining, not competing, with complementary technologies into a growing manufacturing cluster. In order to take off, the auto industry needed not only combustion technology but steel mills and its complementary technique of buckling metal sheets. To develop a comfortable product it had to use rubber and the know-how of blowing air into tires. To make the process of starting a car easier for the consumer a start engine had to be added from electric technology and a battery from chemical technology. The new technology of covering roads by asphalt rather than stones or gravel came in handy. Thus, for the automobile, entrepreneurs could piece together "a development block" (a term coined by Erik Dahmén 1950) that included also services from investors. Such blocks often form a geographic concentration such as the first auto industry block in Michigan/Ohio.
The typical forms of social organization in a development block is that of what we have called "netorgs." Competition and cooperation take place in networks of organizations. The success of development blocks is thus predictable from our Proposition in Chapter 7 on The Netorg System of Realm Expansion.
|
7:7. "The Netorg System of Realm Expansion" |
A cardinal value
grows and its societal
realm extends its reach
|
When a major new technology such as the microchips is born there is much excitement. At the end of the Twentieth century there was no end to the great aspirations that came with the arrival of the network technology of the Internet. (See John Perry Barlow's declaration cited in Chapter 5.) Silicon Valley, the foremost development block around the new technology, attracted overinvestment. But the potential of a new technology cannot be put to full use until the complementary contributions from established technologies have been developed. An IT boom and bust occurred at the turn of the century before the new technology had found its huge number of applications though complementary technologies ranging from sorting both packages and bank transactions to recording and distributing both music and mail. It is in this later and more mature phase the new technology makes its biggest contribution to economic growth. For historians and theorists of business cycles it may be more useful to pay more attention to the cycle of development blocks than to the first breakthrough of a new technology.
In a market economy, new technologies do not come about by political decisions. No parliament decides to introduce automobiles or the personal computer in a country. But politicians may oppose new technologies. After the nuclear catastrophe in Chernobyl, the Swedish Social Democratic government introduced a law prohibiting, not only planning for new nuclear energy, but any research into the application of nuclear energy. This was an infringement on the autonomy of science. The universities reduced or closed their nuclear laboratories and training programs. The country's nuclear industry, one of the few in Europe, was sold to Westinghouse in the United States. The nuclear energy plants, however, were to run their technological life, perhaps some 40 years. To recruit top engineers under these conditions was difficult. Far from promoting safety, there are reasons to believe that safety standards and maintenance deteriorated due to the clumsy political meddling with the autonomy of the realm of science. More often than not democratic politicians restrain rather than prohibit technologies. It is telling that at the millennium more of the new production details in a car were due to government regulations than to new technology. In the opinion climate at the time of this writing it is particularly common among politicians to restrain technology in the name of reducing global warming. The latter is perceived as a doomsday threat and a good opportunity to do what politicians are good at: to tax and to regulate.
The track record of big government to pick new technologies for public investments suffers from the unfamiliarity of politicians with both entrepreneurs and development blocks. To prevent misplacements of investment capital, politicians with business ambitions must realize that the economy is a different world from politics and administration and has rules and conditions of its own. Politicians must rely on middlemen, Providers and Procurers, who can see these rules and conditions without partisan spectacles or realm biases. This is a hard task for politicians who have been used to recommending lucrative consulting jobs or assignments to cronies.
The significance of development blocks is often omitted in the study of economics. This may explain why non-economists such as investors in new technology compete well with professional economists. The mixed track record of big banks in choosing investments in new technologies is also due to a nearly universal lack of understanding by Keepers (bankers) of the importance of Creators (entrepreneurs). The small European entrepreneurs with new technologies have often a better chance of borrowing money from one another than from banks. The United States has a better system for the supply of venture capital.
Producing Wealth by Finance
In several advanced countries manufacturing and the sale of manufactured goods is no longer the main highway to wealth. Purely financial transactions dominate the international flow of money; payments for imported manufactured goods and commodities come in a poor second.
Finance as a source of riches is the process of making money by means of money. It includes traditional organizations such as banks and insurance companies. A modern bank is much more than an institution that takes in, i.e. borrows, savings from the public at low rates of interest an lends it to others at higher rates. Transactions other than this "interest gap" usually account for the lion's share of modern bank profits. Using the labels in Figure 20.2 we may say that bankers are no longer mere Keepers of money. They act as Brokers for numerous financial services. Likewise, a modern insurance company is more than an insurer of households, factories, and ships. Most anything can be insured, including your health, bank account, and the bonds that depend on mortgage payments. International networks of reinsurers spread the risks. The new financiers are true Makers, i.e., creators, innovators, and entrepreneurs in wealth, making money by money. They not only trade for their institution's account on financial markets. They have invented new types of monetary assets, not all of them sound ones.
In the first decade of the new millennium in the United States, financial services grew to represent more than 20 percent of the gross domestic product, compared with 13 percent for manufacturing. Before the crash in 2008, bundles of consumer loans and home mortgages packaged as securities were the biggest U.S. export business. Between 2001 and 2007 a total of $27 trillion of these securities were exported, i.e. sold to financial institutions in Europe, Asia, Australia, and Africa. Practically all were stamped "investment grade" by rating agencies, and the salesmen probably hinted that this meant that they were "good as gold." To buy them back would have required all of the gross national product of the United States during two years. (Virtually all early issues were redeemed in good order.) When the cash value of these securities became uncertain, the many banks and other financial institutions on all continents that had bought them suddenly became suspected of approaching insolvency; each one knew their own situation and suspected that neighboring ones had the same or worse problem.
In the new ballpark of finance, bankers and insurers are a minority. In the majority are the managers of pension funds, private investment funds, endowments, and charities. Here are also special companies that handle mortgages that borrow money at low rate of interest, provide mortgages for households and firms at higher rates of interest, package these mortgages as bonds for resale, and use the proceeds for further mortgages. Here are stock exchanges, currency traders, and bond dealers. Here are the credit card companies. Hedge funds can deal in anything expressed in money, and so does the whole world of finance. The successes of these financial services has lead to the customary circle of capitalism: over-establishment in good times followed by bankruptcies in bad times.
The new world of finance has also celebrated a bridgehead to conquer the old world of manufacturing goods and producing services. It is called "private equity." With its risk prone capital private equity buys industries, restructures them, improves their efficiency so that they can be sold off within ten or so years. This process may involve paying out parts of the working capital of the acquired firms (that admittedly have often been sleepy) to the new owners. It is replaced with loans from the market. This gives private equity more working capital for new forays of acquisitions. The management of the acquired company gets a new but acceptable pressure to perform better, so that that the interests on its now borrowed capital can be paid.
Any combination of economic values, for example mortgages, can be combined and packed as a "derivative" and sold as a bond. There is nothing intrinsically sinister in this; it is a rational device to spread risks, particularly in areas where some mortgages have been issued to persons with poor credit rating. The initial package may travel as collateral and/or sales object between different financial firms to end up in an investment bank. The investment bank raises its money for this purchase by selling certificates of derivatives to ordinary banks with offices on Main Street in any country in the world. They can offer these at various rate of interest depending of the level of risk. For banks to accept them as part of their capital base, the certificates must be stamped, not like Roman coins by the image of an Emperor, but by a rating agency such as Moody's or Standard and Poor as "investment grade," popularly interpreted as "good as gold." An insurance company may furthermore insure the bonds against default. Now the risks have really been spread on many hands. Many hands have also a claim on a part of the income from the original mortgage.
But the transparency of the first generation of these financial assets has been much reduced when it changed hands to new generations of owners. The risk of defaults at the first stage of this chain was poorly understood. When salesmen from American investment banks turned up to place a certificate in a regional or foreign bank, neither they nor the buyer seem fully aware of all the intricacies in the history and buildup of the investment product that is to be added to the capital of the buying bank. Needless to say the salesmen, like everyone else in this chain, were rewarded by high bonuses. Some packing and certifying actions of the first generation of derivatives may well belong in the right hand part of the semiotic square of wealth, that is, among swindles.
The market in the United States for derivatives, particularly those involving mortgages, grew significantly in the new century. The commitments involved in the loan transaction of all in-between instances in these chains also grew in numbers. The title documents of these financial assets abound with Saussarian symbols, garlands of words referring to one another rather than to something concrete. Moreover, derivatives transactions were struck privately. The market was unregulated, with no central exchange where prices and volumes were disclosed. This chaotic situation with financial instruments of poor transparency was one of the hall marks of the worldwide financial crisis of 2008. More on this crisis later.
Creative financial processes can be used, not only to capitalist ends but also to socialist ends. Social Democracy has learned to use a high taxation of what belongs to the owners on the balance sheets of firms, and give borrowed capital in firms breaks, for example in the form of a full tax deduction of interests. It may add the use high individual or household wealth taxes to further reduce private capital, making firms dependent on sovereign funds (run by states) or wage-earner funds (run by labor unions). When such measures are combined with mandatory representation by governments and unions on corporate boards, "capitalism without capitalists" is close at hand — without having to resort to much old-style nationalization. At the pinnacle of their power, Sweden's Social Democrats tried to accomplish this. They were met with local resistance and an opinion climate influenced by Margaret Thatcher and Ronald Reagan. In a Europeanized and globalized environment their policies for the economy were not strikingly forward-looking. Much private capital and a couple of the most successful big firms escaped the socialist designs by moving abroad.
Cycles, Bubbles, and Panics
Many exchanges in a market involve delays between production and delivery. This causes booms and busts. A classic example is the so called "hog cycle." Farmers who produce pork must make production decisions before they know what price they will get on the market. About 10 months elapses between breeding a sow and the slaughter of her offspring. Since a hog breeder may not know the decisions made by other producers, cumulative overreactions to very good times as well as very bad times have resulted in a cyclical pattern of production and prices. Agricultural economists show that the full cycle of the pork market takes four years:
-
First year: In this good year prices are above production costs and the farmers increase production. Keeping more gilts on the farm for breeding brings less pork to the market. Prices go even higher.
-
Second year: The increased pork brought to the market from the now larger herd of sows brings prices to a fall.
-
Third year: Oversupply in the market is now apparent; prices fall below all costs of production. Many producers decide to reduce their herds. Fewer gilts are retained and more sows are sold, which causes an increased amount of pork to go to the market for even lower prices.
-
Fourth year: Production declines and prices increase to the break-even point or better. A new cycle can start.
This kind of boom and bust for agricultural products is used as justification for the price control that is practiced in some farming countries. We find similar cycles in the markets for all kinds of fashionable goods and for all economic asset classes. Typical booms and busts mark the housing market. Again a root problem is that the builder of a housing project has his costs long before he knows the selling prices of the finished buildings. Also the customers in the housing market easily get trapped in the idea the prices of today are not the prices of tomorrow.
The Stock Market
The fact that firms operating on markets also put themselves on a market is an ultimate crown of the market economy. The stock market takes funds from owners of capital who do not immediately have use for the money and puts it into firms that lack the cash to realize their production ideas. The business plans, conditions and market prospects carry different levels of risks for different firms. By spreading the stocks between firms listed on the stock markets the investor tries to achieve the risk he is willing to bear. In all, allocation of capital available for investments comes into the hands of those the firms believed to have the best chances of success.
By means of the stock market, capital is allotted by decisions inside the societal realm of the economy, and no decisions by tribal chiefs, priests, moralists, politicians, or military strongmen are needed. Without a stock market the realm of the economy would not be independent of other societal realms. A politically planned economy would be the nearest available alternative. A stock market is thus one of the several cornerstones of a liberal and many-splendored society.
At the same time, stock markets expose all listed firms to the booms and busts that are inherited in markets. A bust affects not only investors but employees, distributors, and customers of these firms and, in severe cases, the effects may spread to the general public.
A first scientific understanding of the nature of the flow of communication on a stock market was provided by Vilfredo Pareto, a brilliant Italian social scientist who had started out as a political economist and who contributed a great deal to economic theory. He found economics to be too limited a field to help in understanding certain “irrational” problems, among them, those that appeared in politics. In order to be rational about the irrational, he turned to sociology. He used sociology to construct typologies and theories about the spirit of the times. He used them also in interpreting movements of the stock market. In a paper from 1901 he wrote about the importance of the climate of opinion on the Stock Exchange.
Whereas during the upward trend every argument advanced in order to demonstrate that an enterprise will produce money is received with favor, the same arguments will be absolutely rejected during the downward trend... A man who during the downward trend refuses to buy certain stocks believes himself to be guided exclusively by reason and does not know that, unconsciously, he yields to the thousand of small impressions which he receives to some degree from the daily economic news. When, later, during the upward trend, he will buy those same stocks, or similar shares offering no reasonably better chance of success, he will again think that he is allowing only the dictates of reason, and will remain unaware of the fact that his transition from distrust to trust depends on sentiments generated by the atmosphere around him (Pareto 1901/19??, pp. 93-94).
What people (such as our farmers) talk about during upturns and downturns of a market is governed by a Proposition on Socially Rewarded Convergence.
|
(a)
Persons have an inclination to express communications that harmonize
with customary and/or habitual communications found in their
encounters; and |
As Pareto had noticed, a consensus on the trend emerges rather quickly. Let us begin our study at a point when this happens during an upward trend. We will pursue the likely course of events by drawing upon our knowledge from the reasoning on the edifice of symbols (Book 2) and about motivations fuelled by symbols (Book 3) to understand a full cycle of stock market swings. Let’s pursue this in some detail; it will tell the extent to which social science can explain the course of stock market swings. Probably the same processes will account for bubbles also in other markets.
|
In any social
encounters, the participants |
In meeting face-to-face associates and in absorbing the mass media we know from the Proposition on Selective Scanning that people do not observe everything, but tend to focus, among other things, on the evaluative language in use. In an encounter involving a market this would usually be the price.
Furthermore, the Rules of Emotive and Rational Choice tells us that emotively charged symbols are observed first; in this case it may well be the number that reveals how rich you are, i.e. the current market value of your assets.
|
(a) In scanning a
symbolic environment or part thereof man first reacts to the
symbols, if any, that have emotive charges and then to the executive
symbols. (b) In this reaction, negative emotive symbols have greater effect than positive emotive symbols. (c) If all symbols are roughly equally executive, i.e. emotive meanings are spread evenly or are absent, man exercises rational choice. |
The rest of the available information is more or less ignored. A period of continuous upward pricing of an asset sets the focus on the daily scanned price at the expense of other information about the asset.
The combined effect of the two cited propositions is that the traders begin to ignore shifts in the underlying realties and follow only the rising price. This is now unrestrained and is bid higher and higher. The volume of trade in the asset increases. Preoccupation in a rising market with the rising price at the expense of anything else is a defining mark of a so called "bubble."
| a) People have a tendency to develop "looking-glass
selves," i.e. self-images that are synonymous or consonant with public
views about them in their social encounters, particularly their
encounters with significant others. (b) By using language they then modify these self-images in varying degrees to become their "edited selves," which normally are further adjusted by physical, biological, or social realities to become their "authentic selves." |
Continuous increases in the value of an asset boast the evaluation and rank of the owner in his social encounters. This adds to his self-evaluation. His personality begins to change. He “re-edits himself” to something grander according to the Proposition on Development of Selves.
For little effort and a small initial commitment of money the investor reaps big rewards. The Proposition on Emotive Sense of Justice gives the investor a sense of exuberance. At this point asset owners tend to spend more on personal and family consumption.
|
14:1."The Emotive Sense of Justice" |
| If the evaluations a person receives for a set of actions in encounters become (a) disproportionately smaller than his commitment to these action, then he tends to show negative emotive reactions, while (b) if they become disproportionately larger than the extent of his commitment to these actions, he trends to show positive emotive reactions. |
The process in the Proposition on Rank Equilibration in Status-sets begins to work to equalize their ranks of investor and consumer, making the level of consumption more commensurate with the level of the brokerage account. Thus we get extravagance in spending during the rise of the bubble. If we deal with a large bubble this increase in consumption shows up in the statistics for the total economy and spills over into a period of “good times,” celebrated by most everybody.
| Persons with a status-set of different ranks tend to act to equalize them (a) so that they match their previously achieved customary evaluation, or, (b) if they live under conditions of achievement motivation (i.e. ever higher anchorage points and/or more inflated units of evaluation), to raise their lower ranks to the level of their highest rank. |
Here begins a critical phase of the boom and bust process that everyone – bread earners, businessmen, preachers, social workers, and journalists – should worry about. Politicians in particular ought to worry. But this is the time when they, like everyone else, are apt to think that markets take care of themselves. They share in the exuberance, as suggested by the Socially Rewarded Convergence mentioned above. Everybody’s laments and worries, surely real enough, come when the bubble has burst.
When prices of the bubbling asset reflect evermore the expectation of future gains in prices the equilibrium component in Gary Becker's often cited definition of economics — “the combined assumptions of maximizing behavior, market equilibrium, and stable preferences, used relentlessly and unflinchingly, form the heart of the economic approach” — breaks down. Prices in financial markets no longer reflect the supply and demand in the way they were supposed to do.
Bubbles come and go. As a bubble grows, many investors are apt to say “it is different this time.” A good rule of thumb is to be skeptical of any such talk. During the IT-bubble in the 1990s the financial world was full of talk about "a new economy." It had new indices of success, for example "burn rate," the estimated number of month before new capitalization is needed. To the IT-enthusiasts in the stock market, burn rate became more of a buy signal for a company stock than profit.
| The longer a continuous string of the very same stimulations occurs in an encounter, the less effective the latter become, and vice versa, the longer a string of continuously novel stimulations, the more the effective they are. |
The Proposition on Satiation indicates that swings that reverse opinion during a trend are an ever present possibility. They become a certainty when the talk of a trend no longer continues the string of positive novelties. Then someone with knowledge pays attention and discovers that market has taken the wrong way.
Only a trained participant in the market may notice the early shift in the flow of information. “This is the first ripple on the waves in many years that shows that the wind with good news from the Exchange is changing course.” This was Bernard Baruch’s comment on an annual report that mentioned a slight downturn from the otherwise high profit level maintained by a technological darling of those days, the Radio Corporation of America. (Cited from Galbraith 1964, p. ??). It was the new year of 1929, a splendid time for Wall Street where Baruch worked. He sold his shares, and thereby secured a permanent fortune of 10 million dollars. Thereafter, he became a legendary participant in discussions on New York’s park benches and an advisor to several presidents. The crash in 1929 of the overpriced Exchange on Wall Street came when even other news began to be viewed with pessimism. “Such thoughts roused first dozens, then hundreds, and finally thousands of breasts… and at last stopped the upward trend,” says Galbraith.
During a rising bubble people increasingly borrow money to invest in the uptick. After a period of such increasingly leveraged speculation in a widespread bubble, bank credits tend to become tighter. The shortage of new credits affects also branches other than the bubbling ones. When a big bubble in this way has infected the financial system, a general decline, an economic recession, is close at hand.
The bursting of a market bubble leads to a downtrend in prices that is usually steeper than the uptrend that built the bubble. At least in part, the increased steepness is due to the fact that we pay more attention to negative news than positive news according to the above cited Rules of Emotive and Rational Choice. Yet there still are days of upticks in the decline: Wall Street rose about one day in three or four during the worst months of the Great Depression of the 1930s, raising hopes of the die-
|
14:2. "Threats of Anomie" |
| A sudden relocation of people to anomic ranges of their scales of evaluation slows or stops the functioning of compelling vocabularies in the society. |
A rapid decline in from an accustomed high level of assets opens the door to the Threats of Anomie. The price offered to a seller of the assets pushes some of them into the lower anomic range (Figure 14.3 repeated here) and they lose their bearings. In this range, the participants in a market can no longer distinguish reasonable levels of bids.
Figure 14.3. Scale of Evaluation with Anomic Ranges

In a pioneering controlled bargaining experiment, only few subjects entered this stage of "panic or demoralized behavior" and "rapid and complete concession" (Siegel and Fouraker 1960, p. 82). One can arrange follow-up experiments when these few sellers start Circular Reactions on a visible scale.
|
15:4."Circular Reactions" |
| When participants in a face-to-face encounter converge their emotive communications (according to Proposition 15:3a), they enter into a spiraling process of circular, emotive, converging reactions. |
This would correspond to an economic bust in real life that ends in a "capitulation" on the exchange when a large crowd throw in their towels and sell at bottom prices. Only strong and experienced traders can stay aloof when this happens — and they pick up the bargains.
A high volume of capitulation trades is usually a mark of the bottom of a cycle. The process of boom and bust can now start all over. The end result of a cycle is that money has moved from "the weak to the strong," a common highway in a free market of assets.
The market economy, as we often have noted, gives unprecedented wealth to mankind. But the price is the ever recurrent booms and busts, not easy to cope with for earthlings who have a bias for the status quo when they use evaluative language, including the language of money. Political movements that are critical of the market economy therefore become endemic in all market economies.
|
4:6. "Evaluative Motives" |
| Humans are (a) inclined to act to preserve the customary evaluations they receive in their symbolic environment, be they high or low, and (b) they are inclined to act so that they avoid receiving more unfavorable evaluations than these. |
With downturns come calls for more regulations of the markets from all corners. Needless to say, democratically elected politicians will respond to this public opinion with vigor. The public does not understand that market needs more and different regulations at the top of a boom and less and different regulations at the bottom of the cycle, nor do most politicians. The late awakenings in bust and booms of both the public and their politicians and their misguided responses in the different phases of the cycle may make you question whether democracies with the current level of economic education should be trusted with the blessings of a market economy.
Booms and busts of wealth are thus recurrent phenomena in any economic market. We have arrived at this conclusion by drawing on general propositions that we have presented and quoted from previous parts of the presentation of The Many-Splendored Society. None of these propositions is specific to the cardinal value of wealth. We might therefore assume that the processes we have discussed and reprinted in this section have parallels in the non-economic societal realms, i.e. in academe, art, religion, body politic, and in morality. A very inclusive assumption is the following Proposition on Swings in Cardinal Values.
20:1
"Swings in Cardinal Values"The cardinal values (knowledge, beauty, wealth, sacredness, order, and morality) are driven to oscillate in networks of individuals and in networks of organizations.
Needless to say, this deduction remains hypothetical and should be read as a general orientation for future research, not as anything established.
Providing Economic Education in Schools
In the peasant society one learned farming by growing up on a family farm or in a farming area. When the peasant society changed into an industrial society the first jobs available in industry were so simple that they could be learned after a few weeks or months of practice in the factories. As the demands for occupational skills grew, manufacturers began to establish trade schools. In Germany trade schools and their accompanying job apprenticeships became well-trodden routes to education that have persisted to this day.
In the 1970s and 1980s many European industries closed down schools they had operated to secure skilled workers. One reason was a changing labor market that undermined the implicit guarantee that those who went through these schools would get a life-time job in the industry that run the school. Public school obtained a near-monopoly on training for industrial jobs. In some places, schools that once were called trade schools were upgraded and called gymnasiums or lycées, the more prestigious old names names for youth schools. The demands for business and industry schools offering a number of practical subjects is thus met with tax money at no explicit costs for firms in need of trained employees. In some instances formal contracts between industries and local schools regulate their relations.
A general rule in a many-splendored society is that each societal realm is responsible for its slice of the school curriculum.
Business and industry add on the job training for their employees. Many also arrange formal hours of training with outside teachers that often call themselves "consultants." The expenses for their fees are tax-deductible for the firms.
It is remarkably difficult for school children to understand market economy. An English child's first meeting with the market may be the day he or she buys a first chocolate bar at the candy counter. The cocoa comes from Africa and has traveled hundreds of miles; the sugar comes from Central America, the wrapping paper from Scandinavia. The freighters were built in the Far East, the trucks in Europe, but running on diesel from the North Sea and on tires from France. There is no central planning agency that sees to it that the children get their candy bar without ordering it in advance. They have encountered a great power shaping modern times, the world markets, coordinated a bit by the invisible hand of Adam Smith.
The cashier in the store does not share the candy freely as do the parents, brothers and sisters of the same family. She wants to be paid, and so do those who have produced the chocolate, the sugar, the wrapping paper and the transports. And hardest of all for the children to understand is that the big market works and delivers without any parent, boss or politician who decides everything.
It is also remarkably difficult for school teachers to understand economics. Most teachers lack professional training in economics, as do most journalists, priests, bureaucrats, and politicians. They believe states must act in economic matters in the same way as households do. But in reality and in economic theory it ain't necessarily so.
If capitalism ever is removed from the surface of this earth it is not because of the intellectual superiority of socialism, but because it neglected to train new generations in its workings. Economic ignoramuses or outright enemies of the market economy train the great majorities of new generations in the capitalist world. The business realm has surrendered the teaching of the young to graduates of state teachers colleges whose political superiors are in control of the curriculum. These politicians know how to tax, spend, and regulate, in short, how politics and legislation works. Civics becomes a priority for the teachers in any state school, not how a market economy works.
Procuring Services from Other Societal Realms to the Economy
The economy is a great procurer from other societal realms. It looks to the body politic for legislation about property rights and contracts. It looks to art for assistance in advertising. It looks to science and particularly to engineering for product development. It depends heavily on education.
Education and the Growth of Wealth
A high level of education in the working population — which economists usually call “human capital” — promotes economic growth (Barro 1997) and productivity (Bishop 1991). However, not all kinds of education have the same effect on the accumulated wealth of a nation. It has often been asserted that educations in technology or natural science are more beneficial to a growth in GNP than education in other subjects. But if this were the whole truth, the Soviet Union with its many engineers would have had one of the world’s highest GNPs. Markets that function well probably are more important than the educational level for a nation’s accumulated wealth. A nation’s educational level also correlates with the development of its productivity. One might even suggest that there is a connection between the number of hours spent in doing homework in the school systems of different countries and measurements of the countries’ growth in productivity.
The educational level of an individual also has a positive correlation with his future income level. The rule of thumb is, of course, that the more education one acquires, the higher the income level. This connection is usually called the "educational bonus." In developing countries young people are often anxious to get a higher education to enjoy a bonus in living standard. This works provided their country has reached a certain level of development and has introduced a meritocracy that can override promotions by kinship criteria. If these are not in place the educated easily become revolutionaries rather than loyal and satisfied citizens.
In well developed countries the educational bonus is noticeable but not necessarily great. The 1970s the annual yield after taxes for high education was c. 12 percent in Sweden. It dropped to 1-3 percent in the early 1980s, then climbed to c. 5 percent in the 1990s. It seems as if factors other than school education must account for the large variations in the educational bonus (Lindbäck 1998, pp.47-49, 57-59). In addition to the educational bonus, the extent of piecework wages, progressive taxation, and the compression of wage differences through collective bargaining are important explanations to the wage levels.
Providing Flows of Money from the Economy to Other Parts of Society
Tax money from the economy to the body politic is the largest single transfer in any modern society. It should raise questions that one societal realm gives up between one quarter and one half of its cardinal value to another realm. If freedom shall be more than a philosophical exercise, taxes must be reasonably low — say, no more than a tenth to a fifth of any income in a household or profit in a firm — so that everyone can keep enough economic resources to practice freedom. Taxation has also another side that clashes with freedom; it is enforced by state violence. Maximum consent of the governed is required in matters of taxation to keep this violence at a minimum.
Taxation is best explained by political rather than economic processes, and we will deal with it in that context (Chapter 22).
Toward a Hegemony of the Economy
Money is, of course, a necessity in all households that no longer by themselves produce food, clothing, and shelter. Georg Simmel, in a century-old but surviving book, Philosophie des Geldes (1907), shows how use of money influences relations between persons, their way of thinking, their view of their past, their contemporary life, and their future. Simmel's lasting message is that money is more than an economic concept; it is a concept for the study of freedom, lifestyles, and philosophies of life.
What in Simmel's days were emerging tendencies have in later generations become a decisive fact: the use of economic rewards for non-economic achievements. Successes in everything from sports to war bring economic rewards. More or less regular monetary payments supplement the honorific rewards and positions that go with achievements in science, art, religion, politics, and humanitarian work. In this way the cardinal value of the economy seeps, not only into households, but into all non-economic realms and corners of society.
This is not an altogether happy development for the societal realm of the economy. People in the other realms feel that the monetary part of their rewards for scientific, artistic, religious, political, and civic accomplishments should be put in line with rewards for business achievements. When this is not possible, they attack level of salaries, bonuses, pensions, and other parts of the compensation packages that are normal in business.
Nor is it a happy state for the non-economic realms. In a planned economy this means that a very detailed political power rules over all societal realms by means of price control, political investment decisions, et cetera. In the market economy it means that market considerations rule also in science, art, polity, religion and morality. In both cases we have said good bye to a many-splendored society.
Toward a Cancerous Economy
By the end of Twentieth Century the hegemony of money in some countries resulted in a 'cancerous economy' that culminated in the financial crisis 2007-2010. The fact that the societal realm of the economy seeps into a near-dominance of other realms is a straight illustration of what we call realm hegemony. We call the hegemony cancerous only when a second element enters: an overwhelming number of all economic transactions become leveraged, i.e. based on loans, and become so in an ever higher degree. This happened most drastically in the United States, but also to a notable extent in Britain and France and some other rich countries, but much less so in Germany and Japan.
At the time of the height of banking crisis in 2007-09 U.S. consumer debt — mostly credit card loans and payday loans — stood at about $2.58 trillion, a threefold increase in a decade. This reveals that a typical US household did not pay ordinary living expenses from its current cash but by adding to loans that are paid back in later installments. It also means that firms, ranging from serious banks to predatory lenders that are engaged in household finance get a small cut from most every household purchase in the form of interests and fees. These firms securitize the money they lend to consumers just as mortgage lenders do. Any slowdown (or freeze as in 2008) in the market for these securities imperil the day-to-day cash flow of run-of-the-mill consumers.
The effects of leverage can be discussed by illustrations from the housing market:
Assume that there are two buyers to a property, one bids $100 000 of his own money, the other bids $110 000 of money he has borrowed. The latter, being the highest bidder, gets the property. There is likelihood in this community, say one or two in a hundred in good times and five to ten in bad times, that the latter's loan will default. Normally the ones holding the bag in this case would be the savers among the public (including the losing bidder who had saved $100 000). They are charged for the default through the interest gap between savings and borrowings. In severe cases, the bank's bond and share holders have to take the responsibility, and in extreme economic crises, government bailouts may be used to restore the lenders.
Question: Is it reasonable to let the bidder with borrowed money get the property, (a) from the point of view of the total economy, and (b) is it moral from the point of view of the total society?
In periods of very low interest rates, "borrowed money" has the capacity to win over "own money" in any trade. When transactions in fiat money are routinely and increasingly leveraged (loan-based) year after year, all may seem good since economic growth is seen as good. But this kind of growth is cancerous. It cannot be defended as good economy, or good morality.
With a cancer of excessive leverage, an economy has come a long way from a Gemeinschaft-type society where all money debts except the smallest ones were next to immoral. It is also a considerable distance from the original Gesellschafts in which frugality, diligence, and industry were dominant economic virtues. German Chancellor Angela Merkel represented the latter when she warned the United States in November 2008 that its efforts to cope with the banking crisis by keeping money cheap and further encouraging people's borrowing could plant “the seeds of a similar crisis in five years’ time”.
Money and Social Relations
Money thus enters all sorts of transactions and makes them open to calculation. Simmel (1907) elaborated the Marxian idea that being able to calculate everything with money inevitably depersonalizes human life and culture. It is true that the market economy opens for calculation in social intercourse. But this does not necessarily mean that social relations become weak and distorted by money. Tyler Cowen (2008), who is a professor of economics at George Mason University, a citadel of market economy, has shown that using money as incentives is unproductive in some social relations. For example, it is unnecessary to pay your daughter to do the dishes. In many other relations using money as incentive is done ineffectively. Cowen wants to help us do it in smarter ways and gives his book the title Discover your Inner Economist. This may be an insidious way to promote hegemony of the economic realm over everything else, an anathema to a many-splendored society.
Viviana Zelizer (1997) has showed something more interesting: people incorporate money into ordinary social relations without destroying the traditional meaning of these relations. This is done by keeping separate, mentally or physically, different kinds of money. Cowen does not cite her findings.
In the first place, says Zeilizer, people separate their sources of income. Big windfall incomes from a lottery or inheritance are kept separate from money in the form of regular salaries or wages or pensions. Zeilizer cites a study of Oslo prostitutes, many of whom think differently about the money they receive from health benefits or welfare subsidies, which they very carefully count and budget. By contrast, they would quite easily blow their prostitution earnings on drugs, alcohol, and clothes. In the same vane, we may see the several studies showing that the lion's share of the sizable child allowances in cash that France and Sweden regularly give families with children are not dedicated to amusements, wine, and beauty parlors. In the main, they are used to create the kind of household and living quarters that a family with children needs.
In the second place, Zelizer notes that people's uses of money in different social relations separates into different kinds. It is not only that money for small daily expenditures are separated from money for big-ticket items. Money for gifts to friends may be identified as different from money for the children. A loan to a daughter differs from a tip to a waitress or a payment to a prostitute. Needless to say a husband does not tip his wife, nor does the wife give tips to her husband.
Zeitler puts Simmel on his feet after having stood on his head: people transform money rather than being transformed by it. She does not change the fact that the flow of life in any modern society is helped by a continuous supply and flow of money and credits, but she establishes social relations rather than monetary relations as primary. This fact must be a starting point for the societal control of fiat money.
Orwell's irony applies again. Among six societal realms born free and equal — science, art, economy, religion, polity, morality — the economy has in the early Twenty-first Century made itself more equal than others. And Ferguson's "square of power" has proven inadequate to cope with control of its fiat money.
Please send your comments after reading this chapter by email to the author.
Chapter 21.
The Realm of Religion: A Search for the Sacred
Approaching Religion
Figure 21.1. Religion in Society
A Language-Based Core of Religion
From Selves to Souls
Separating the Domains of the Dead from the Domains of the Living
Sanctification of the Dead
Sanctification of the Living
Death as Deviance
The Emergence of Gods
A Note on Contentious Atheism
Sacredness and Profanity
Figure 21.2. Semiotics of Sacredness
Religious Pretense
Religious Doubts
Paradise
On the Early Replacement of Christianity with Islam
Spontaneous Order in Religion
Religious Rationality
Impact on Religions from Changes in the Pristine Order
Debunking Magic in Religion
Religious Freedom
Providing Education about Religion in Schools
Attempts at Hegemony by the Societal Realm of Religion
Respect for Religions
Impacts of Religion on Secular Society
A Coda on Economy and Religion
This chapter has not been edited
Approaching Religion
The practitioners of the common lifestyles that we call The Believers want to walk through life in touch with a virtual reality of heavenly lights and messages. They have a lifestyle concerned with sacred words and rituals. With an eye on the sacred, they develop their courage to face ultimate issues such as the existence of suffering and death, and the final evaluation of a person’s life. They usually have cults to cope with the memories of the dead. They are found not only around traditional centers of worship, but also among the followers of new belief systems that have gained ground in secularized parts of the world. They are attracted to the realm of religion.
Defining Religion
Religion is important to the student of society. Contemporary Sinic (Chinese), and Japanese civilizations may perhaps be defined without reference to their religions -- but not without reference to morality. Otherwise, religions seem necessary when we define existing civilizations. We have Hindu, Islamic and Buddhist civilizations. Within Christianity, the largest religion in the world, we distinguish between Slavic Orthodox, Latin Catholic, and Anglo-Protestant civilizations.
The developed religions rest on the same basic structure as other societal realms, but the content of the realm of religion differs from that of the economy, polity, science, and art. Religions have organizations (churches), networks (sects), and media (scriptures and pulpits). They have Makers, i.e., prophets who create the faiths; Keepers, i.e., high priests who preserve the faith; Brokers, i.e., preachers who bring it to the masses; and Takers, believers who identify with the faith. Religions, like other societal realms, also have Providers, i.g., missionaries and teachers of the faith to outsiders and youngsters, and they have Procurers who get privileges, money, etc to aid religious pursuits. (See Figure 21.1). Religion as a societal realm is different from morality (Figure 23.1), a difficult fact for many to grasp.
Figure 21.1. Religion in Society
5.
Societal Structures
Societal Functions
Organi-
Network
Media
inside realms
between realms
zations
with
with
Create
Preserve
Disperse
Receive
Export
Import values
with
Parti-
Audi-
the cardinal value of sacredness
Members
cipants
ences
Maker
Keeper
Broker
Taker
Provider
Procurer
B
Symboltype
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
Emotive
Synago-gues
Churches
Chapels
Con- grega- tions
Temples
Cloisters
Mosques
Sects
Brother-hoods of faiths
Sacred texts
Rites
Cults
Prophets
Authors of divine will
Priests
Monks
Nuns
Preach- ers
Missio-naries
Believers
Seekers
Chap- lains
evaluations
Persons and organi- zations on the outlook to other realms for some-thing bene-ficial e.g. donations and priviliges.
A
Realm
RELIGION
C
Lifestyle:
Believers
D
CardinalValue
Sacredness
E
Stratification:
Piety
F
RewardSystem:
Reverence
G
Rationality:
Salvation rituals
H
Type of Freedom:
Religious freedom
I
Spontaneous Order
Non-ritual prayers
The letters marking the rows are those found in a summary of the various language-products in society called Table of Societal Realms in Chapter 9. The letters after "I" continue as columns to make space in the center for some illustrative examples.
The English anthropologist Edward Evans-Pritchard has this to say about the scientific study of religion as a social phenomenon:
I do not deny that peoples have reasons for their beliefs — that they are rational; I do not deny that religious rites may be accompanied by emotional experiences, that feeling may even be an important element in their performance; and I certainly do not deny that religious ideas and practices are directly associated with social groups – that religion, whatever else it may be, is a social phenomenon. What I do deny is that it is explained by any of these facts, or all of them together, and I hold that it is not sound scientific method to seek for origins, especially when they cannot be found. Science deals with relations, not with origins and essences. (1965 p. ??)
The main part of this statement is unproblematic. Religious life, as mentioned, is a part of social life and fits all the categories and regularities of our scheme for analyzing societal realms (Figure 21.1). If we go beyond the primitive religions that were Evans-Pritchard's topic, we find the structures of organizations, media, and networks. We find the same roles of Makers, Keepers, Purveyors, and Takers that occupy other parts of social life. And the rational pursuit of the sacred can be studied as readily as the rational pursuit of any cardinal value, be it wealth, power, knowledge, beauty, or virtue. Nor is it impossible to study such pursuits with the methods and theories of social science.
The last sentence in the credo of Evans-Pritchard, however, is unwarranted. It certainly belongs to science to study origins and in some sense also essences. The origin of religion is found in the language instinct. Religion grows out of what we found to be one of the six fundamental components of language, to be exact, the one we have called emotive evaluations. Among other things, a religion evaluates the miserable fact that death is inevitable and that there are moments of suffering as well as moments of joy on the road to death. The core of many religions consists of words that help us, not only to live, but to die.
A well-known definition of religion by American anthropologist Clifford Greetz states:
Without further ado, then, a religion is: (1) a system of symbols which acts to (2) establish powerful, pervasive, and long-lasting moods and motivations in men by (3) formulating conceptions of a general order of existence and (4) clothing these conceptions with such an aura of factuality that (5) the moods and motivations seem uniquely realistic (Greetz 1973, p. 90).
Let us reformulate this in our terminology. Religion is a system of emotive evaluative symbols about human existence. This system establishes powerful, pervasive, and long-lasting motivations in men to follow a particular prescriptive order that is clothed in descriptions with an aura of factuality that make the motivations uniquely effective.
Religions are not something that always has been there. They do not appear until beings have developed a language brain. Only language makes it possible to talk about death, that of others and your own, to handle our identity (soul) after our death, and develop collective insights about death. Religion is a language-product that can express the ultimate evaluation of a life, i.e. what people often call the meaning of life. It goes without saying that such an evaluation gets an emotive charge, often a strong one. Not all emotive evaluations are religious, but some very noticeable once are.
We note that Greetz's definition depicts religion in a stage of "realm hegemony," i.e. a religion that expropriates the societal realm of morality and part of the realm of knowledge. This particular variety of religious hegemony stands in the way for a many-splendored society, and it impedes the development of science and morality. This religious hegemony may be an empirical fact during many periods of human history, but we have no reason to let such hegemony define religion as Greetz does. We might even do religion a lasting service by sticking to its core as a societal realm of its own.
A Language-Based Core of Religion
The existence of religions and their forces is less of a mystery than most people think. Organized society inhabited by individuals is a language product. Personal and collective identities are language products. Religion is a special language product that comes into being because all language-using beings are mortal. Religion as a special language product that bridges generations, not only the gap between birth and death, but more uniquely, the gap between death and birth.
From Selves to Souls
A considerable understanding of religion can be obtained by basing our reasoning on the review of Vocabularies of Identities (Chapter 13 in Book 3). If you have not done so, please read that chapter before proceeding with this one.
A self is grounded in the language of identity and expressed in "I am"- and "we are"-sentences. The Theorem of the Looking-glass Self and The Theorem of the Authentic Self dealt with this. Other persons sharing our symbolic environment have little difficulty in recognizing and remembering the sentences that define us, "our selves." Such sentences are remembered also when a person has died. A self, as it is remembered by survivors, is the linguistic base of what is called the 'soul' (or spirit) of the deceased. In this sense, soul is an acceptable concept in social science.
The soul is set apart from the self of ordinary living; this is the beginning of a separation between the sacred and the profane. At this point in the development of religion, the sacred may be considered either beneficial or detrimental or neutral to the earthlings.
Separating the Domains of the Dead from the Domains of the Living
The dominions of the living identities (selves) and deceased identities (souls) are separate in all religions. However, the belief is common that they may interact more or less actively. The pathway between the two could be a deep cave that the believers decorate with painted images. Or, it could be a road into the high mountains, a trip starting down the Nile, ascension to a heaven beyond the clouds. In ancient Greek religions the separation was the river Acheron — not Styx as Virgil mistakenly had it — to the realm of the god Hades, king of the dead. The dead had to pay the ferryman Chardon to get quickly over the river; some Greeks arranged to be buried with a coin between their lips for the passage so they did not have to wait wandering along the Acheron. In the Greek view, the crossing to the underworld was final; there were no return trips. However, about Orpheus and a few others we are told that they visited Hades while alive and returned living.
An image of the beliefs about body and soul and about life and death in medieval Europe is given by El Greco to the largely illiterate population of Toledo. El Greco, born on Crete, trained as a painter in Venice, made Spanish Toledo his home town in 1570. There he learned about a great benefactor to the city, a Count of Orgaz, who had lived 200 years earlier. The Count's memory and good deeds were kept and embroidered by the citizens of the city.
El
Greco joined his new compatriots in honoring Orgaz by a magnificent painting in
Santa Tomé Church. It shows the funeral of the benefactor.
El Greco was a man of the renaissance. This painting is set 200 years earlier and captures a virtual reality common in the High Middle ages. The row of awe-stricken burgers in the painting divides heaven from earth. The Count’s body is lowered into a dark grave. Even the officiating priests are awed and astonished when two saints in golden robes, St. Augustine and St. Stephan, appear to carry the deceased to a bright heaven. There he is met by Saint Peter with his keys and by other saints who had gone before him. In this part of Paradise his soul would on Last Day join his resurrected body.
Christianity triumphed over Hellenic and Germanic religions for many reasons; one was its conviction that there is a coming resurrection of the dead. More on this in a moment.
Sanctification of the Dead
The big drum beats and the loud firecrackers at the Chinese New Year are echoes of old ways of driving evil spirits away. Shamanistic religions accept that some dead are resentful, and thus their souls should be treated as evil. This archaic tradition remains in many parts of the world and is particularly strong in Siberia and on the Korean peninsula. In modern South Korea this religious tradition is probably stronger than both Confucianism and Christianity. A priest with magical abilities is called mudang by the Koreans. They are mostly women. They are believed to have contacts with the world of spirits. They can solve problems of health and fertility. We know from part (c) of "Socially Induced Compliance" (Proposition 15:7) that socially induced compliance implies that deviants are downgraded.
| (a) The more favorable evaluations a person receives
in an encounter, the more he his likely to conform to the prescriptions
in the encounter. (b) When a person in an encounter deviates from its customary prescriptions (norms) the others in the encounter tend to articulate the prescription. (c) The more persons comply with the prescriptions in an encounter, the more favorable evaluations they tend to receive from others in the encounter, and the less they comply the more unfavorable evaluations they tend to receive. (d) A member of an encounter that violates norms and thereby hurts other members is met by an expectation (a new norm) that requires him to compensate the victims in proportion to the damage he has caused. (e) The compensation shall be given not only to the victims but also to the victims' significant encounters that have been affected by the violation (restorative justice). |
Some souls — with an earthly biography that includes incidences of deviance categorized as "evil" — may not have realized or acknowledged that they are dead, and they remain in this world. This means that they may bring ill health and economic disasters to the surviving family members. The mundags are supposed to help the souls of the dead on earth to move to a divine world of souls. They exercise authority over the deviant souls according to clauses (c),(d) and (e) in our Proposition, and they can force them to stop the misdeeds and to deliver compensation to the living for the damage done by errant souls.
Adding Souls to Living Persons
The formula "from self to soul" can also be read backwards. When a person dies and his or her vital breath has left the body, some religions remember this identity as a phantom image, perceptible but untouchable. In others it becomes a true soul, separate from the body, but serving as the carrier of a personality. To the latter, a logical step in the transformation of the language of identities, is the belief that also the livings have souls. Freud, however, did not like the religious ring of soul (Seele in his language), and used the Greek term "psyche." Linguistically speaking, souls or psyches are sentences defining identities that are, or once were, living personalities. The believers are free to add some divine attributes that we social scientists ignore. The soul, as we have defined it in our secular linguistic terms, however, is impressive in itself. It may almost have eternal life since it can persist as long as a language persists.
The preservation of the self, we recall, is the key to social motivation. We have concluded in "The Identity Maintenance" (Proposition 15:1) that people do all sorts of things to maintain their individual and collective identities. This motivation also applies to the extended identify after death. Some people have mummified or embalmed the bodies of the deceased, but the main effort of mankind has been to maintain and save souls, a process that requires less technological and more symbolic activities.
TECH It happened in Sweden in 2005 that a man ordered that a "www.hisname.se" should be put on his tomb stone. With the recent advent of digital memories and web sites of enormous capacities, the surviving identities of a common man may meet more than an ordinary grave. They may not retain the richness of detail of his life on earth that was given to a Egyptian pharaoh in his pyramid chambers. Nor would they resemble the grave to end all graves, the mausoleum of Chinese Emperor Qin, who died in 210 BC and was buried with a nearby garrison of life-sized terracotta army soldiers with horses and weapons prepared to serve him in the afterlife.
But the digital memory of the living in our century may rival the memory of a burgher in the necropolis of the city Cyprus, a place so remarkable that old and new visitors mistakenly call it "tombs of kings." Since digitalized memories can be copied without error into the media of future generations, souls can nowadays be given a very long life. I predict that something like a sacral YouTube will be the cemeteries of the future. They may also contain copies of the genome of the deceased. The human genome is the DNA blueprint unique to each individual, a 6-billion-letter code that contains the directions for making all the proteins in the body: blood, brain, muscle, and bone. The code is written in combinations of four chemicals known by the abbreviations A, C, G and T. With that preserved, a dream of resurrection will also be at hand.
All in all, in all times, decedents should be free to celebrate and honor their ancestors according to their traditions or choices, or according to any new practices that virtual technologies may provide. In a many-splendored society, however, they cannot use such celebrations and ceremonies for political purposes, for religion and polity are there separate societal realms. Priestly proficiencies are not the same as the political skills needed to run a body politic, and political abilities are different from the qualities required to lead religious congregations.
Men uphold the social order that upholds them as individuals. Our Proposition on "Maintenance of the Evaluative Order" is highly relevant when extended to souls. It shows how we maintain those social structures that maintain the scales that give us our favorable self-evaluations. One consequence of this is that people will defend and fight for their religion. Inclusion and exclusion mechanisms abound in religious history. Members of a society have an evident motivation to keep their religion intact even when some of them migrate, like Jews driven into Diaspora, or the members of different Christian congregations populating America. Religion, along with some ethnic food, is the last immigrants give up from the old country.
The fact that strong forces are let loose by any religion and put the believers into a defensive position is something that both believers and non-believers must reckon with. Some of these forces give rise to religious wars, but the main effort is the enormous amount of human design that goes into the saving of souls.
Sanctification of the Living
When a person has both a self and a soul (in some religion more than one soul) the sacred domain is no longer confined to the dead and their dwellings. Sacredness, the cardinal value of religion, now emerges and becomes a property of the living to hold, develop and defend.
We know from the Proposition on "The Development of Selves," cited above, that selves, the notions of ourselves that we present to others, can be defined by others (the looking glass-self) or edited by the holder (the authentic self). Likewise, souls can be shaped by the living bearer and also edited by his or her survivors. With appreciative editing some souls can in this way become more sacred and turned into saints or 'angels.' Angel, defined this way, is not merely a concept in Sunday School, but in social science, a linguistic product subject to empirical study, like many other religious terms.
Death as Deviance
A deceased is a deviant from the norms of the living. Upon death a person can no longer perform the usual tasks of being a mother, a father, a brother, a sister, or any other roles, including slave or king.
Deviance has consequences. We know from the Proposition "Socially Induced Compliance" (clause b, cited above) that the relevant norms tend to become articulated whenever deviance is discovered. So also at funerals. For example, at a speech at the funeral of a teacher you may hear that she gave the joy of learning to her pupils, took time to listen to and help them, and that she kept up with the new knowledge in her fields of teaching, etc. All these remembrances are articulations of role expectations that society puts on a teacher. (Cf. Durkheim 1912, chapter 5.)
The Emergence of Gods
Another consequence of deviance is that the deviant becomes socially disgraced or humiliated. (This was formalized in the second part of the Proposition on "Socially Induced Compliance," (clause c, second half, cited above ). Any socially induced compliance implies that deviants are downgraded. At death a person can no longer perform normal duties. We know from our study of conformity that a deviant can avoid the sanctions induced by society when deviance is discovered by providing an excuse. Also the dead, and the souls of the dead, need excuses for leaving their positions and social roles. The most common of excuses are, as we noted, appeals to a higher norm. When a senior superior calls, you are excused from ordinary duties. The excuse is a very useful part of the language habits that rule social life.
The superiors who are needed to excuse the dying from their ordinary duties can be elaborated and named. They are the 'gods.' The belief in religious gods is much more than the belief in the souls of shamanism. But the source is the same: a human society in which identity and social control depend on language. We recall the conclusion from our discussion on Etic Conceptions of Impelling Vocabularies in Chapter 17: "the Gods are emic names given to our impelling vocabularies, writ large." The strength attributed to a God is actually the overwhelming impelling vocabularies of a human society, *or of one or more of the societal realms or other life areas in the society.
In a primordial society without differentiation into langue-based societal realms, the gods would be those of pre-language brains, i.e. gods of the hunt, harvest, wine, female fertility, and territorial wars. A god could also be specific to a clan or tribe. A god may have many diverse epithets. For example, the Homeric god of Hermes was the god of shepherds, travelers, athletes, poets, thieves and he settles as a protector of commerce and weights and measures.
The societal realms have different cardinal values. Then, each realm can with some justification let a god specialize in its cardinal value. Although the Roman versions of the Greek gods retained many diverse epithets, we get a Minerva (Pallas Athena) ruling over philosophy and wisdom (science), a Mercury (Hermes) ruling over trade and commerce (economy), a Jupiter (Zeus) ruling over law and order (the body politic), an Apollo (same name in Greek) for music and the four muses (art). The congenial religion in a many-splendored society has several gods.
Monotheism is the natural pattern only in a society in which one realm has acquired hegemony and dominates the others. Constantine replaced the Greek and Roman pantheon of gods with the Christian God. One reason was the actual success of Christianity among his subjects. Another reason was that he saw himself as an omnipotent emperor of all realms in the empire, and as such he found that monotheism streamlined his authority as such an emperor.
The same god may assume several shapes. For example, Dionysus appeared in different shapes until he finally collapsed under an attack by Titans. The Council of Nicaea in 350 AD proclaimed and confirmed a very special situation for the Christian God with three united selves: Father, Son and Holy Ghost. But multiple selves were not for ordinary Christian people. By contrast, notions of multiple selves and multiple souls are widely accepted in Eastern Asia and its religions. The idea that one of them may leave the body and take residence elsewhere is common. A great divide between world religions goes between Judaism, Christendom, and Islam on one hand, and Hinduism, Buddhism and other Asian religions, on the other. Their differences relate, among other things, to the multiplicity, freedom, and mobility of souls.
The gods call the dying to leave this world, and this is a very good excuse not to degrade the dying for poor or nil performance. Instead we thank them and take a solemn goodbye in a funeral ritual. If the impulse to downgrade a dead person still lingers on, it is contradicted by another strong social norm: "Nothing But Good of the Dead!"
In practically all religious thinking, the gods or goddesses are thought to be immortal. As immortals, they never have to concern themselves with loss of identity, nor of any deviances caused by their deaths. Gods are powerful; they may help or harm or ignore mortals. They may be seen as creatures of vanity in the sense that they want to be admired, adored, and worshiped. Above all, as Bo Anderson (2008) suggests in a private communication, gods are set apart, different in kind than us, on the one hand, and more sacred (holier) than us on the other.
In most religions the gods help or harm you in this world, not (or not only) in any coming one. If you build a big temple for gods or goddesses, give them many and big offerings, and assign many holidays to their honor, then, you can expect to get a commensurate amount of service from the gods. The more you pray the better your life on earth will be. If you ignore or curse the gods they may harm you.
The Greek gods of Homer used such straight trade-offs with mortals. They also added some mischief and practical jokes both amongst themselves and in dealing with mortals. In no way did Greek religion ask that you live a virtuous life; morality was something separate from religion, as is the case in any many-splendored society. Ancient Greek and Roman religion did not engage in what we call hegemony of realms. By contrast the Jewish and Christian religions strive to incorporate and integrate morality under their umbrellas. Then God may reward in the next world for good deeds performed in this world.
Jews and Christians have difficulties to understand the purity of ancient Greek religion. They usually call it "Greek mythology," instead of Greek religion.
A Note on Contentious Atheism
John Lennon, in a song, asked us to imagine a world without religion. He apparently thought it might be a better world. But not necessarily. A world without religion would be a world that is not dependent on language for its organization and thus has no language to form individual and collective identities — or songs. Alternatively, a world without religion would be a world of immortals who never have to worry about losing identity, organization, and everything else that language has brought them as essential for the survival of a society. The latter world does not exist, at least not at the present stage of evolution.
To stamp out religion, as some atheists want, is a pursuit that bumps its heads against the knowledge of social science, specifically the language-based core of religion that we have reviewed. As a social science theorist, I must conclude that a society cannot exist for long without encountering the processes that develop religions. Such processes may have varying paraphernalia, but they all start with a language of maintaining selves, turning selves into souls at or prior to death, and continue with a religious language and practices to maintain these souls.
Critics of religion would have a more workable and constructive agenda if their mission is redefined as the debunking of magical elements in religion, not religion itself.
Sacredness and Profanity
Once coping with deaths has given birth to gods, they may become significant others for the living. The significant others, we recall, are the holders of the scales by means of which people are or want to be measured. In the first place we live to please our particular significant others — be they parents, teachers, leaders, or idols from history or philosophy. When gods become mankind's significant others, mankind worships them. Those who select (or are given) Buddha, Jesus, or Muhammad as their significant other can look for guidance at turns in life from the messages left by them. They walk through a life that adds sacredness to individuals and communities.
There can be doubts and cheating in any life guided by significant others. Let us clarify the concept of sacredness by a semiotic square (Figure 21.2) so we can investigate practical problems and deviations of religious life.
Figure 21.2. Semiotics of Sacredness

The opposite of sacredness is profanity. This opposition has one leg of similarity with the general distinction between mundane and pristine symbols that we have discussed in Chapter 3. Our distinction between profane and sacred is restricted to the realm of religion. Sacredness, the cardinal value in the realm of religion, is not necessarily expressed in pristine symbols. Its symbols, however, set sacredness apart and give it engaging emotive qualities. It feels otherworldly, and is expressed in a symbolism of souls and holy icons. Profanity, by contrast, is expressed in mundane symbols, carnal and materialistic, the symbols of everyday living outside of and perhaps adverse to sanctuaries, temples, rites, contemplations, and prayers.
In Judaism sacredness is achieved by loving God and following the Mosaic Laws. In Christianity sacredness is a gift of God to the believers through the sacrificial death of Jesus. In Islam the steps to sacredness include prayer and the reciting of words by Allah in the Qur'an (Qur'an is Arabic for recitation). In Buddhism the ultimate sacredness, "crossing over", is reached in Nirvana, a blissful, spiritual state of nothingness when you become a Buddha. A variety of different routines in religions may support the expansion of sacredness: fasting, sacrifices, sacraments, alms giving, incense-offerings, icons, pilgrimages, hermitages, et cetera.
The search and accumulation of the cardinal value of religion moves humans and their communities from profanity to sacredness. The basic paradigm is one of progression in achieving sacredness, that is, a process similar to achieving other cardinal values such as knowledge, beauty, wealth, and order. In the Protestant tradition, John Bunyan immensely popular book The Pilgrim's Progress from 1678 follows this paradigm. It is said to be the most widely read book in English except for the Bible; it has never been out of print and has been widely translated.
John Bunyan, however, in a typical Christian way, mixes up the road from profanity to sacredness, with the road from vice to virtue. As a social scientist I want to maintain that the road of sacredness in the realm of religion should be kept analytically separate from the road from vice to virtue in the realm of morality. They consist of different linguistic molecules.
The Christian religion holds that Christ's sufferings on the cross wipe clean the believer's accumulated sins. This is a redemption process. Such a process, as we have seen, is not magic; it is a most remarkable process among our several impelling vocabularies in encounters. Redemption practices are possible as soon as a language-based morality or polity is at hand. In other word, it is a way of dealing with prescriptions and coping with our inability to obey them all. Priests, however, have no monopoly on redemption; such courses of action can be handled by dramatists, editors of modern mass media, constructors of commercial games, producers of TV programs, and by many others. In the theory of the many-splendored society, redemption, strictly speaking, is mostly treated as a part of the societal realm of morality, not religion.
Christianity makes the redemption process profoundly religious and magical in its belief that the victim is the Son of God. Jesus himself preferred to call himself the Son of Man. But when the time came when he saw his victimage as inevitable he answered "It is as you say" in his trial at the Sanhedrin, the council of the Jewish priesthood, on a direct question whether he was the son of God (according to Matthew 26:63-64).
Religious Pretense
Religious Pretense is apparent when symbols of sacredness are used insincerely or faked altogether. Here we end up on the right side of the semiotic square of sacredness among those who pretend to seek it. Judaism and Christianity take religious hypocrisy very seriously; their God reads hearts. In Greek and Roman religion there are instances when men can cheat also their gods with pretense. In general, it is helpful to distinguish situations in which religious pretenders cheat their fellowmen and situations in which they cheat their gods.
Religious Doubts
Religious language may be colored by honest bouts of doubts. The church father's confession: "I believe. Help my unbelief” is a case in point. We are on the left side of the semiotic square, marked as Religious Doubts. Buddhism and Christianity accept doubt as a normal and recurrent state of the religious mind. Thomas remains Christ's disciple also in his doubting period. Islam has a more rigid view; the doubter is treated as a traitor and infidel, perhaps worse than the infidels who never had a chance to know new better.
Paradise
The idea of a paradise, a Garden of Eden, at the beginning of time is a powerful image in the opening chapters of the Hebrew Bible. The early Christians thought that the end of the world comes in a very near future. The dead would then be resurrected, and the faithful among them go on to live in a new Paradise.
What was Paradise like to the early Christians? Saint Mor Ephrem, the Syrian (ca. 303-373), wrote a famous hymn cycle "On Paradise." Unlike other Fathers of the Christian Church he did not know Greek or Latin, and he wrote in his native tongue, Syriac. His work has stayed alive in the Syrian Orthodox Church. Early translations into Greek gave him the posthumous honor of being a doctor of the Church. In 1990 a very accessible English edition of "On Paradise" appeared in a commented translation by Sebastian Brock. Apparently the Syriac language cannot as easily as Greek develop pristine concepts suitable for religious dogmas; it is more based on what we have called Median symbols than Saussurian ones. Ephrem's vision of Paradise is full of poetic everyday images, approaching the divine as something hinted at by ordinary neighbors looking into a garden from various angles rather than as a fossilized theological concept.
Ephrem's Paradise (like the original Jewish one and the later Dante's) is a mountain. It is bounded and has three circuits, one where resurrected bodies wait to be united with their souls, who in turn wait in the second circuit, and then taken to live forever in God's top circuit. The paraphernalia are the Fence guarded by the Sword, and Robes of Glory — no nakedness here! A Tree of Knowledge stands at the first entrance and a Tree of Life at the second entrance.
In Paradise bodies become rejuvenated and lovely. Ephrem is wonderfully concrete: they do not have to eat; the old ways are gone in which "all we eat the body eventually expels / in a form that disgusts us" (Hymn 9:23). Instead food comes as a delicious breeze that is inhaled; wonderfully concrete imagery.
Most important, in Paradise people live in harmony:
No blemish is in them,
for they are without wickedness;
no anger is in them,
for they have no fiery temper;
no mocking scorn is in them,
for they are without guile.
They do not race to do harm —
and so themselves be harmed;
they show no hatred there,
for there they are without envy;
they pronounce no judgment there,
for there no oppression exists.(Hymn 7:11)
A vision of harmony of this kind recurs in many modern utopias. It has simply wandered from the realm of religion to the realm of politics, from heaven to earth, from the afterlife to this life.
Ephrem's songs were translated also into Aramic Syriac, and became known to Muhammad. It is instructive to compare the Arabic edition of Paradise found in the Qur'an with Ephrem's song cycle. The geography may be roughly the same, the resulting harmony is the same. The Muslims, however, are taught that Paradise opened to the faithful, not at a future end of the world, but immediately after a person's death. Ephrem is specific about a bodily function in Paradise such as hunger. The Qur'an is specific about sex.
Without further ado a Muslim man in Paradise could meet its virgins, the houri. They are dark-eyed maidens with round and upturned breasts and appreciative vaginas. On earth they might have been good Muslim wives who knew the practice of love. In the luxurious hereafter, Allah had made them young virgins again, ready to meet dead devout Muslim men. These men could be their earthly husbands, or more often men who had served in battles for the faith.
The legend of the houri has been reviewed, often in a mocking tone, in the West in the wake of Islamic suicide bombers. Few, if any, of the recent commentators on these sexual fantasies and their motivational force in men seem to know that they are an addition to a version of Paradise by a Christian Doctor of the Church, a fact noted by Andræ (1944), perhaps earlier by other scholars. Their respective paradisiacal versions reveal differences. Ephrem abhors sex and celebrates virgins. The Qur'an imposes a sexual morality that violates the dignity of women, a flagrant violation of women's equality and human dignity, both in this world and the one hereafter. Women are presented as men's sex toys without the right to say No to their husbands in this life. The houris cannot say No to men who arrive in Paradise. Seventy-one of them flock to serve every arriving martyr.
Is this wet dream of the Prophet really authentic? Not necessarily. Some passages in The Qur'an are more easily understood with a Syriac-Aramaic lexicon than with an Arabic one (Luxenberg 2000). The "71 houris" are in Aramic Syriac simply "71 grapes." Mohammad, born in a trading community and first married to a widow of a Mecca tradesman, had probably himself dealt with tradesmen who spoke Aramaic Syriac, a lingua franca of the region.
On the Early Replacement of Christianity with Islam
During its first centuries in our chronology there was a vast expansion of Christianity. Many circumstances contributed to the numerous conversions to the new religion (XX 19??). Its idea of a bodily resurrection in a Paradise at the end of time attained a vast appeal in the Hellenic world. Life as a path to Paradise was much more appealing than life as a path to the shadows of Hades. Christianity spread rapidly through the Middle East, North Africa, and Europe, replacing other religions. Its vision of Paradise created the "long-lasting moods and motivations in men" that Greetz sees as a defining element in a religion. And its adoption by the Roman empires as a state religion added to its success.
Soon, however, the Muslim version of Paradise became even more appealing than the Christian one, at least to males. It promised not only the pleasures of a new wardrobe, a delicious virtual cuisine, and a resting bed in the clouds touching the slopes of Paradise, but also the immediate pleasures of sex. The Muslim warriors defeated the Christians in the Greater Middle East and North Africa. In Europe they made inroads into Spain and the Balkans. They also reached India. We may note in passing that after some centuries there, the princess and princesses of Arab decent began to understand and copy the artistic and sensual life of their Indian counterparts, as described in Kamasutra. For a period, a truly sensate and sexual culture was part and parcel of a Muslim elite in India, proving that the sexual teachings of mainstream Islam is not alone and invincible. In the later colonial phase of the Indian subcontinent, evangelists from England tried to bring both Hindu and Muslim camps into a puritanical fold, not only by conversions to Christianity, but perhaps mainly by persuading the colonial power to support sexually puritan streaks endemic in both Hindu and Muslim religions.
Behind Muslim successes in replacing Christianity in the Greater Middle East and North Africa there were several secular factors, some local and temporal, but the pornographic version and vision of the Qur'an's Paradise provided the Muslim side with the world's most effective religious reward system. It actually took a long while for European Christian powers to realize that they were not confronted by some barbarian tribes from southeast but by a rival world religion and civilization.
In the main, however, I would credit the different organization of the societal realm of religion by Christianity and Islam as the main explanation to the success of the latter. Recall our Proposition 7:7 "The Rule of Realm Expansion" that points at consequences of different balances between the volumes of organizations and volumes of networks in societal realms. A cardinal value and its societal realm extend its reach primarily when its networks dominate over organizations, and it consolidates and defends its reach when organizations dominate over its networks. Consider the difference between the Christian and Muslim world at the time of the great Muslim victories in the eighth of the Christian centuries.
Christian world religion was modeled on the Roman Empire, a centralized organization in the true meaning of that word. As the empire split into a Western and an Eastern part so did Christianity, one part headed by a Pope in Rome and the other by a Patriarch in Constantinople, each with a hierarchy of bishops and priests spread over its territories. By contrast, Muslim world religion was modeled on local caliphates. Local imams with their mosques and congregations did not report to any central religious authority. They formed a network with common focus on Mecca and the Qur'an. Like in Christianity with its split between Roman Catholics and Greek Orthodox branches there was an early split between Sunni and Shi'a Muslims. The latter split had little or nothing to do with religion. The Prophet who also was the political leader and military commander had left no son. A conflict erupted about political succession between Mohammed's in-laws (Shi'as) and rival Arab clans (Sunnis). Sunnis took Bagdad and its empire from the Christians, Shi'as took the Christian North Africa including the important Egypt and its possessions.
Bureaucratic infightings and the long chains of command within both the Roman Catholic and the East Orthodox Churches as well as in the kingdoms supporting them made the Christian side slow to respond. It actually took centuries before the Christians organized counteroffensives in the form of the Crusades. In the meantime Christianity had been the victim of the long array of local — and to the Christian leadership mostly unpredictable — military actions by decentralized Muslim units. Eventually most of the conquered territories were put under the sway of Saladin, a Sunni hero, who was Sultan of Egypt and Syria. He also led the opposition to the Third Crusade, and recaptured Jerusalem from the major Christian counter offensive. Sunni was hence the mainstream of the Prophet's religion. And all the lands between India and Spain were no longer ruled by Christians.
Spontaneous Order in Religion
As we have noted, spontaneous orders grow in networks, but they may be institutionalized in organizations and their contents then enjoy a long life. The Virgin Mary provided a spontaneous order in the Middle Ages. In A Distant Mirror, Barbara Tuchman vividly describes the universal access that Mary provided in the fourteenth century for anyone in any circumstance. In daily life the Church was comforter, protector, and physician. You could join in its cults and services and pray to God with the words of you priest. But there was also a channel accessible for all outside all rules of the books:
The Virgin and patron saints gave succor in trouble and protection against the evils and enemies that lurked along every man’s path….Above all, the Virgin was the ever-merciful, ever-dependable source of comfort, full of compassion for human frailty, caring nothing for laws and judges, ready to respond to anyone in trouble; amid all the inequities, injuries, and senseless harms, the one never-failing figure. She frees the prisoner from his dungeon, revives the starving with milk from her own breasts….A hardened murderer has no less access. No matter what crime a person has committed, though every man’s hand be against him, he is still not cut off from the Virgin. (Tuchman 1978, p. ??)
Outside the hierarchies of the church, prayers to the Virgin or to your patron saint form an order of petitions, thanksgivings and worship, open to every Catholic. A prayer such as “Délivre-nous de la rage des Normans” (For the rage of the Northmen save us, O Lord) probably developed as spontaneous appeals by scared individuals in the wake of invasions of French territories by brutes from the north; later they became ritualized in church services.
Religious Rationality
Some separation between the mundane and the pristine, as introduced in Chapter 3, has taken place in all known civilizations. Pristine orders could emphasize various visions. The wisdom of philosopher-kings, cosmic harmony, the regular order of sun and moon, the golden rule, the struggle of the Gods in a Valhalla or a Pantheon, the will of an Almighty God are some examples.
The symbols in religion have emotive qualities and they may also have more or less of a pristine flavor. But they are not always sufficiently pristine for intellectuals. Plato scorned the Athenian gods of his time for their deceptive habits; occasionally they actually behaved like drunkards, hooligans, and rapists. They were not pristine enough to serve as ideals or significant others.
Generally speaking, religiosity in the Western tradition is based on a theme clearly expressed by the Israeli prophets of acting in the world without being of the world. Thus religiosity required man to work diligently also in mundane pursuits, and sometimes even to rework and reform the everyday world.
In the East, not only the Buddhism, but both the older Zoroastrian dualism and the traditional Indian doctrine of karma, allowed the religious intellectual to flee from everyday, mundane pursuit into a life of contemplation. Here the religious intellectual did not have to reform the world. Nor was he bound to perform magical rites for his fellowman, although some of them apparently did. His main relation to the mundane world was to make sure that he got material support.
Impact on Religions from Changes in the Pristine Order
On the societal level, the tension between the pristine and mundane may be resolved by isolating the pristine into sects, monasteries, temples and similar institutions. Or, it may be let loose in the society at large as fundamentalist movements with utopian and sometimes revolutionary ideologies.
Buddhism started as a sect within the world of Hinduisms. Hinduisms have a pristine vision of hierarchical castes and of rituals for their members to achieve purification in successive transmigrations. This edifice was rejected and reformulated by the teachings of Gautama Buddha. His pristine vision expressed man's union with all life, including its sufferings, as a single whole. And, as we know, Buddhism grew into a world religion. By the year 1100 AD practically all Sanskrit texts on Buddhism were translated into Chinese. In China, Buddhism became an antidote to the strict pristine and hierarchal order of Confucianism, thus repeating the humanizing and equalizing mission it had first performed on the Indian subcontinent.
Christianity originated as a sect within Judaism, the Congregation in Jerusalem whose faith survived the execution of Jesus. The Congregation celebrated their memory of Jesus' teachings, and elaborated on what they believed were his miracles and his Resurrection. Saint Paul, in his early career as upholder of the laws of Judaism, had belonged to a group who persecuted the Jerusalem Congregation as well as other deviants from Judaism, for example, Hellenized Jews. After his conversion he rejected the Mosaic dietary laws and circumcision practice, relying on God's grace for his salvation rather than on any personal sacrifices or rituals.
Paul apparently did not mind if Jewish-born Christians continued to follow Mosaic instructions, but he was adamant that the many other converts should not be trapped by them. He embraced both Jesus, whom he called Christ, the Greek word for "Messiah" — both words mean "the anointed" — and also all the people of the Hellenized world, Jews and Gentiles alike. Perhaps he never could establish particularly good terms with the original Congregation in Jerusalem. But he reformulated their vision of the sacrificial death and resurrection of Christ as the salvation for all people, and became a father of the Christian world religion. In assessing his importance it is well to keep in mind that his epistles in the New Testament are placed after the gospels of the evangelists, but that they were written decades before them. Paul's texts thus have a special value as sources for the study of ideas in early Christianity.
Debunking Magic in Religion
Most religions are tempted by what we called the fourth principle of magic: all happenings and creations are willed by some being. Religions may hold that at least some features of the natural and social world were created intentionally by some being. In olden days this was a common tenant of most thinking about both nature and social institutions. You can debunk it by saying, as we do, that religion is a product of human language. It does not detract anything from religion to date its beginning at the time of the beginning of the word. It should be said loud and clear that the idea of "intelligent design" owes its popularity to the fourth principle of magic, not to convincing scientific reasoning.
The religious belief in scriptures or other kinds of testimony as having been divinely produced or inspired is another expression of the fourth principle of magic. There seem to be a general tendency in popular religion to expand such testimony. This is part of the growth of sacredness. The present expansion of Roman Catholic beautifications initiated by Pope is another case in point.
It is interesting to note the religious scholarship has often tried to rein in such expansions. The many Christian gospels during the first three centuries after the death of Jesus of Nazareth — including those of James, Judas, Peter, Thomas — were after much controversy harnessed at the time of Pope Innocent 1(401-417) into four canonical ones, Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John, all written in Greek during the first century BC. In our days Muslim theological scholars are reducing the many hadiths attributed to Muhammad. The Qur'an itself, however, resists such efforts. At least two older and somewhat different version of this scripture are known to exist. (I do not cite where they are located since it may encourage Jehadists to destroy them and murder the scholars working with them.)
A very informative encounter between two teachers of religion, one a Pharisee, that is a certified scholar of religious law, and one a self-taught scholar, both debunkers of magic, is retold in Mark 12:28-33. The autodidact is Jesus, the name of the other man remains unknown and he is simply called religious teacher. The two men are very different: one is a conservative scholar and the other is a dropout — with a somewhat revolutionary bent — from the carpentry trade. Both lived in a region that, for three centuries, had been under the sway of a mental empire, the Hellenistic culture — perhaps the same kind of experience as many people today have in the mental empire of an Americanized world. Geologists have found remnants of Greek urns (the Coca-Cola and ketchup bottles of those days) and mosaic and marble images (the Hollywood icons of those days) in nearby communities where the two teachers had grown up and eventually met each other. Moreover, the country in which the two men had their conversation had for a hundred years been under the influence of Roman culture, and had lately been formally occupied by the Romans. Both men wanted to resist alien influences by reinforcing their biblical tradition.
One of the teachers of the law came and heard them [Jesus and his students] debating. Noticing that Jesus had given them a good answer, he asked him, "Of all the commandments, which is the most important?"
The most important one," answered Jesus, "is this: 'Hear, O Israel, the Lord our God, the Lord is one. Love the Lord your God with all your heart and with all your soul and with all your mind and with all your strength' [Deut. 6:4,5]. The second is this: 'Love your neighbor as yourself' [Lev. 19:18]. There is no commandment greater than these."
"Well said, teacher," the man replied. "You are right in saying that God is one and there is no other but him. To love him with all your heart, with all your understanding and with all your strength [cf. 1 Sam. 15: 22], and to love your neighbor as yourself is more important than all burnt offerings and sacrifices [cf. Hosea 6: 6]." (Italics and references added here.)
Both men in this dialogue are steeped in the world of the Hebrew Scriptures. And both men are in agreement about its core message: it is your mindset of love of God and love of your fellowman that counts, not any magic rites such as sacrifices on an altar. And they also agreed that their God is unique.
Thus Jesus did not appreciate the magical elements of sacrifices at altars in the Jewish Bible. In spite of this, magic came to abound in the Christian Gospel about the life and teaching of Jesus. He is depicted as a magician performing miracles. The evangelists of the New Testament, who decided to record their beloved and impressive story of Jesus for others, apparently found it natural to impress the audience with a string of magical episodes, congenial to the symbolic environment of the time. They gave in their way Jesus homage by includ. "All of this were done," they unabashed admitted, "that it might be fulfilled what was spoken by the prophet ..." (Matthew 21:4 and several other places.)
The audiences of those days found such episodes natural. A modern reader can be more moved by the Sermon on the Mount, one of the most powerful moral messages in human history, without the attached magic of Jesus' feeding a multitude with two fishes and five pieces of bread. When Jesus sees his victimage inevitable, he gathers his nearest followers to a last supper together with bread and wine. Later the Church Fathers added more magic to the stock of the evangelists. The communion with bread and wine became the magical highway of the Church to salvation and eternal life.
Immanuel Kant tried to promote a rational religion without magic and mystery — actually mostly a God-given morality — also stressing neighborly love and mutual duty. Max Weber (1920) in his whole collection of studies of world religions, found only three traditional religions that had thrived without magic. These three are the Indian doctrine of karma, Zoroastrian dualism, and the Calvinist doctrine of predestination.
Religious Freedom
Religious freedom is something very different from respect for religions. In the Jewish tradition coercion is not used to bring non-Jewish people to the faith. In the history of Christianity, coercion has at times been used in spreading the faith, although violence in missionary work was not condoned by the Bible in missionary work. In both Judaism and Christianity, the thesis is that God endows his believers with a freedom to accept and reject his messages.
In the discussion we reviewed between the two religious teachers in Mark 12:28-33 there was also full agreement on the unique character of their God. A modern interpretation reads:
The God of Abraham, Isaac, Jacob and Jesus is unlike any other God known to the ancient religions of Greece, Rome or the Middle East.... Uniquely, this God wishes to be worshiped in spirit and truth, in whatsoever manner conscience directs, without coercion of any sort. This God reads hearts, and is satisfied only with purity of conscience and conviction. Those who belong to any other religion or tradition, or who count themselves among agnostics or atheists, are thereby given by this God equal freedom. They, too, must follow their individual consciences. This God wishes to be worshiped by men and women who are free, not under duress (Novak 2002).
The freedom to accept or reject divine communications is much less clear in Islam than in Judaism and Christianity. Where this vision exists it makes believers resistant to being overruled by hostile antagonists among the people, or by the actions of the state in any of its branches. It also opens the road to a more secular philosophy of life, a religion without magic.
Providing Education about Religion in Schools
The fall of the Roman Empire in western Europe weakened the power of the state, but left the Roman Catholic Church strong. During the Middle Ages the Church had far more influence on education than it had had under the Romans.
The Reformation did not put a stop to this. It rather made the literacy of the masses ever more urgent an issue. Education was usually conducted in private schools. The Swedish ecclesiastical law of 1686 ordered ministers of the Lutheran State Church to hold regular, systematic examination on the catechism in households; these interrogations were documented, as was the literacy of the members of the household. Most private schools that taught reading were subsequently made redundant by the establishment of a state monopoly: in 1842 the Swedish Riksdag voted for a six-year compulsory elementary school. In 1888 the clergy no longer had to conduct examinations in homes or record literacy.
This weakening of the churches' influence on schools was typical for all Europe. Morning prayers in schools were the last vestige of the power the church had once had. After the end of World War II, they were gradually phased out in all of western Europe. As the victor in the Spanish civil war in the 1930s, Franco returned the power over education to the Catholic Church, but after his death in 1975 and the defeat of Spanish fascism, education once again fell under the aegis of democratically elected politicians.
Freedom of religion guarantees that different religious persuasions can coexist. The schools can therefore change from teaching a religion to teaching about religions. For publicly financed obligatory schools this has been a much used opening. Anyone who desires to learn more about his own religion has to turn to instructions by churches, synagogues, temples, or mosques. In contrast to the teaching of other activities in other societal realms such as exercises in democracy, carrying out simple business transactions, practicing or performing in art, religious practices such as mass or prayers have been expelled in publicly financed schools in most Western countries. In France and the United States this policy is over two hundred years old.
Parochial schools provide general education in addition to religious instruction in the own faith. Whether the study includes world religions varies. It is difficult to teach history or geography or social science without mentioning them.
Attempts at Hegemony by the Societal Realm of Religion
In science we reject any reasoning using our fourth magic principle — that all happenings and creations are willed by some being — to subordinate science to religion. The participants at the annual meeting of the American Society for the Advancement of Science in San Francisco 2001 heard Pervez Hoodbhoy, professor of nuclear and high-energy physics at Quaid-e-Azam University in Islamabad, cite a guide to teaching chemistry in the Islamic way, decrying the usual way in which the formation of water from hydrogen and oxygen is taught. "No, says the book, the teacher must say that when hydrogen and oxygen combine then, by the Will of Allah, they turn into water." Such a formulae, of course, has no place in natural science; it adds nothing of scientific value. It is simply an unwarranted claim of hegemony in society on the part of the realm of religion. Such claims have no place in a many-splendored society.
All world religions except Islam are reasonably compatible with a many-splendored society. A religion with a founder who says "My Kingdom is not of this world" (John 18:36) can easily live with and in a many-splendored society of this world. However, when Christianity is corrupted into political, economic, or cultural fundamentalism it becomes unfit for a many-splendored society.
The case is more difficult for the religion that said "Allah is great and Mohammed is his Prophet." Again and again the Prophet’s words in the Qur'an remind the reader that the Prophet's followers will go to Paradise and the infidels in all walks of life will go to Hell. Even good people outside the Muslim faith have no hope of a future. (As a Hamas leader who had taken a liking to a visiting Westerner journalist said in the 21st century: "Too bad you will go to Hell.")
In Muslim faith another sharper tenet is never far away. "Allah is the greatest and Mohammed is his final Prophet." If Mohammed is the last prophet there is no possibility for new prophecy to improve on his messages. Thus the Muslim world is stuck with the messages in the Qur'an, all of which are said to be dictated by Allah through the Archangel Michel. All progress made elsewhere, before and after the Prophet's teachings in Mecca and Medina in the Middle Ages, is irrelevant to the faithful, who may even regard it as sinful.
Other great religions accept progress. For example, the Jewish religion documents progress with the notion of Jove's journey (Deuteronomy 5:2-3, Judges 5:4-5). He traveled from the mountain of Sinai where he had been the thunderous God of Moses' nomadic tribes to the land of Canaan, where he became the temple God in a city-based dominion conquered by King David.
Muslim religion, alone among the great religions, does not allow for development and change, only for tradition. The aggrandizement of the Prophet to have the last and final word, is, of course, a restraint for the human spirit. Specifically, Dawa, the Muslim missionary preaching and its effort to establish religious sovereignty over all realms in society, creates a spiritual straightjacket covering politics, science, art, and, not the least, family life.
The Muslims ruled Southern Spain for over 800 years, but the period of civilized tolerance lasted just over a hundred years. It succumbed, not primarily to the conquests by Christian warriors from the North, but by repeated influxes from traditional Mohammedans from the south (Menocal 2002). Musa ibn Maymun (Maimonides), the Jewish medical scholar and philosopher, did most of his life's accomplishments in the Caliphate of Cordoba. But in the end he had to flee to Egypt. He said about Cordoba's Arab rulers: "Never did a nation molest, degrade, debase, and hate us as much as they" (cited from Thornton 2007, p. 92). His equally famous contemporary in Cordoba, Ibn Rushd (Averroes) who had taught Aristotle to Europe also died in exile. He had fled from Cordoba to Marrakech. He was an Arab and Muslim, but that did not help him from the Jihad forces of violence and intolerance. Cordoba can be cited, not only as "the ornament of the world," but also as a definitive proof that a built-in hegemonic dogmatism in Islam kills achievements of high civilization with the score 700 years against 100 years.
The Muslim Dawa preaches a straightforward case of what we have called realm hegemony. Over time, its message has resulted in a backward striving among the Prophet's orthodox followers. (In Iran at the time of this writing, Dawa is also the name taken by a Shiite ruling reactionary party.) The only area of progress that seems at all times have been fully accepted within radical Islam is progress in weaponry.
The Muslim Brotherhood that started in Egypt at the dissolution of the Ottoman Empire after World War I has been a model for many other Islamic radical movements of the Twentieth century. The ideal society of the Brotherhood and its counterparts in other countries is the one depicted in the Qur'an and its concern in present days is the dignity of Muslim communities and states and the unfailing wellbeing of their populations.
It is, however, a sure ticket to an inferiority complex for anybody in the modern world to have as one’s ideal for a society the once war-prone clans of Medina, a temple and bazaar city in a desert setting in the Middle Ages, ruled with Mohammed’s personal (sultanate) authority. It may in effect become a quite painful dissonance for those who believe that their Allah is the greatest. It causes a massive defensive bilge to observe a world outside Muslim confines and yet to have to deny its advances, pleasures and opportunities which have become so visible and close through modern mass media. Predictably, a resentment of Western wealth and personal freedom (particularly for women) is close at hand in contemporary Islamic public opinion. It causes a reckless indignation that is fuelling a current jihad against the Western ways of life that is proclaimed by a minority but important imams. A similar resentment seems also to be emerging against the good life around the skyscrapers in Japan, South Korea, and in the modernized parts of India and China.
As the world entered the 21st century, the response to jihad is not war between civilizations, but a struggle to defend all civilizations and its many-splendored features against assaults on freedoms and on presently popular lifestyles. It is also — not to forget — a struggle between Muslims of different persuasions, the currently violent jihadists, the traditionalists, and the reformed. All Muslims worth their name, however, are fundamentalists in the sense that they believe the Qur'an is literally inspired by Allah.
Respect for Religions
Large and influential numbers of contemporary Muslims realize (or will soon realize) that terror and violence of the Al Queda type is a counter-productive Dawa. Their brotherhoods instead look for a takeover in Western democracies by means of mass communication, street demonstrations, fellow travelers, and effective use of election ballots. They will demand legislation requiring "respect" for Islam, for the Prophet and his messages. Unfortunately, also any democratically enacted Dawa means religious sovereignty over all realms in society. Any Dawa version of “respect” is a good-by to the prospect of a many-splendored society with societal realms of autonomy. That is why this author, for one, is unwilling to grant blanket respect to the Islamists. Respect for religions requires another test.
Needless to say, people are sensitive to anything that relates to the ultimate evaluation of their lives. To attack a religion that guarantees the self-respect of its adherents is risky business. The response of those who are wounded in their religious beliefs can be very aggressive. No wonder that religious groups demand "respect" for their religion. This respect can be given by the social scientists to the core evaluative parts of their religious views without surrendering the values of science and scholarship. Thus we shall not mock some people's conviction that God loves them or that they are chosen for eternal life in His Paradise, provided the paradise is religious and not a vision of any other realm such as economy, science, politics, art, or morality.
Curtsey to religious convictions applies only to central religious elements of religious emotive evaluations. It does not have to apply to their executive evaluations such as market prices. The taking of rent, the price of money (a typical executive evaluation), became a favorite topic in medieval religious discourse (Nelson 1949). This topic belongs in the realm of economy, and the religious views about it were and are usually inconsistent, irrelevant, and misguided.
Nor does the respect for religion have to apply to its embedded descriptions. Descriptive matters – everything from cosmology to conceptions of diseases – belong in the realm of knowledge and here the rules and findings of natural science apply. As scientists we have both the right and obligation to discard many traditional religious views about factual matters as mistaken and superstitious, and sometimes dangerous to health.
In a many-splendored society, most basic prescriptions belong in the realms of morality and jurisprudence. Morality is a realm with rationalities of its own, and its ethic may be secular and not religious. In civilized morality both men and women are treated with dignity, and discrimination on the basis of sex is unacceptable. Legal prescriptions are enacted in a political process with procedures of its own, not religious rules. A social scientist's "respect" for a person's religion thus need not apply to everything this person happens to call "my religion." The respect we accord the believers can be restricted to the core emotive evaluations of their faith, the ones that deal with the joy and sorrow of living and the agony of dying, and the selves turning into souls.
Since religion includes statements about the ultimate evaluation of a person, it has proven open to powerful trade-offs between the mundane and the pristine world. A common message from priests follows this clever paradigm: "Do this in the mundane world and you will be rewarded in the pristine heavenly world!" Such deals — for a deal it always is — may have great consequences. It may promote civilized actions or uncivilized actions, Mother Theresa's actions for the poor and sick, or those of a suicide bomber against innocent civilians.
It is easy to find instances when the tradeoff between worldly actions and otherworldly rewards have uncivilized consequences. Richard Dawkins is a physical scientist who does not understand that the existence of religion is as predictable from social science as a falling apple is predictable from physical science. In his pro-atheism book God he does not distinguish between religion and superstition. Nevertheless his catalogue of the ills of religion is relevant:
Imagine, with John Lennon, a world with no religion. Imagine no suicide bombers, no 9/11, no 7/7, no Crusades, no witch-hunts, no Gunpowder Plot, no Indian partition, no Israeli/Palestinian wars, no Serb/Croat/Muslim massacres, no persecution of Jews as 'Christ-killers', no Northern Ireland 'troubles', no 'honour killings', no shiny-suited bouffant-haired televangelists fleecing gullible people of their money ('God wants you to give till it hurts'). Imagine no Taliban to blow up ancient statues, no public beheadings of blasphemers, no flogging of female skin for the crime of showing an inch of it. (Dawkins 2006, pp. 1-2.)
Not all of these repugnancies are due to a hegemony claimed by the religious realm. Some are strictly inside the religious realm and nevertheless disgusting. Needless to say, religion can claim neither respect nor tolerance when cruel and uncivilized events like the ones listed by Dawkins occur. This is not to say that atheists are less prone to cruelties than believers. Remember Hitler and Stalin!
Impacts of Religion on Secular Society
The hope of a paradise continues its bloody trail into modern history both in its Muslim version of Jihad and in versions of secularized Christianity in which paradise no longer is an eschatological destination but utopias to be realized in our time in this world, for example, the paradises promised by Communism or Nazism. “The history of the past century is not a tale of secular advance, as bien-pensants of Right and Left like to think. The Bolshevik and Nazi seizures of power were faith-based upheavals just as much as the Ayatollah Khomeini’s theocratic insurrection in Iran. The very idea of revolution as a transforming event in history is owed to religion. Modern revolutionary movements are a continuation of religion by other means.” (Grey 2007, p 2.)
Religion as a societal realm has thus had enormous consequences for another realm, the body politic. What originates as religious actions may continue in history as secular ones. Far from all of these impacts belong in the dark pages of history. Here are three examples as a small counterbalance to Richard Dawkins' list.
There are only tenuous intellectual bridges between democracy in classical times and modern times. More or less knowledgeable references to Athens were made by the promoters of democracy in Europe and America as a solution to the political conflicts of the Eighteenth Century. But, as we have noted, there is no historical continuity between Athenian democracy and contemporary democracy; in particular, our democracy is a novel organization rather than a new ideal.
Some radical Protestant sects on the British Isles had an important role in inventing our democracy. They were not in the mainstream of Episcopacy, nor of Presbyterianism. They were radical even for the pious Cromwell who held their political heirs, the Levelers and the Diggers, imprisoned in the Tower of London. These sects developed man's relationship with God as a strict person-to-person relationship, neither requiring the intervention of any priest, nor needing any different ranks among members. Anyone in their congregation could convey divine messages, and everyone's word was of equal value. Herbert Tingsten in his text on democracy (1965, pp 20-23) has summarized the historical research on this topic. "Perhaps the most typical," he says, "were the Quakers, who believed in an 'inner light' which directed each individual and was capable of creating a synthesis of the various opinions which were expressed in discussion. This they called 'the sense of the meeting' (p 21)." This practice in religious assemblies was transferred to political assemblies, a gift from the societal realm of religion to the societal realm of the body politic in a country that already had a division between the monarchy and the legislature. For centuries, however, the conservatives in Parliament resisted the additional demand of radical Puritans to broaden the franchise. The latter argued that the aim of government was to protect property-owners, and that only people with property ought to have the vote.
The abolition of Western slavery is a second case in point. Again the Quakers in Britain of the seventeenth century are the pioneers. They believed that every human harbored something of God. That divine part could not be owned by any other than God. Thus they prohibited slavery among their members. Thomas Clarkson was a political radical who became convinced that the success of British imperial trade did not depend on slaves. He was a key figure in shaping the interdenominational abolition committee in London in 1787 and spent years as a traveling organizer of local committees with members of various church groups. William Wilberforce, a conservative evangelical Christian, became the ardent spokesman in Parliament for this movement against slave trade and slavery. From 1791 and again and again in following parliaments he introduced bills proposing abolition legislation. In 1807 he prevailed with a good majority. Abolition then became part of British diplomacy, and gained rapidly in public opinion in the world. In 1863 in the United States Abram Lincoln issued the Emancipation Proclamation that led his troops in the Civil War to free most of the nation's four million slaves. The Thirteenth Amendment, a political document ratified in 1865, guaranteed that slavery would never again exist in the United States. What had started as a religious idea became secular law.
A third example of religious provisions for the body politic is the welfare states of modern Europe. They are religiously supported arrangement that has become largely seen as secular. They are, do not think otherwise, products of political struggles over the distribution of economic, educational, and medical resources. But one may well assume that the outcome of such struggles would have been different without a Christian tradition of mercy for the chanceless laid off, sick or handicapped, and the inherently stupid or the sufferers from incurable severe brain damages, and others truly unfortunate. The European Continent has had centuries of religious preaching of heavenly rewards for brotherly love and mercy practiced in this life. This sets an initial thrust toward welfare as a consistent policy for those who are too young to take care of themselves, or too old, too sick, and too down-and-out to fend for themselves. This thrust overcame also an internal opposition to "socialist" measures by conservatives, including conservative members of the clergy. The welfare policy could then be maintained in a secular environment by the processes we have discussed in Chapter 15 in the section Vocabularies Supporting Order. It appears, from the European evidence we have so far, that an extensive welfare policy for the weakest members of society can be kept going in a long run even when any original religious background is forgotten.
A Coda on Economy and Religion
The societal realms of economy and religion both center on the linguistic category of evaluations, albeit of different qualities. Economy depends mostly on executive symbols of evaluation, while religion depends mostly on emotive ones. Since evaluative motives in both executive and emotive modes have motivational force, it is not surprising that mankind senses a struggle between Mammon and God.
We know from "The Rules of Emotive and Rational Choice" (Proposition 4:4) that emotive choice is the first and default mechanism for mankind. This would argue that religion obtains dominance in the beginning of a human life cycle. It is indeed a common saying that "childlike faith" is strong. That the exigencies of living that meet us beyond the period of parental protection and that they require executive skills is given. So it stands to reason that Mammon dominates in this phase of the life cycle. Another part of folk wisdom says that "when the devil gets old he becomes pious." Death is intensely emotive and it is not surprising that an emotive realm of society becomes relevant in old age.
The motivational force of the economy is strong and so is the force of religion. God and Mammon are both strong opposition to one another. But imagine what would happen if they joined forces! It took the genius of Max Weber to even raise the question.
The religious virtuosos of all religions either rework the everyday world or flee from it into contemplation. Generally speaking, the relationship of virtuoso religiosity to everyday life became different in the West and the East. The Western tradition based on the Israeli prophets was one of acting in the world without being of the world. Weber describes the relationship thus:
When the religious virtuoso stood out in the world as a kind of divine `instrument', cut off from all magic means of salvation, with the demand that he should `prove himself' to be called to salvation before God — which in effect meant before oneself — by the ethical quality of his behaviour and, then the `world' could never so much be devalued and rejected from a religious viewpoint as something created (animal-like) and as a kind of weak vessel of sin: thus, it came to be affirmed psychologically even more as the scene of service pleasing to God in the worldly `vocation'. This asceticism within the world was indeed world-denying, in the sense that it scorned such values as dignity and beauty, ecstatic intoxication and glorious dreams, purely worldly power and purely worldly heroism, rejecting them as competitors to the Kingdom of God. But for that very reason, it did not flee like contemplation from the world, but wanted to rationalise the world ethically in accordance with God's commandments, thus remaining world-oriented in a specifically more profound sense than the intact human being's naive `affirmation of the world', for example in ancient times or in lay Catholicism. In everyday life, in particular, it was to prove that the person advanced in religion was selected, a recipient of grace — not, it is true, in everyday life as it was, but in methodically rationalised everyday behaviour in God's service. When everyday behaviour was rationally elevated into a calling, it became a confirmation of salvation. The sects of religious virtuosos created ferment in the West for a methodical rationalisation of one's way of life, including economic behaviour, and not — like the Asiatic associations of contemplative, orgiastic or apathetic ecstatics — outlets for the longing to escape from the meaninglessness of acting within the world (Weber 1920, pp ??).
Here is the foundation of Weber's thesis that sects and churches with Protestant ethics have been a starting-point for the systematic quest for profitability that is part of the spirit of capitalism. Methodical religious rationalization of everyday life underlies the methodical thinking on profitability that is the value cornerstone of capitalism.
Weber's theses on the origin of capitalism have been greatly debated and also questioned. His reasoning is complex, and not all his critics have been able to follow it. One must realize that both the structural and the value-related factors must be present in order for rational capitalism to arise. This has been the case only in the modern Western world.
In the cities of India, Weber can point to highly advantageous structural conditions: here was a legal system at least as useful for capitalism as that of mediaeval Europe; here was rational science; here was a mathematics that should have made profitability calculations as easy to accomplish as in Europe; here were organized firms for handicrafts and a division of labor. But the requisite achievement values were lacking and India developed no domestic form of capitalism.
In China too, there were outstandingly favorable conditions for capitalist development. Much that inhibited capitalism in Europe, such as feudalism and the guilds, did not exist in China. The economic double standard of morality was defeated by a pragmatic, worldly religious tradition. Here, there was a cultivated and literate bureaucracy. But in China the spark that could have kindled capitalism, namely the motivation that ensues from values concerning obligatory methodical profitability, was largely lacking.
Only in Europe did the unique combination exist — but not in the whole of Europe, either. Only where ascetic Protestantism had put down firm roots were conditions good, for example among the Calvinists in The Netherlands, the Huguenots in France, the Methodists in England, the Pietists in Germany and the Evangelical revivalist movements in the Nordic countries. The Protestant sects in the United States were clearly a capitalist hothouse. Nevertheless, there are exceptions difficult to explain: For example, Catholic northern Italy had only the structural preconditions for capitalism, but its elites in Venice and Genoa nevertheless rose to the occasion and developed a flourishing capitalism.
Please send your comments on this chapter by email to the author.
Chapter 22.
The Realm of the Body Politic: A Search for Order
Creating Politics
Overview of the Body Politic
Figure 22.1. Polity in Society
The State, an Organization Based on Use of Force
Ordnung muss sein
Order, Anarchy, Spin, and Contentiousness
Figure 22.2. Semiotics of Order
Types of Politics
Rise-to-Occasion-Politics
Revolutionary Rise-to-Occasion-Politics
Run-of-the-Mill Politics
Revolutionary Run-of-the-Mill-Politics
Decisions by Majority Vote
This chapter has not been completed, organized and edited
To be civic-minded is a lifestyle with focus on community organization and politics. The Civic-minded believe it is important to manifest their views and to discuss their views in order to try to keep and shape a social order. They may turn up at a demonstration, but they have many other ways to influence events. They are not averse to working within their movement or party; they will readily plunge into committee work or act as volunteers or functionaries. They prefer to associate with like-minded people who are engrossed in politics and community life, and many of them have little time for small talk. Typically their small talk turns into political conversation.
Creating Politics
Zeus, the most powerful among the ancient Greek gods, had helped people by giving them many skills: weapons, business acumen, medicine, et cetera. He passed them on to his people with the help of his messenger Hermes.
When people moved into towns, Zeus discovered that they were unable to stay on good terms. They were in mortal peril in their struggles, not only against nature and its wild animals, but in their struggles over one another's resources. The reason for their insecurity and conflicts was that they lacked the art of politics (politike techne).
Zeus then sent his messenger, Hermes, to Athens with two gifts. One, dike, was the ability to sense justice. The other, aidos, was the ability to sense shame when violating public opinion. These two gifts were to be the foundations of political skill and to enable townspeople to live in civic harmony, settling their destiny and disputes by peaceful means.
Before Hermes embarked on his mission, he asked Zeus about the gifts:
“Shall I give them these in the same way as (other) arts and skills are given to them? In delivering them, a few human beings received, for example, the physician's art, and this sufficed to serve a large number of laymen; and the other professions have received their skills in like manner. Shall I now distribute dike and aidos in the same way, or shall I hand them out to one and all?”
What Hermes wanted to know was whether the skills of politics should be granted to the whole people, or to a ruling élite.
“To one and all”, was Zeus' reply.
This story is told by Protagoras in a conversation with Socrates and recorded by Plato. Protagoras concluded: "In politics it is quite correct for your citizens to accept advice from both blacksmiths and cobblers."
This tale is not told by Socrates, Plato's spokesman in most dialogues, but by one of his adversaries in Athens, a sophist whose conversations Socrates used to enjoy. Plato did not favor democracy but a rule by elites. The tale is sometimes called “the birth of democracy” (Stone 1988, chapter 4). That is perhaps to claim too much; but at least it tells about the birth of justice and public opinion in politics.
Overview of the Body Politic
To guide us to the most relevant aspects of the study of statecraft and administration, i.e. the body politic, we elaborate Column 3 in of The Periodic Table of Societal Realms with some additional examples (Figure 22.1). The general categories are familiar from our review of science, art, economy, and religion, but the content is entirely different.
Figure 22.1. Polity in Society
|
3. |
Societal Structures |
Societal Functions |
||||||||
|
Organi- |
Network |
Media |
inside realms |
between realms |
||||||
|
zations |
with |
with |
Create |
Preserve |
Disperse |
Receive |
Export |
Import values |
||
|
with |
Parti- |
Audi- |
the cardinal value of order |
|||||||
|
Members |
cipants |
ences |
Maker |
Keeper |
Broker |
Taker |
Provider |
Procurer |
||
|
B |
Symbol-type |
J |
K |
L |
M |
N |
O |
P |
Q |
R |
|
|
Executive |
States
Execu- tive offices
Juntas
Bureauc-racies
Legis-latures
Judiciary
Military
Parties
Civic organi-zations
|
Electorates
Town meetings
Caucuses
Campaigns
Sym-pathizers
|
Tribunes
Pro-clama-tions
Agi-tations
Propa-ganda
Demon-strations |
Politicians
Legis-lators
Civic leaders |
Judges
Perse-cuters
Lawyers
Wardens |
Officials
Bureau-crats
Police
Civic workers
|
Subjects
Citizens |
Legal advisors
Power brokers
Public research councils
Public art endown-ments
State churches |
Tax authorities
Draft boards
Persons |
|
prescriptions |
||||||||||
|
A |
Realm |
|||||||||
|
|
POLITY |
|||||||||
|
C |
Lifestyle: |
|||||||||
|
|
Civic minded |
|||||||||
|
D |
Cardinal Value |
|||||||||
|
|
Order |
|||||||||
|
E |
Stratification: |
|||||||||
|
|
Power |
|||||||||
|
F |
Reward System: |
|||||||||
|
|
Positions, tributes |
|||||||||
|
G |
Rationality: |
|||||||||
|
|
Democracy, diplomacy |
|||||||||
|
H |
Type of Freedom: |
|||||||||
|
|
Civic liberties |
|||||||||
|
I |
Spontaneous Order |
|||||||||
|
|
Public opinions |
|||||||||
The letters marking the rows are those found in a summary of the various language-products in society called Table of Social Realms in Chapter 9. The letters after "I" continue as columns to make space in the center for some illustrative examples.
A quick glance at this table, including its headings of rows and columns, may give some readers the impression that here is human society. They are mislead. Unfortunately, the contents of many modern text books about society can to nearly hundred percent fit into the categories covered in our table "Polity in Society." The contents of our parallel tables — "Science in Society," "Art in Society," "Economy in Society," "Religion in Society" and the tableaux on "Morality in Society" in next chapter — are ignored or treated grudgingly (often even condescendingly or ignorantly) in textbooks in tax-financed schools, i.e. schools with curricula set up by politicians and with educators who are graduates from state-run teachers colleges.
There have been historians (mostly Germans like Leopold von Ranke) who have claimed that we know everything important about society by going to the archives of the state. He and many political scientists believe that the formations and preservations of states are the most important events in history. The state, as we have learned, is an inclusive organization in the body politic based on a legitimate use of force within its territory. It is actually no more than an organization among many others. Nor is it a network or medium. More important, the body politic is only one societal realm among at least five others.
The State, an Organization Based on Use of Force
The central actors in the body politic are the states.
The state has often been imbued with mystique. Conservative social thinkers of the Romantic era thought that the state embodied the forces, divine and secular, that formed the spirit of the total society. Their opposite numbers, the socialists, made the state equally mysterious by equating their state with the total society, thus believing both that "all is politics" and that "the state fades away."
Reality is much simpler. A state is first and foremost an organization (Kelsen 1934/1967, p. 286-319). It contains all the properties to be found in any organization: leadership (government), norms (laws), and members (subjects or citizens). Then the mystique disappears. The state is not a public, nor a network. It is an organization, an organization capable of interacting with other states and recognized as a state by them. Its norms are coercive. A lion’s share of the state’s norms concern the conduct of its staff (functionaries), not its members. Max Weber, Hans Kelsen, Torgny T. Segerstedt and many others have described what makes this organization different from others. It is, says Weber "a community that legitimately claims a monopoly of the use of physical force." Like some other organizations the state has its defined territory and its permanent population. What is unique for the modern state is its monopoly on the use of lawful violence within its geographic territory. Only the state’s police may lay hand on its subjects, only the courts of the state may deprive them of freedom, only the state may keep armed forces for warfare.
Weber's theory foresaw the modern state’s dependency on a bureaucracy based on rational rules and formal competence, but this dependency is true also of large business corporations, big research laboratories, and the established churches. All big and lasting organizations have staffs and rules of succession to replace generations and other shift in leadership.
A 'guerilla' organization operates within a territory, it uses violence against military and police targets and public property in attempts to take over the government through paramilitary force. A 'mafia' is an organization (often clan-based) that has its own laws, courts, taxation (extortion), succession rules, and may maintain territorial borders against other mafias – but its use of force is not a legitimate monopoly as is the state's use of violence. It has not been authorized by what Kelsen calls the basic norms, i.e. the rules (constitutions) delineating how to create laws and fill positions of authority. A 'terrorist organization,' like a guerilla and mafia differs from a state in that it lacks legitimacy in its use of violence, and it uses violence against civilians to destabilize societies.
Within the territorial framework of a state we may find a multiplicity of other civilian organizations: families, associations, corporations, churches, private schools, art galleries, and all the rest of the many-splendored society. Some of these cross state borders and are regional or international. Networks, in particular, are not restricted and and can cross lines of membership set up by states.
Ordnung muss sein
The political sphere is, in a broad sense of the terms, dedicated to seeking order. Order is the cardinal value of this societal realm. However, there are always different versions of the desired order, and the conflicts between them are the stuff of political life.
Order is a cardinal value composed of a body prescriptions. The body politic is full of more or less compelling prescriptions. Its practice includes rules for the juridical system, the bureaucracy, diplomacy, and warfare, as well as a system for gaining the consent of the governed for the (new or old) order. Our Chapter 11, "Vocabularies of Regulation" is thus a basic preparation for the study of the body politic. Likewise, "Vocabularies of Honor" (Chapter 14) is helpful background knowledge for the student of politics.
In Chapter 15 there is a section on "Vocabularies Supporting Order." In Proposition 15:7 some key findings of the social psychology of conformity to prescriptions are summarized.
(a) The more favorable evaluations a person receives in an encounter, the more he his likely to conform to the prescriptions in the encounter.
(b) When a person in an encounter deviates from its customary prescriptions (norms) the others in the encounter tend to articulate the prescription.
(c) The more persons comply with the prescriptions in an encounter, the more favorable evaluations they tend to receive from others in the encounter, and the less they comply the more unfavorable evaluations they tend to receive.
(d) A member of an encounter that violates norms and thereby hurts other members is met by an expectation (a new norm) that requires him to compensate the victims.
(e) The compensation shall be given not only to the victims but also to the victims' significant encounters that have been affected by the violation (restorative justice).
Equipped with insights such as these about prescriptions in small encounters it becomes easier to understand the the prescriptions that shape the cardinal value of order in the big realm of body politics.
Order, Anarchy, Spin, and Contentiousness
A semiotic analysis helps us specify what is order and what is not order. Figure 22.2 tells us to separate Order from Anarchy — top and bottom in the Figure — and separate from both of these what we call Spin (propaganda) and Contentiousness (protest) — right and left in a semiotic square.
The opposite to order is 'anarchy.' The anarchists find compulsive orders, such as the state, so obnoxious that anything else is better. Anarchists want to destroy the state, sometimes without proposing any alternatives, sometimes with alternatives such as a spontaneous order, as argued by Pierre-Joseph Proudhon, the Nineteenth Century French intellectual who was the first call himself "anarchist." One of his pamphlets had as its title a slogan, "property is theft," which became a common theme among European anarchists.
Figure 22.2. Semiotics of Order
'Spin' is political doublespeak. It is actually political slang of the late 20th Century that we here elevate to a scholarly term for political propaganda. Propaganda is a too broad term for our purposes since it can be religious, commercial or moral, not only political. Spin is practically built into the character of both democratic and authoritarian politics and politicians; it is better to assume that it is at hand than that unbiased honesty prevails when order is explained and defended.
Potemkin's fakery of villages, constructed in 1789 to impress the Russian ruler Catherine II on her tours of the the newly conquered Crimea, has became a legendary spin. Goebbels is the modern paradigm of a propaganda minister using deceptive, self-serving spin in mass media on behalf of Hitler. Of late, political commentary with less outright lies than Goebbels is commonly called spin. It stands for biased accounts and selective use of facts in political discourse, often with emotive overtones. Spin is located on the right side of the semiotic square analyzing order.
To the the left is 'Contentiousness.' It can be pre-revolutionary and cancerous as Charles Tilly describes it in one of his big histories of popular struggle, The Contentious French (Tilly 1986). Or, it can be more like run-of-the mill politics as he describes in his other big history of popular struggles, Popular Contention in Great Britain, 1758-1834 (Tilly 1995).
The prototype of modern contentiousness is the public street demonstration that includes not only angry young men, but mothers with babies, and some intellectuals, and occasionally a religious leader.
Types of Politics
An important distinction in the study of the realm of polity has been proposed by Sheldon S Wolin (1996, p. 31) between the political and politics. This dissimilarity has been difficult for both laymen and social scientists to use in ordinary discourse. I will therefore phrase it as a difference between rise-to-occasion-politics and run-of-the-mill-politics. 'Rise-to-occasion-politics' (Wolin's political) occurs when “society composed of diversities can nonetheless enjoy moments of commonality when, through public deliberations, collective power is used to promote or protect the well-being of the collectivity.“ In contrast, run-of-the-mill-politics (Wolin's politics) "refers to the legitimized and public contestation, primarily by organized and unequal social powers, over access to the resources available to the public authorities of the collectivity.” Rise-to-occasion-politics is “episodic, rare.” Run-of-the mill-politics is “continuous, ceaseless, and endless,” says Wolin.
Rise-to-Occasion-Politics
Some contentious issues may grow into 'social movements'. Social movements tend to develop in harmful situations where an issue creates a concern in networks that spreads to media and organizations so that a situation develops where the same issue concerns organizations, networks, and media. The latter condition is a sine qua non of a social movement and the starting point for rise-to-occasion politics. This can take place in both democratic and non-democratic societies.
Social movements seem to have a natural life cycle in both Western and non-Western societies. Combining the insights in an article by Downs (1972) and a book by Spector and Kitsuse (1977) we can identify six stages.
-
Pre-problem stage. A harmful situation exists and is observed in some encounters. A spontaneous order of concerned citizens emerges, but it has not yet attracted the attention of party officials, lawmakers, journalists, or the public. Small networks and groups make initial claims and begin to recruit support.
-
Alarmed discovery and aggressive or euphoric enthusiasm. A dramatic event creates larger public support to solve the problem, such as the 1978 Love Canal Tragedy in the United States or the 2002 Kursk submarine disaster in Russia. There is a mobilizing effect from circular emotive reactions in demonstrations and manifestations.
-
Official recognition of problem. Established leadership get involved: there may be legislation or a creation of agencies to deal with the harmful situation. This is the moment for rise-to-occasion politics to deliver. The result may be at least some legislation to cope with the issue, such as an act on public building safety, child protection, wildlife preservation, ozone molecules stability, automobile emissions control, or whatever issue was at hand.
-
Gradual decline in public interest. Recognizing the costs of significant progress and becoming bored with the problem, media attention fades, and the public loses much interest. At this stage the movements will survive only if they find new issues.
-
Active dissatisfaction in original groups. The groups who made initial claims reemerge and express dissatisfaction with how the harmful situation is being handled. Some who have lost confidence in how the problem is being handled try to create revivals with broader or more radical agendas.
-
Post-problem stage. In spite of the fact that only limited improvement may have been achieved, the issue at hand is replaced by new problems.
These stages are useful benchmarks in assessing public reaction in modern societies to potentially harmful problems. Knowledge of these stages is also useful in assessing the impact on social change of various movements, or on efforts to lengthen the life of a movement.
A sophisticated observer does not take for granted that a social movement will have its day and blow over. The century-old environmental movement has switched its concerns from issues of conservation and national parks to any recreation on lakes or in mountains and woods, to abatement of noise and congestion in cities, to air and water pollution, to abandoning nuclear energy, to the cleaning-up of poisonous waste, to biological diversity, to an agriculture free from chemical fertilizers and pesticides, to global warming. A core of ecology has remained in all these changes. The shifting foci have given environmentalism a much longer life than a typical social movement.
At times, events forces themselves upon populations and their politicians and they must take actions with little room for input from a new social movement. September 11th 2001 in the United States was analogous to Pearl Harbor on December 7th 1940 in that the enemy had reached into “the heart of the eagle,” to use Usama bin Ladin’s expression. The Pentagon, America’s Defense Department in Washington, D.C. was hit by a captured commercial airplane. Another such plane was downed before it hit the White House. The symbol of the American economy, the twin skyscrapers in The World Trade Center in New York, were demolished. The American people were subjected to threats of further indiscriminate violence. Their way of life was under attack. The psychological effects among the general public of the first foreign assaults ever on their native soil were enormous, albeit temporary. The rallying cry “United We Stand!” echoed after September 11th throughout the United States. The politicians who rose to the occasion were Rudolph W. (Rudy) Giuliani, Mayor of New York City, and George W. Bush, President of the United States.
In his election campaign in 2000 George W. Bush had stressed that the United States would not act as the world’s policeman. He warned against having the United States take on the role of nation-builder and criticized his predecessor Bill Clinton for having been too active in Somalia and Kosovo. But then September 11th struck, and the same Bush rose to the occasion by becoming a wartime president. The triggering event was the attack on the American people and the American Creed, but an underlying cause was also awakened. This was an idea born and widely expressed at the time of the American invasion of Cuba in 1898 that the United States had a mission "to make the world safe for democracy and the market economy." Armed with such a vision, the United States had entered the first and second World War, the Korean and Vietnam wars. President Bush took military action to invade Afghanistan and wipe out the Usama bin Ladin’s training camps for for international Muslim terrorists. He was recommended this military response by his vice president, Dick Cheney, and the then White House security advisor Condolezza Rice. The Secretary of Defense, Donald Rumsfeld and the Deputy Secretary of Defense, Paul Wolfowitz then promoted an extension of military operations, the Irak war, with a remote relation to the September 11 attack.
Needless to say, there is no assurance that military rise-to-the occasion politics lead to the desired results. Rise-to-the occasion foreign politics may also be diplomatic. In the flow of political news there are now and then items that are called "windows of opportunity." The columnist Thomas L. Friedman takes a few examples from contemporary history:
Anwar Sadat’s heroic overture to Israel, and Menachem Begin’s response, made the Jimmy Carter-engineered Camp David peace treaty possible. The painful, post-1973 war stalemate between Israel and Egypt and Syria made Henry Kissinger’s disengagement agreements possible. The collapse of the Soviet Union and America’s defeat of Iraq in the first gulf war made possible James Baker’s success in putting the Madrid peace process together.
What all three of these U.S. statesmen had in common, though — and this is the second criterion — was that when history gave them an opening, they seized it, by being tough, cunning and fair with both sides.
The handling of such political opportunities decides which events are retold in the history books and not only published in the mass media of the day. In the above example the politicians could have abstained from active responses, but they rose to the occasions.
Revolutionary Rise-to-Occasion-Politics
A 'revolution' is a drastic change in the central zone of a society. Revolutions with rise-to-occasion-politics are fast and the process can be completed in months or a few years. (Revolutions with run-of-the-mill-politics may require decades.) Revolutions have mass mobilization on a larger scale than we met in the six-step cycle of social movements. They result in a regime change in the body politic as well as fundamental changes in the manning and mandate for the economic, religious, intellectual, and cultural elites. Of these changes, at least the regime change is usually marked by violence.
In 1790 Edmund Burke published his book Reflections on the French Revolution. It is both a probing analysis of what happened during the French Revolution and an epochal formulation of that which would become known as a conservative view of society. ("Conservatism" as a concept in the political debate came into general use 40 years later.)
Burke maintained that a domestic historical tradition should take precedence over a foreign, imperialistic power. He therefore defended Ireland against England and the Hindus against the British East Indian Company.
He also defended a historical France against the radical intellectuals who called themselves "Jacobins" and whose members were recruited to form the governing junta of the Revolution. The fact that the Jacobins were Frenchmen and did not represent a foreign power of occupation was irrelevant for Burke. What mattered for him was their assault on the actual structures and values that were France.
The American Revolution wanted freedom for actual living human beings, who had developed customs and rules for living in the New World. The French Revolution did not seek freedom for France's existing aristocrats, priests, burghers and peasants. They sought freedom for a kind of person that did not exist except in a very small number of Jacobins, but who would be formed by the Revolution through upbringing, education, and — if needed — terror.
The American Revolution represented a large interest group in North America. They had a genuine investment in the American society. They loved their America as it was. The French Revolution represented a smaller interest group. They did not love France as it was, but they loved the picture of the France they wanted to create.
In order to create the new France, the Jacobins freed Catholic priests, nuns and monks from their ties to the Church, and instead tied them to the Revolution with a new oath of allegiance. One was to worship reason and virtue as gods, not Jesus and Maria. New, secularized rituals replaced church services, and a new calendar abandoned religious holidays and gave the people new holidays. Sentiments for one's family and kin were considered loathsome; divorces became frequent and simple. The aristocracy was expunged through systematic, rational executions by the guillotine.
In the old French society, rights and property were granted to families and civil associations. Rights and property were thus given to villages, homesteads, estates, guilds, congregations, monasteries, universities, etc. The society resulting from the Revolution gave rights and property only to the state and to private individuals, not to civil associations.
Edmund Burke was bitingly critical of the Revolution's legislation, and he thereby developed a conservative ideology with its defense of the family and of civil associations, religion, and private property. The American Constitution, which defended these institutions, was accordingly spared such criticism, and reaped instead Burke's approval.
The lesson of this is not that Burke's preference necessarily is correct. The scholarly conclusion is that there is an unsurpassable difference between the French and American revolutions and the constitutions that they gave birth to. One should get out of the habit of mentioning them in the same breath.
Revolutions are codified by new or revised constitutions. Constitutions also emerge out of wars and are initially drafted in the peace treaties (Bobbitt 2002). European peace conferences – Augsburg, Westphalia, Utrecht, Vienna, and Versailles – forged the outcomes of wars not only into cease-fire and border agreements but also into constitutions. Through such treaties the princely state was created, then the kingly state, and the various territorial states, such as the imperial state and the nation-states. A decolonization treaty gave the world a new kind of multi-national and multi-ethnic state, for example India.
Run-of-the-Mill Politics
'Run-of-the mill politics' is best defined by an almost endless enumeration and repetition of the political acts of "tax and spend and regulate", the basic trade in stock of politicians. It is based on committee work, close reading of reports and memoranda, decoding and recoding legislative language and administrative instructions, checking issues with colleagues, listening to lobbyists, making estimates for appropriations and budgets, and, in democracies, casting votes in assemblies. This drudgery is far from the Olympian heights of political pronouncements and loud proclamations to the public. The dullness of the every-day chores in run-of-the-mill-politics often disappoint young people and make short their stay in political activities.
The process of much run-of-the mill politics is rent seeking, i.e., the pursuit of work-free income guaranteed for long periods. It was described when we dealt with the realm of the economy. In politics rent-seeking is the pursuit of favors in the form work-free money for example, subsidies, allowances, and citizen wages. Except in the last case the money involved is given to a smaller number of citizens, but is obtained by taxation and thus collected from all citizens and their businesses.
The decision involved in any event in modern parliamentary, administrative, and court proceedings are documented in protocols. The rationality of the process requires that whatever documentation is related to one and the same issue should preferably be kept in the same file. (to be moved)
In moments of rise-to-the-occasion-politics, leaders with new visions embodied in their party program may ascend to power after free elections in which at least two parties with different visions and versions of social order compete. In periods of run-of-the-mill-politics parties compete by promising and claiming and delivering political favors to their supporters. In both cases the democratic rule requires that the losing side leave the government after an election.
Revolutionary Run-of-the-Mill-Politics
Run-of-the-mill politics can also produce revolutions. This is a slower process that nevertheless drastically changes the composition and mandates of the different élites of the central zone. Critics compare it to a slow cancer, for example, when a political movement, democratic or otherwise, gains dominance in the larger society from having infected its entire central zone. I have watch one such revolution at close range in Sweden where processes in the central zone in the 20th century provide an illustration. The Swedish publicist Svegfors (1981) called it "revolution in small steps."
With few interruptions Social Democrats were at the head of Swedish government for seventy years beginning in 1932. Some political skills in crucial circumstances solidified their rule. In the 1930s they successfully piloted the country through the depression. In the 1940s they headed the coalition government that by hook or crock kept Sweden out of World War II. In the 1950s they governed during an economic boom when living standards for the broad masses rose at a remarkable rate. When they took over in 1932 they were suspicious of state power and of the ruling elites in the central zone of those days. The latter had their base in private capital, earned or inherited, in competence defined by colleagues or by university degrees, in government sinecures that guaranteed high salaries and small workloads. The jurists, professors, priests, officers, doctors, apothecaries, families in business and banking, and the country gentlemen had these resources and were independent centers of power and culture, Geld und Geist (money and culture), as the Germans used to say. They constituted the central zone of those days.
In the name of democracy, the Swedish Social Democrats set out to crash this system. They built an apparatus of union leaders and loyal civil servants, and they took control of an extensive network of voluntary associations covering every nook and movement in the land. They succeeded beyond all plans. Half a century later the General Directors of the governmental bureaucracies were loyal servants of the state, but also good listeners to the Social Democratic apparatus, often formal party members. There were hardly any supreme court judges whose careers had not taken the route through a government department run by a socialist politician. The top physicians of the land were practically all engaged in socialized medicine. All these elites, and also professors, priests, teachers, and military officers, had salaries from from the government and/or were taxed by the government so the their incomes did not allow for extensive cultural activities or personal adventures into non-socialist politics.
The change was not swift as when the Swedish King Charles IX in the seventeenth century took over the estates of the elites of his day and decapitated some some central figures of the aristocracy. In the middle of the twentieth century the shift in the Swedish central zone was insidious. The general public hardly realized what was happening, and neither did many in the old elites.
In the year 2000, the lion's share of all Swedish college and university presidents were Social Democrats, and the same applied to bishops, top central bureaucrats, local heads of social agencies, museum and theater directors, in short, to all top positions in society except big business and the judges of the supreme courts. Of course, the level of electoral support for the Social Democrats varied in these groups; for example, it was higher among bishops than generals. The average elite support of Social Democratic Party – once the party of the working class – was as high as seventy to eighty percent. Probably less than half of these Social Democrats had been appointed by a Social Democratic government because they were in tune with the party. The rest were "fellow-travelers" who quite honestly had found the political party of the central zone most congenial. For such is the lure and the workings of central zones.
The spins of slow revolutionary run-of-the-mill politics are many. A Swedish one was to erase the difference between state and society and call the state "society," a speech habit that also most Swedish political scientists use. The Social Democratic Party had a spin machine with holds on the press. Outright lying accompanied some scandals, for example, discoveries that the Party used a government spy agency to report to its leadership and to labor leaders on citizens in the leftist opposition. Lies, even in Parliament, denied that a Social Democratic minister of justice and other top officials frequented a luxury brothel in Stockholm that also was used by foreign diplomats. These parallels to the Watergate affair in Washington 1972 and the Profumo affair in London 1963 had no political fallouts at all in Sweden, so effective were the Social Democratic spins.
Mexico during the twentieth century adds other lessons of cancerous politics. The Mexican revolution started in 1910. But it was not until 1917 that the country became stable enough to create the new Constitution, which is still in effect. Land reform was an important part of that constitution, resulting in the ejido, or farm cooperative program that redistributed much of the country's land from wealthy land holders to the peasants. The ejidos are still in place almost a hundred years later and comprise nearly half of all the farmland in Mexico. During this period the political party PRI, Partido de la Revolucionario Institucional, was established. Educational and other reforms continued.
PRI came to dominate the central zone of Mexico for 71 years until PAN, Partido Accion Nacional, took over in 2000. Throughout the seven decades of dominance, PRI retained its revolutionary rhetoric, but its actual policies became more and more conservative. Working to preserve as much as possible of the national patrimony for the party bosses and their cronies, the party engaged in vote-buying, control over the news media, intimidation, and outright fraud.
To gain long possession of a central zone changes the de facto agenda of a political party or junta. You may think you rule the central zone and thereby the country, but the joys and privileges of the central zone actually begin to rule you.
Decisions by Majority Vote
Decision-making by casting votes may prevail not only in parliamentary assemblies and general elections but also in juntas, holy seas, board meetings, voluntary private associations, et cetera. It leads to binding decisions in the forms of appointments to offices, rules, programs, legislation, et cetera, as provided by their charters. The process of majority rule sometimes attempts to approximate John Locke’s ideal of a government based on the consent of all governed, and sometimes only to a consent within a group or a governing elite. In the latter cases casting of votes has nothing to do with popular democracy.
The founders of democracy did not limit themselves to the democratic mechanism of casting votes in general elections and in parliaments (representative democracy). They also considered that the public could vote on specific issues (direct democracy). Different systems of voting in direct democracy were developed. In town meetings in Switzerland and New England votes were cast by a show of hands. In the initiatives – called by concerned citizens – and referendums – called by the authorities and politicians – printed ballots are cast at different voting locations.
The growth of cities removed the physical conditions for town meetings, but the referendum became a lasting institution in some places. Politicians in contemporary California and Switzerland are always aware of the possibility of a referendum or an initiative. In other democracies, referendums are rare. They are mostly resorted to in questions regarding the adoption of a new constitutions, the establishment of new boundaries, or the transfer of powers to supranational institutions, such as the European Union. They have occasionally been used to decide issues – for example, the prohibition of alcohol, that have created unmanageable tensions within the party systems, or irresolvable conflicts between the executive, legislative, and judicial branches of government.
Sektorsröstning
Efter 20 år i universitetsvärlden i USA hade jag återvänt till Sverige. Som chef för Sifo, en organisation för survey research, gjorde jag om företaget till en institution för tillämpad samhällsvetenskap. Men vi höll också kvar den ursprungliga produktlinjen av opinionsmätningar och valanalyser, även om de bara utgjorde en handfull procent av omsättningen.
I valrörelsen 1982 diskuterade vi som vanligt de kvartalsmässiga sammanställningarna av de månatliga väljarbarometrarna. De många intervjuerna gjorde att man kunde detaljstudera väljarkåren. Bland annat kunde man se hur anställda i privat tjänst röstade i jämförelse med anställda i offentlig tjänst. De siffror som för alltid fastnat i mitt medvetande från genomgångarna var inte dessa röstetal utan hur många som var anställda i privat och offentlig tjänst; ”basen” för procenttalen som det heter på statistikernas språk. Antalet anställda i offentlig tjänst hade närmat sig antalet i privat tjänst. Och om man lade till dem som var sjukskrivna och arbetslösa eller på annat sätt levde på medel från offentliga kassor så blev de offentligförsörjda en majoritet i väljarkåren. Sådan information om vart Sverige var på väg fanns inte i officiell statistik.
Vi hajade till inför siffrorna. Kunde det vara fel i urval eller tabellering? Nej, allting var rätt. Sverige var på väg in i en situation som varken demokratins fäder eller moderna demokratiteoretiker inom modern statskunskap hade haft anledning att fundera över. Det hade övergått deras tankehorisont att den offentliga sektorn kunde bli så stor. Deras resonemang utgick från att det är en minoritet som bemannar staten och lever av staten. Problemet de sökte lösa gällde hur man skulle kontrollera denna minoritet och få den att ta direktiv från majoriteten, som man förutsatte var försörjd på annat sätt än med statsmedel.
I nästa valrörelse, 1985, följde vi rutinmässigt vad vi började kalla ”sektorsröstning”. Jag tittade också det nya ”skattefinansierade tjänstekomplexet” (SvD 23 juni 1986)
Vi har i Sverige fått ett skattefinansierat tjänstekomplex som skulle få den gamla överhetsstatens ämbetsmän att blekna. För nu finns inte bara jurister, lärare, officerare och präster. Den helt överväldigande delen av de offentliganställda är nybyråkrater och deras underlydande. Här finns arbetsförmedlare, barnstugeföreståndare, energirådgivare, fritidspedagoger, försäkringskassans handläggare av alla slag, jämställdhetsombud, kultursekreterare, skolkuratorer, sjukvårdsbyråkrater, sjukvårdsbiträden, socialassistenter, terapeuter av olika slag ungdomskonsulenter etc. etc. Listan av skattefinansierade yrken som tillkommit efter andra världskriget kunde fylla hela denna tidningssida.
Det var också värt att analysera skattefinansierade tjänstekomplexets organisationer och nätverk. Här fanns kommunförbund, kommuner och kommunalråd; landstingsförbund, landsting och landstingsråd; nybildade verk och myndigheter (eller nya avdelningar i gamla verk och myndigheter); i komplexet ingick AMS och de offentliganställdas fackföreningar.
Företrädare för det skattefinansierade tjänstekomplexet dominerar numera på socialdemokratiska partikongresser, de är i majoritet också på vänsterpartiet kommunisternas kongress, på folkpartiets landsmöte, på moderaternas stämma. Det har sedan några år var uppenbart både för den politiska journalistiken och för forskningen att våra politiska församlingar är ockuperade av det skattefinansierade tjänstekomplexets folk — riksdag, landsting, kommunfullmäktige. Det nya på 80-talet är att de offentligförsörjda också dominerar i väljarkåren (ibid).
De svenska statsvetarna var först skeptiska till att det skulle finas en sektorsröstning som kompletterade röstetalet från socialdemokratins klass- och löntagarröstning. Men så var det.
De konservativas vanliga budskap ”Sänk skatterna!” blir en allt tydligare bumerang när majoriteten av väljarna redan finns i den offentliga sektorn. Sänkta skatter betyder att deras offentliga arbetsplatser får minskad budget, ger sämre service, och framför allt måste dra ned på personal och göra offentliganställda arbetslösa. Skattesänkning som varit ett både sakligt och effektivt argument för de borgerliga i en tidigare era var fortfarande ett sakligt argument men alltmer kontraproduktivt i valrörelser med Sveriges nya sociala struktur i vilken den offentliga sektorn blivit den ofantliga sektorn också i antalet stödröstande. Med ekonomins rationalitet var skattesänkning högst motiverad. Men med politikens rationalitet var den självmål. Man måste lära sig att olika livsområden i samhället har sin egen rationalitet.
Opinion Polls
In the United States, public opinion polls on issues had been launched in 1935 by George H. Gallup and Elmo Roper, working independently of one another. The pioneering pollsters wanted to be relevant both to journalism and to politics. Their polls on issues quickly found a role in the democratic process. They adjusted their reporting by presenting percentages showing majority and minority views in their tables (to this day, polls for the media do not report factor or cluster analyses, nor do they penetrate latent structures of opinions, as is expected in academic research). After seventy years of polling it is well documented that pollsters have at times inspired and facilitated democratic processes and decisions (Lijphart 1999).
Opinion polls and the use of their results in journalism and lobbying leads to knowledge about how people think and feel, and is appropriately called "opinion research." They have no constitutional consequences. But unplanned by the fathers of democracy, polls have become an informal part of the democratic political process
Regular polls of electoral standing – also an innovation of Gallup and Roper – showing support for government and opposition and/or about the public’s confidence in elected leaders keep up the voters’ interest in politics between elections. And they become particularly relevant to elected politicians toward the end of term in office when they face re-election. Regularly the polls inform incumbents in office about the support they and their party have from the voters. These polls prepare the incumbents, if need be, for a most difficult phase in the democratic praxis: to peacefully and in an orderly manner leave office to the political opposition. And in reporting shifts in majority support, they tell the opposition that the time is coming when their rhetoric will face a practical agenda of political compromises, appointments to ministries and agencies, and all the hard work that goes with the business of governing. Without signals from polls the democratic transitions could be very chaotic.
A continuous reporting showing the standing of the government and the opposition in the eyes of the electorate undoubtedly affects the political process. In recent decades, published opinion polls have often impeded both the domestic democratic processes and diplomatic progress by rushing into print and to TV studios with poll results on issues that the public has not yet had a reasonable chance to be informed about and discuss, and about which they have not yet formed mature opinions. Such polls contribute to premature closure of debates and mislead political commentators, legislators, and diplomats (Yankelovich 1996). They are corrupted by the urgency and speed that are the life-blood of journalism, as well as by the built-in limitation of printing space and time slots. Frankly, opinion polls in the mass media and on web pages are nowadays often mere conversation pieces or entertainment for viewers and readers – not useful guidance for politicians and diplomats or good sources for social scientists.
The extent to which politicians in various democracies also use the findings of opinion research on political issues in their legislative work is an entirely different problem. It is an empirical question with different answers in different cases. The modus vivendi of the typical politician in a Western country is to follow their local or regional traditions, their own personal convictions, their party’s platform, but also internal discussions at party caucuses, leads from party activists, reports from government agencies, expert testimony, and suggestions given by lobbyists, as well as information from the media.
In this chorus of stimuli reaching a politician, polls on the public’s view of issues, when available, are but one influence of many. Possibly issue polls may be of increased concern to governing politicians when the electoral standing polls signal that re-election is in danger. Strangely enough, we do not yet have a systematic international research summary of the joint effects of electoral standing polls and issue polls.
It is a popular misconception that issue polls play a decisive role in legislation in democracies. In fact, in most democratic countries there are no polls published on most issues that legislators cope with in their daily work. Even in countries dense in polling, the details of the legislative work are not normally reflected in the published polls. The language of legislation is very different from the language of polling. The power of public opinion hits politics – and other human affairs – on a different level.
Democracy: A Recent but Victorious Form of Statecraft
In the course of the Twentieth Century, many instances occurred in which democracy supplanted other types of regimes, not only the old kingdoms of Europe. Several countries that were characterized by unlimited personal leadership became democratic, for example, Somoza’s Nicaragua. Many nations, such as Franco’s Spain, that once were under “authoritarian rule”, where power was exercised by a dictator through government bureaucracies, became democratic. Even nations that have been under “totalitarian rule” have been replaced by somewhat more democratic regimes. Stalin’s dictatorship through the Communist Party with its unrestrained ideological mission to rule the entire state apparatus is a case in point. Democracy became the victorious form of government toward the end of the 20th century, a winner among most disparate alternatives.
Traces of the old order were, of course, present in different democratic countries. Democratic parlance is not the same as democratic practice. In some nations with democratic constitutions leaders do not necessarily step down if the opposition gains a majority in an election. It is not self-evident to rulers in nations that have recently adopted democratic constitutions to relinquish their positions if the victorious majority contains sizable elements such as unruly students who have not yet grown full beards or illiterate village women. The acceptance of a universal franchise is a democratic virtue that requires time and effort to acquire. And to accept that a majority of voters shall decide who is to resign from office and who shall take office is far from self-evident to any inveterate rulers.
At the time of this writing, a functioning constitutional democracy is not more than a few decades old in most states. Actually, the world has had very brief experience of free and peaceful general elections, and of rulers stepping down when they lose elections, turning over their offices to the winners.
In the United States, democracy can count its age in centuries, at least if one has a generous definition of democracy. In a stricter sense, not all of the southern states have had a functioning system of competing parties in their elections longer than a few decades. In most countries in Latin America the first wave of democracy was supplanted by a period of military dictatorships. In Europe, democratic ideas have not infused the long history of the Continent for more than a century except in England, France, and Switzerland. However, in the latter country women have not had the vote longer than many countries in the Third World. In France, a democratic order was replaced by an autocracy three times. A setback with extreme consequences was the fall of the Weimar democracy that led to Hitler’s dictatorship of the Third Reich.
The world has had very brief experience of free, general elections, and of rulers stepping down when they lose elections. Given the democratic novelty, it is amazing that the system has attained such a universal appeal and legitimacy. We have left much behind us, and we talk of post-industrialism, post-materialism, post-communism, and we call our own era the post-modern. Some have even proclaimed the end of history, and view the present era as post-history. Yet democracy lives on. Hardly anyone in the first decade of the 21st century would speak of post-democracy. There is simply no legitimate alternative to this recent system of ruling countries.
The Constitution of Democracy
In the beginning, democracy was introduced without first clarifying the problem of popular rule. The champions of democracy won the debate anyway, for they could easily show the arbitrariness of the rules that granted certain peoples or groups special positions of power. The defenders of monarchies could be silenced by pointing out how admittedly incompetent, stupid monarchs like England’s George IV and France’s Louis XVI had demonstrated how absurd it was to give so much power to the heir of a throne. The proponents of privileges could be dismissed with the same argument. Why should having forebears who were admitted to the ranks of nobility entitle aristocrats to more power than farmers, tradesmen, and manufacturers who had just as much wealth and equivalent education? Why should workers be denied the franchise the year before they had attained a certain income but be considered to be responsible and entitled to vote when they had reached that income level? Why should women be denied the vote when men had it? All the curtailments of democracy could easily be viewed as tricks of the privileged to retain power and as contradictions in the prevalent electoral system.
The conclusion presented by Herbert Tingsten, a stellar Swedish political scientist and publicist, is valid: “In the debate, the argument for democracy has seemed to be less of an ideology than a critique of ideologies and traditions. This has meant a weakness insofar as democracy could be introduced without reflecting over and discussing its problems” (Tingsten 1945, p ??, italics supplied).
In a civilized state, political decisions require a broad base of "consent of the governed," and this may take some time to achieve. To avoid delays, decisions can be taken without full consensus by a majority of citizens. This was done in assemblies of all the citizens in some ancient Greek city-states.
In more recent centuries a different mechanism came into use: representatives of the citizens, but not each and every one, take decisions on behalf of all citizens. To repeat what we all know: in a modern democratic nation-state, domestic political issues are settled through legislation by representatives elected by majority rule whose decisions in the legislature also are based on majority rule. An open debate with guaranteed rights of free expression, both in the electorate and in the legislature precedes all decisions. Legislation is administered by government agencies and is enforced in independent courts of law. All this is formalized in a constitution.
Thus, elections with majority rule, representation, rule of law (not of men), division of powers, entrenched rights, and a written constitution are the cornerstones of the United States of America; its charter, drafted in 1787, had provisions for all this. The American Revolution, like the French, was carried out in the name of republicanism, not democracy. Revolutionary zeal was directed at the European kingdoms, and the achieved new order was democracy. This modern version of democracy is an original development, not a copy, or even an adaptation, of an ancient Greek order.
Public opinion polls on issues have found a role in the democratic process. Following the lead of George H Gallup, pollsters working for mass media adjust to the system of majority rule by reporting percentages showing majority and minority views in their tables; they do not produce factor or cluster analyses, nor do they penetrate latent structures of opinions like academics. Most of the time polls on issues facilitate democratic decisions. Sometimes pollsters impede the process by rushing to mass media with poll results on issues that the public has not yet had a chance to inform themselves about and discuss, and about which they have not yet formed mature opinions (Yankelovich 1996).
Unplanned Underpinnings of Democracy
Only when democracy was tried in practice, did we realize that it depended on underpinnings that were not parts of its original constitution.
The democracies existing in reality require, for example:
Rule of law. Government by law, not by men, must be in place for democracy to function. Legislators may be democratically chosen, but unless their laws are enforceable in professionally operated courts where the accused can meet his accuser, democracy may be as arbitrary and unjust as any other system of rule.
Guaranteed public openness of government operations.
Guaranteed private sphere for every citizen.
Voluntary associations. A plethora of groups and networks, located in society between the state and the households, in which people can form and express opinions without censorship is an underpinning of democracy. Of special importance are the associations and clubs with democratic bylaws that allow people to practice rule by elections in civil society before they practice it in general elections and in the legislature.
Political parties. The U.S. Constitution did not mention political parties. Nowadays most writers add a multiparty system among the prerequisites of a democracy. Freely established parties are voluntary associations that provide opportunities for hammering out alternative policies sheltered from the government commissars and thought police. They train people in politics and provide candidates for office.
Free media. A free discussion without censorship repression, not only in private settings, but also in public media is a prerequisite for an informed electorate. The free establishment of media requires a free market of all the goods and services that are needed for the free formation of opinion – printing presses, paper, radio and TV stations, Internet, etc.
Compulsory universal education based on enlightenment so that popular rule does not become mob rule. It is unreasonable to ask a population steeped in superstition and magic to take responsibility for a modern government.
Public opinion polling.
The last item, public opinion polls, is not normally found in the lists of requirements of democracy (see, for example, Lipset 19??). Unplanned by the fathers of democracy, polls have become an integral part of the democratic political process.
As we have seen, there is more to democracy than dike and aidos. But their tale is a beginning of man’s effort to understand the role of public opinion in human affairs. Ancient Athens had a prerequisite for rule by public opinion in that it abandoned the habit of citizens to bear swords by its. Ballots rather than bullets is the modern version of this credo. The hope of mankind is that organized violence (armed forces) should be restricted. However, a moment of reflection may make us conclude that organized violence may be used in rebellions against and wars against governments and groups who deny freedom of speech and opinion or those who use freedom of speech to entice violence against others.
Democracy and Education
Democracy in our western sense, as we have repeatedly said, is a very young variant of the art of governance. Only a handful of states can claim to have had a democracy that is centuries old, and many nations must still count their democratic governments in years, not decades. The expansion of democracy has been paralleled by the expansion of popular education. S.M. Lipset (1959, Chap. 2) was the first to empirically investigate a large amount of international material showing how the educational level is one of the prerequisites for and pillars of democracy.
The connection has, however, long been clear in democratic doctrine. General elections presuppose that citizens have a reasonable amount of knowledge of the issues. The franchise without education results in mob rule, not in democracy. A basic public education and the franchise go together.
This is the ideological background to why the education of children and young people in a democracy are obligatory and financed by taxes. There are, however, variations. The American Constitution forbids the use of taxes to finance schools under religious aegis. In England private schools do not receive any public funding; they exist on student fees and philanthropic donations. In countries such as Sweden and Denmark, private schools are financed through public means by a system of vouchers.
Providing Political and Civil Service Education in Schools
“The citizens of a state shall be educated in a way that is suitable to the constitution of the state,” wrote Aristotle in the Introduction to Book 8 of his utopia, The Republic. Above all, "the lawmakers shall pay attention to the education of youth, for if it is neglected the constitution will be harmed.” For education in the service of the city-state, differs depending on whether it is an autocracy, an oligarchy, or a democracy, according to Aristotle.
Whoever thinks that a scientist and philosopher like Aristotle would view the education of youth primarily as the acquisition of knowledge preparatory to further studies at has own (or Plato’s) academy would be entirely wrong. He saw education from the point of view of the state; entrance requirements and the selection of students for academic studies were details he does not even consider.
In our days, a basic public education and the franchise of a democracy go together. Democracy requires educated voters and thus education of children and young people in a democracy are obligatory and, whenever necessary, financed by taxes. There are, however, some variations. The American Constitution forbids the use of taxes to finance schools under religious aegis. In England private schools do not receive any public funding; they exist on student fees and philanthropic donations. In countries such as Sweden and Denmark, private schools are financed through public means by a system of vouchers. Students and their parents take the vouchers to the school or their choice, and if approved, the school gets a prescribed amount of money from the local government. The amount is somewhat less than the average cost per pupil in a public school, and the private school is not allowed to supplement it by student fees.
Modern democracy presupposes a firm belief in the value of every human being and in inviolable civil rights. In democracies people are agreed that force may only be exercised by the police and military, in accordance with law and the conventions of war. They are tolerant of the opinions of others, of free discussions, they have respect for minorities and for the laws that have come into being according to a democratic constitution with a multiparty system and majority rule in elections. And citizens in democracies have a workable knowledge of their constitution.
The United States is probably the only country where serious and systematic schooling in the Constitution is century-old and a self-evident subject in elementary schools. European countries do not have nearly such a detailed study of the histories of their constitutions and their contemporary manifestations.
The educational system in a real-life democracy must keep advanced training available in three areas that together make up a real-life democracy:
-
legal training for implementing the rule of law by police, courts, and correctional institutions,
-
political training for use in the representative system that controls legislation, and
-
negotiation training for use in diplomacy and international treaty-making.
In La démocratie en Amérique (1835-1840) Alexis de Tocqueville wrote that voluntary associations were schools for democracies. If his idea is still valid, schools ought to encourage students to participate in all kinds of democratically run clubs and other voluntary projects. They would, ideally, take place during the students’ extra-curricular time, not school time. But schools could schedule classroom hours to describe rules for the election of officers, the notification of meetings, and the establishment of an agenda for a meeting. They could show how democratic meetings are conducted, the election of a chair and determination of the order of speakers. They could teach the difference between points at issue and points of order. The students could practice setting up an electoral register and the order of voting between different motions and amendments. They could learn how to write and check minutes, read an auditor’s report, grant discharge.
Such practices in using the rules of democracy is a far more solid – and probably more boring – experience for students than used exercise of school democracy, i.e. allowing students to freely criticize the school administration and listening to whomever yells the loudest about which theme or project should be included in the curriculum. Or, a practice in writing “Letters to The Editor” to newspapers or compose protest fliers to pass around. When you ask a 15 year old what a democracy is common answers are "elections" and "demonstrations." Such answers indicate a very one-sided view that shows that both teachers and students are more influenced by what TV can dramatize than by political science.
Do schools in democratic countries rear citizens trained in democracy? Yes, of course, the schools rear pupils who can read, write and count, and they bring up pupils who cooperate with and show consideration for one another, and children who try to reason rationally. But schools in authoritarian and totalitarian regimes have also done so. However, if the question is limited to the rearing of democratic citizens in a stricter sense that is defined by constitutions and political practices, the answer for the United States would be a qualified Yes, for Europe, on balance, a qualified No.
Specifying a Problem
In classical works of social science, public opinion is usually conceived as a property of a collective, an expression of the collective’s conception of itself and its role in history. Individuals could have a more or less correct interpretation of this volonté générale, to use Rousseau’s term. If their interpretations were too deviant, they became viewed as being stupid, unaware, false, insane, or, at worst, criminal and a danger to society.
Eliminating the metaphysical qualities of volonté générale but otherwise following the lead of Rousseau, opinions divide into two well-known categories:
opinions we must express in order to be in a collective and represent it to others, and
other opinions that we may express without being disliked by, isolated in, or exiled from our collective.
The first category provides a basis for determining the consensus of opinion, for example, a national creed, a common religious confession, an oath of allegiance to the state. The second category provides the fuel for the differentiation of opinions, e.g. the cleavages on the issues of the day.
The amplification of the latter category has led to two phenomena. First we have the mechanisms of decision-making by casting votes in parliamentary assemblies and general elections. This voting leads to binding decisions in the form of legislation. This process of majority rule approximates John Locke’s ideal of a government based on “the consent of the governed,” a system believed to be the most cost effective and humane form governance.
Second, we have opinion polls and the use of their results in journalism and political lobbying. They give us knowledge about how people think and feel, and they are appropriately called "opinion research." This knowledge does not bind anybody as elections and voting do under democratic constitutions. But it is useful in decision-making and has achieved prominence in the life of modern democracies.
Rationalities in the Body Politic
The Civil Service: Keepers and Brokers
Civil Service and Street-Level Bureaucracies
Among the administrative bureaucrats we can distinguish a qualified category of "public officials" who are well-educated and legally accountable. We have described them as administrative bureaucrats and professional technocrats.
In the welfare states, however, Brokers are also found in so-called street-level bureaucracy. This grants more extensive powers to its functionaries, mostly in the handling of case decisions (Lipsky 1980). We believe it to be a general problem affecting, among others, the welfare sector that the traditional role of the public official in welfare states has for some decades now been replaced by lower administrative bureaucrats who carry out political decisions with less regard to competence, objectivity, impartiality, and self-control.
The Era of the Takers
In our terminology, the Makers in the economy and the Keepers in the body politic, that is, Weber’s capitalists and bureaucrats, dominated the first quarter of the twentieth century, but the Brokers and, even more, the Takers, have increasingly dominated the rest of the twentieth century, particularly in Western societies.
As we entered the twenty-first century, the 1900s were called the “century of the common man.” Others have called it the “the century of democratic man,” and cite the many entitlements people have won as the principal sign of progress in our time. The advances of political democracy, women’s liberation, the solidarity of the welfare state with the weaker members of society, and aid to poor nations are usually cited as examples to back up this claim. An indicator of the unprecedented position given to the common man is the proliferation of opinion polls.
A first analysis of the progress of the Takers was presented as early as 1929 by the Spanish philosopher Jose Ortega y Gasset under the title La rebelion de las masas. Since the beginnings of agriculture mankind has known that as ye sow so shall ye reap. The first generations of Europeans who left their farms, built colonial empires, and introduced industrialism were energetic, individualistic spirits who took charge of their own destinies. But the majority of Europeans of the twentieth century turned out differently. The average persons in modern society Ortega called the mass men. They and those below average he called “unqualified masses.” They did not demand much of themselves, but demanded all the more for themselves.
In Ortega y Gasset’s view, these people are ignorant about what the creating, conserving, and mediating institutions have done for their societies. In other words, they usually exist in blissful ignorance of all the efforts, investments, and systems that have given us a life full of comforts and freedom of choice. They seldom recognize that these blessings of civilization are the fruits of enterprising spirits, of their knowledge, techniques, and social innovations, which in turn depend on the energy, foresight, and resoluteness of these forerunners. Instead, they demand priority in receiving such blessings, as if they were theirs by right. The unqualified do not necessarily desire to become qualified; they only want the advantages of the qualified.
The unqualified masses consider that they have a natural right to receive the good things in life. The declaration of the rights of man of the United Nations (which was not in existence when Ortega y Gasset wrote) is a consummate catalogue of rights to the good things in life. But irrespective of whether rights are formalized or not, the unqualified masses insist that their comforts be provided, their wishes and impulses fulfilled.
Ortega y Gasset’s term “unqualified masses” has a negative connotation, and so has his notion that the masses have a psychology that is reminiscent of that of a spoiled child. I prefer to call them “Takers.” They are, objectively speaking, the takers of the cardinal values of society, including virtues and aspirations to ethical and good living. Brokers gained the most when democracy was introduced. They have been much repressed in earlier centuries, and their rise to prominence in the twentieth century is easy to defend. However, in terms of cardinal values, the other groups – Makers and Keepers – contribute more than do the Takers and Brokers.
This discrepancy leads inevitably to a conflict and debate on how much weight one should give to polls reporting overall majorities. Books like Robert Weissberg’s Polling, Policy and Public Opinion. The Case against Heeding the "Voice of the People" (2002) are bound to appear. Weissberg singles out polls on expanding social and medical welfare to the general population as unusable guides for politicians who are in the process creating a welfare policy. He argues that an expansion of welfare in the amounts supported by polls oversteps the borderline where the cost exceeds the benefit to society.
In a period when Takers reach visibility, the Brokers also rise in importance, particularly the helping brigades, who serve the Takers. At the height of the expansion of the Danish welfare state this phenomenon was analyzed by Jorgen C. Rich (1973) in a book he – without being too facetious – called The Ruling Class. The new ruling class consists of state employees in the social sector, higher education and the health services. Like all ruling classes they command a great deal of the resources of society. Their power is based, not on ownership, but on their capacity for creating a compelling social ideology of radical egalitarianism with roots in a humanitarian ethic of support to "all the weak in society." Elements in their ideology in Denmark included a rejection of manual work, fear of unemployment, illness, and death. It manifests itself in perfectionism and universal appeal ("we may all be weak one day"), and a social criticism that protects the interests of the helping classes through good salaries, limited work effort, and a prodigious expansion of the public sector.
It is in the nature of the case that Takers should love publicly financed welfare, and when asked, they naturally want more of it. The costs of all their combined wishes could force governments to raise taxes and /or borrow money to a level that the Keepers and others think is unsafe. It is actually not very safe for politicians to heed a solo voice of Takers when it comes to welfare policy. I hope that pollsters some day can learn to sample and report separately the opinions in the four groups. A quartet of these four voices, Makers, Keepers, Brokers, and Takers, is more worth listening to than a unison national majority dominated by the ubiquitous Takers.
A reasonable guide to policy from a public opinion poll may be at hand when a policy is supported by the majority of all interviewed, as well as majorities within Makers, Keepers, Brokers, and Takers.
I hasten to say that this is a suggestion for the future reporting of polls, not a suggestion to amend democratic constitutions. A wise democratic government should not need directives in a constitution to listen to the quartette of these voices; it knows that it must hear and respect them all. Unfortunately the democratically elected rulers are sometimes ignorant of how their societies actually function; the public notices this particularly during the initial time in office of the newly elected. No nation, democratic or not, can survive without paying attention to the minorities who are Makers, Keepers, and Brokers.
To insure that these minorities can fulfill their essential functions, a society may, of course, develop constitutional politics so that it becomes governed by a parliament of four chambers, each representing a grand function: Makers, Keepers, Brokers, and Takers. Four estates of a different kind, the Nobility, Clergy, Burgers, and Peasants, once ruled Europe. This worked well for several centuries, particularly in countries that gave also the Peasant estate some voice
on taxation.Political Accords within States
Before looking at the process of achieving international political accords with support of public opinion, let us briefly review the more familiar process of achieving domestic accords with public support.
In a civilized state, political decisions require a broad base of “consent of the governed,” and this may take some time to achieve. To avoid delays, decisions can be taken without full consensus by a majority of enfranchised citizens. This was done in assemblies of the citizens in some ancient Greek city states.
In more recent centuries a different mechanism came into use: representatives of the citizens, not their full number, take decisions on behalf of all citizens. In a modern democratic nation-state, domestic political issues are settled through legislation by representative politicians elected by majority rule whose decisions in the legislature also are based on majority rule. An open debate with guaranteed rights of free expression, both in the electorate and in the legislature precedes all decisions. The legislation is administered by government agencies and is enforced in independent courts of law. All this is formalized in a constitution.
Thus, elections with majority rule, representation, rule of law (not of men), division of powers, entrenched rights, and a written constitution are the cornerstones of the United States of America; its charter drafted in 1787 had provision for all this. The American Revolution, like the French, was carried out in the name of republicanism, not democracy. The revolutionary zeal was against the European kingdoms, and the achieved new order was democracy. This modern version of democracy is an original development, not a copy of or adaptation of an ancient Greek order.
The US Constitution did not mention political parties. Nowadays most writers add a multi-party system among the pre-requisites of a democracy.
The slogan of democracy “the people shall decide” must be followed by the question “Who are the people?” The answer may be: “Those who have domiciliary rights within these boundaries.” The boundaries are set by geography, history, and often by war. The limitation of democracy as a mechanism to solve conflicts is its inability to determine the boundaries that are its base. Rational democratic order must therefore be complemented by the rules for diplomacy, war, the writing of treaties that enable territories for new constitutions.
Public opinion polls on issues have found a role in the democratic process. Pollsters adjust to the system of majority rule by reporting percentages showing majority and minority views in their tables; they do not produce factor or cluster analyses, nor do they penetrate latent structures of opinions like academics. Most of the times pollsters facilitate democratic decisions, sometimes they impede them by rushing to TV with poll results on issues that the public has not yet had a chance to inform themselves about and discuss, and about which they have not yet formed mature opinions.
The Central Zone and Democracy
Democracy can be viewed as a protest against the domination of the central zone. Democracy demands that the citizens, and only the citizens, be the ruling class. The rules of democracy concern political power: other parts of the central zone are not directly affected by election results. Political scientists today reject all alternatives to democracy. They may talk about post-modern societies and post-materialist societies and post-nation-state societies, but they are reluctant to consider post-democratic societies.
When Edward Shils, the inventor of the concept “central zone,” heard someone say “political scientist” he used to interject “with the scientist understood as in Christian Scientist” (Epstein 1997, p. 2). In the church of democracy, political scientists are priests, per se an honorable calling. However, the theory of the central zone is a science in the true sense of the word; it concerned a confirmed proposition, a law of nature. The practice of democracy must be modified if it is to survive when the force of nature called and the central zone impacts collide with the ideology of democracy. And this, in my view, is what has happened. Unanimity about democracy holds firm only so far as agreement that no one ought to rule against the will of the people. After that, opinions diverge.
The oldest line of thinking asserts that in a democracy governments ought to follow the will of a majority of the electorate. This is still is stated in many schoolbooks. But political scientists are contemptuous of this view; they call it “Gallup democracy” or populism.
Political scientists’ first reframing of the idea of democracy as a realization of the will of the people follows this reasoning: society changes and is modernized; new classes, needs, and interest groups emerge; political activists in these groups form their own political demands; they organize into parties; democratically elected politicians then implement the activists’ ideas, through, for example, reorganizations, subsidies or benefits in legislation. The leader is not supposed to be a commander but rather a chairman who “listens to his party.” If the government has its own agenda, its issues must first receive consent in the party organization before they can be implemented. Many political scientists have abandoned this view of the democratic process, but when politicians also do so they can run into trouble, and the political activists may claim that “they no longer recognize their party.”
A second way of thinking about the functions of democracy was put forth by the economist Josef Schumpeter (1942). He saw democracy as a competition among élites, with the electorate acting as the jury. The main contents of politics are decided by the ideas of the élites, that is, the ideas of the central zone, not by the jury. This notion fitted particularly well in the European scene in the last century when a landed aristocracy defended their privileges, the clergy guarded moral values, agrarians advocated protectionism, industrial and business élites championed free trade, and strong labor movements demanded welfare rights and a greater share of the national patrimony. When a country becomes democratic, the public becomes the jury in these struggles and decides which élite is to rule.
A third line of thought has been developed by several current historians, political scientists, and sociologists. The title of the book Bringing The State Back In reveals the theme (Evans, Rueschemeyer, Skocpol, 1985). Research on mature democracies shows that the decisive élite is the politicians themselves together with government servants. The state, the staffs of governmental departments and the recruitment of their heads influence politics more than anything else. Political change would thus depend less on changes in popular will, or on how elites in business, science, religion and the arts think, and more on how the government itself develops and influences the party apparatus and the situation of government employees. This is where concrete political innovation takes place. Democracy is redefined to mean an acceptance of this state of affairs, but with the requirement that the results of this innovation be submitted to the electorate in periodic general elections.
Even such minimal forms of democracy have some value. As Karl Popper (1997) has pointed out, they lead to peaceful transfers of power.
Political Accords between States
The process of domestic rule by consent of the governed may seem slow and cumbersome. Compared to international political decision-making the process of making decisions within a nation-state is fast and well organized. International political issues are not settled by legislation. On the international political scene, issues are settled by treaties negotiated by diplomats who are appointed by states. A treaty between sovereign states cannot be achieved by majority rule, it requires consensus. While usually based on a negotiated compromise, the treaty is concluded by the full consensus between the parties on the content; a majority vote will not due. A treaty is negotiated behind closed doors without public transparency and debate. A treaty between states is implemented by some form of intergovernmentalism.
Diplomats, and ministers and bureaucrats in charge of rules for domestic fishing, may meet with colleagues from neighboring countries around a common sea. They negotiate a treaty on fishing quotas to ensure future fishing. If the treaty on fishing in an international waterway is to be supervised by the ministers in the treaty-making powers, the meetings of these fishing ministers are the intergovernmental process. If they set up a committee with staff to regularly review and report on the issues of the treaty this committee becomes the intergovernmental agency. The supervision of a treaty, if any, is thus usually handled by some ad hoc arrangement between states, Only occasionally it is entrusted to a permanent organization such as the International Atomic Energy Agency for the non-proliferation treaty of atomic weapons.
The extent of intergovernmentalism is the best measure we have of the globalization of the body politic.
Treaty-making is the counterpart to legislation on the international level. Short of war, it is the only way we presently have to globalize the body politic. The interpretation of treaties may be facilitated by international courts. The settling of controversies over treaties may be aided by mediations. Most international treaties, however, are unenforceable. They depend for their survival on an understanding among the signatories that it is in their own long-term national interest to stick to the treaty (cf. Blix 1960).
Treaty-making is a slow and uncertain process. So far, the polity of the world does not keep pace with the globalization of economy, science and technology, and the popular arts.
Figure 22.2. A comparisons of democratic law making and international treaty making
Domestic Legislation
International Treaty Making
Rules for decision making
Majority rule both to and within the legislature
Consensus between all diplomatic teams involved
Transparency
Open debate
Closed doors
Rights
Freedom of expression
Diplomatic immunity
Implementation
Domestic bureaucracies
Intergovernmental agencies
Enforcement
Independent courts available for most issues
Mediation, international courts for a few issues
Speed of process
Reasonably slow
Very slow
The Twentieth Century was the century of domestic democracy. The Twenty-first Century starts as a the century for international diplomacy. Such is the logic for the body politic during the globalization process.
The European Union
Changes in the body politic to cope with global issues seem quite slow compared to the change in economy, science, and art. However, regional economic and political networks are reaching into several countries. The European Union takes on several features of a state, and may perhaps some day be called a "market state" since it is formed around a common market. Politics, however, remains essentially national. Opinion formation is by en large national and the often tenuous legitimacy of international political institutions is by enlarge based in the nation states.
Furthermore, the time seems to have passed when it took the resources of a state to destroy another state. With modern weapons of mass destruction a borderless international terror network can probably do what was once the exclusive power of a state. /To be moved/
The most important post-war political process in Europe which resulted in the European Union did not follow the rationality of democracy. The Coal and Steel Union, like its successors the EEC and the EU shaped by the Treaty of Rome of 1957, were the fruit of the rules of diplomacy, not those of democracy. The father of the European integration process, Jean Monet, did not believe one could achieve European integration through democratic elections and parliamentary decisions. He developed a different model.
A commission was appointed to implement a foreign policy agreement on European cooperation and to develop it further. If the commission’s developmental proposals are approved by the Council of Ministers from the countries that are party to the agreement, it becomes law in the countries that belong to the Union. A special court has jurisdiction over questions that concern the application of the law. National parliaments cannot change the law. A democratic deficit was built into the EU from its very inception.
In the 1980s there were strong efforts to change the EEC into a more federal form: the so called Werner plan for an economic and monetary union, the Davignon plan for a common defense, and the Tinderman plan for European integration of social welfare. But the EU remains a confederation with strong federalist components. A European Parliament was added to give the construction a democratic decoration. By the turn of the century, it has got its milk teeth in the form of co-determination with the Commission, but its elections are often fiascos; as a rule, turnout is low, and its election campaigns are dominated by domestic issues, not EU issues.
Debunking Magic in the Body Politic
Nothing prevents rulers and parties steeped in magic and myths to have full use of modern technology, including weaponry. The Nazi ideology was full of magic. With missiles on London and gas chambers for Jews and Gypsies, the Nazis lived out their myths to devastating effects. Ernst Cassirer himself , the pioneer student of mythical thinking ended his life in the United States as a refugee from Hitler. He felt called upon to explain to his new country why his high German culture had succumbed to Nazism. His posthumously published book called the Myth of the State (1946) showed how Nazis lived by myths containing a mixture of the magic of race, hero worship, and old Germanic gods. Defensive bilge against Jews, disdain of humanitarian values, and spumatic rituals such as “Heil Hitler” were added to the brew. Cassirer argued that Friedrich Hegel's conception of the omnipotence of the state and the insignificance of all other realms of society had opened the gates for this nonsense. If so, an antidote is a conception of a many-splendored society in which the body politic is no more significant than are other realms: economy, science, morality, religion, and art.
The fifth principle of magic, formulas for quick fixes, abound in politics. Georges Sorel (1850) proposed "the general strike" that would bring the old society to a stand-still and create conditions for a new society with higher morality in which the working classes hold power. Jeffrey Sachs (1994) expected that "chock therapy" practically overnight would create wealth for all in Poland. This is an economic policy that involves an immediate withdrawal of the state from all ownership of business, from any subsidies to branches, from control of prizes and currencies, from restrictions on imports, and from charging customs and other fees related to trade.
We shall deal with the military use of violence in Book 3. But we may already here note that politicians who believe in magic are particularly dangerous if they get modern weapons. When weapons nowadays are more effective than the bombs over London and Dresden ever were in World War II, one may have reason for a firm new policy. For the sake of humanity, any leadership believing in magic must be stripped of weapons of mass destruction.
Civic Freedom
The Glorious Revolution in England established an unwritten constitution that the king was no longer above the law. Taxes could not be imposed without the consent of parliament. None could be deprived of their freedom of movement and/or property without judicial proceedings under the law. No deprivation of freedom whatsoever was permitted for the purpose of stifling peaceful opposition. Freedom of the press and religious toleration were to prevail. Certain principles were to be inviolable, although from other points of view their violation might appear beneficial. Regulations prescribed by the authorities and law courts were thus to be maintained, even in cases where they favored Crown opponents and the accused. In other words, the main thrust was directed against all forms of arbitrary government. Emergent English liberalism stood for what we nowadays call the rule of law, civic rights, and freedoms.
Democracy specified the political freedoms. There must be freedom of information so that citizens can keep informed, and, through discussion and debate, be able to decide whether they want a change in government. In a democracy elections must therefore take place in an environment where there is freedom of speech, of assembly, and the right to demonstrate. Each adult is to have a vote and one vote only. The ballot is to be secret.
From Public Opinion to Laws
There are few documented steps between polled opinion and legislation in democracies. Some steps in the linkage between polls and legislation that have and have not been subject to research are:
The extent and trend with which political issues on the agenda of a legislature have been subject to political opinion polling (No research known to me). Most legislation in most democracies concern topics that have probably not been preceded by any polls.
The extent and trend with which polls published as news becomes cited by editorial writers (e.g. Holmberg 19xx for Sweden), columnists (No research known to me), and intellectuals (No research known to me).
The extent and trend with which polls are invoked in messages by candidates in their campaigns for political office (No research known to me). There may be no explicit such references to polling results even in campaigns by candidates or parties who have used polls in preparing their campaigns.
The extent and trend with which polls are cited in memoranda preparatory to legislation in political think tanks (No research known to me) and in party headquarters (No research known to me).
The extent and trend with which poll findings are invoked in debates or hearings in the US Congress (Traugott 2000) and in Germany, United Kingdom, Switzerland and new Zeeland (Hardmeier et al. 2005).
The overlap of opinions in polls of voters for a party in the electorate and opinions in polls of the members of the parliamentary party (e.g. Holmberg 1974 for Sweden).
The perception of legislators of the opinion among their constituencies (e.g. Hedlund et al. 1972 for the United States).
The extent and trend to which voting by members of US Congress is congruent with polling results among their constituents (e.g. Miller & Stokes 1963).
The extent and trend to which final legislation enacted agrees with national public opinion polls (e.g. Brettschneider 1995 in Germany for the period 1949-90) and comparatively in 36 countries with somewhat different democratic systems (e.g. Ljiphart 1999).
Hopefully, this list will soon stand corrected and the many references (No research known to me) will be exchanged to (Author Year).
Steps 8 and 9 above, so called “congruence studies,” are the most common research projects in this area; they are popular topics for doctoral theses. Few authors, however, realize that a mere congruence between poll results and legislation does not imply that polls showing “the will of the people” have been a cause of the laws passed by Congress or Parliament. The same events in the outside world may have caused both the poll responses and the legislative response. To talk about causal links from polls to laws we need to have research on intermediate steps, if any, between the polled opinions and the laws enacted by the politicians.
Public Opinion and Treaty-making
Public opinion research has rarely dealt with treaties. One exception is the treaties on Panama Canal between Panama and the United States. In Panama CID-Gallup, a Central American affiliate of the Gallup Organization in Princeton NJ, polled for the newspaper El Panama America. In the United States many pollsters besides Gallup had surveys. They all indicated that majorities of the US respondents were against turning over control of the Canal Zone to Panama.
One early poll was discredited for poor home work in writing the questionnaire; every fifth question in a 1977 survey of the Panama Treaty contained factual errors (Smith & Hogan 1987). The episode indicates that opinion research requires extra effort both by pollsters and respondents. Diplomatic issues are complicated, often inadequately published in popular media – as we noted, the give and take of negotiations are secret – and thus unknown to the public.
The rejection of the Panama Canal Treaty by the public bothered Cyrus Vance, U.S. secretary of state from 1977 to 1980, under President Carter, who had been instrumental in negotiating the Treaty. Along with Daniel Yankelovich he had founded Public Agenda in 1975 and served as chairman of its board. This organization pioneered in methods to make polls useful to politicians. The researchers at Public Agenda went to a local community, took an initial poll on the Treaty and got the expected negative results, then presented local papers and associations with material on the treaty and its history, and arranged some public discussions of the pros and cons among the local citizens. At least some parts of the community became aware of the issues faced by the diplomats in the secret negotiations. A new poll at the end of the project indicated majority support of the Treaty in this community. A sense moral may be that polls on treaties are meaningful only if the public is retrospectively informed about the positions and turns in the negotiations, not only of the final outcome (Yankelovich 1991).
Polling for the negotiators to aid the treaty making process itself is rare. Such polls are secret as are the negotiations. Georg Baron von Stackelberg, founder EMNID in Germany, had some major victories as a political consultant. For example in 1955, when the long-standing issue in European politics on the future of Saarland, which had been administered by the French since the war, was negotiated between Mendes-France of France and Adenauer of West Germany, von Stackelberg provided his country with a secret weapon. What the people of Saarland wanted was a wide-open question, but in France it was generally held that they felt at home with the French and had most of their economic ties with the French. von Stackelberg quickly and confidentially organized carloads of interviewers from West Germany checking the popular preference in Saarland. At the negotiating table Adenauer could comfortably agree to a referendum. Armed with EMNID’s secret poll, he knew that such a solution would favor his country. (von Stackelberg 1975, pp 73-75.)
The work by Colin Irvin (2002) on the settling of the sectarian violence in Northern Ireland stands out as ground-breaking. He polls confidentially for both parties in peace negotiations, and the results are used to ease frozen stands and build courage to take compromise positions among the negotiators.
Federations: Intergovernmentalism inside a Sovereign State
The terms "confederation" and "federation" were once synonymous, denoting simply a league of peoples united by treaty for some purpose. In the history of the United States, the meanings of the two words split in 1789. Up to that date the region was usually called a confederation, a union of colonies, each with its provincial government. After that date it was more often called a federation; it became an ever closer union of provincial states bound together by a common federal government, in addition to the still existing strong provincial governments of member states. Even after the revolution, one could argue – following the lead of Jefferson – that states had the right to opt out of laws and programs enacted by the United States Congress. This right was not definitely abandoned until Lincoln defeated the southern states in the civil war. Then one could truly speak of the United States, the federation.
The majority in a federation cannot insist upon full majority rule. It must make clear to the minorities that they are so valuable that they, as collectivities, have the same rights as the majority – and sometimes even the right of veto over the majority. Thus the constitution of the United States gives each state in the union, regardless of its size, two senators. The electoral college, a federal institution, grants the presidency to a candidate that meets the rules of federalism, not the rules of total popular vote. Henry Steele Commager, the American historian, maintained that no form of government is as difficult as that of a federation. The difficulties were manifested for all to see when the Union was sundered by the Civil War and by the inability of the confederation formed by the South to survive. The success of the United States as a federation is a greater achievement than the Pax Americana and is a far more complicated process than the creation of America’s fantastic wealth.
The complications of federations can increase further by giving members unequal rights. In post-Franco Spain, for example, Catalonia is less tightly tied to Madrid than is Andalusia.
A federation breathes through intergovernmentalism, through domestic diplomacy and negotiations between its semi-independent provinces. In a federation there are not only the usual consultations between a chief executive, his or her cabinet, the leaders of political parties, and parliamentary delegations. Regular meetings are also held between the provincial chiefs (called governors or prime ministers), and between the executive of the federation (called president or prime minister) and the provincial chiefs. At a lower level there are continuous meetings between department heads, work groups, and individual civil servants from the various governments.
Accountability to the electorate and transparency to the public of the decision process are difficult in simple democracies. In a federation with developed intergovernmentalism they are formidable problems. They easily create the feeling among the public that there is a democratic deficit.
The delicate balance of power in a federation is threatened by a bull in the china shop, the modern practice of national opinion polls. Publication of nationwide poll results, may make the decisions reached at the federal level appear devious and undemocratic. Pollsters who like to think of themselves as servants to the political process need to mend their ways in reporting opinions in federations and routinely publish their findings also at the regional level.
Intergovernmental Ecology
Very rarely do opinion polls reach into intergovernmentalism. A paradigm of an international poll of an issue crossing national borders is The Health of the Planet Survey (Dunlap et al. 1993). It is also called the George H. Gallup Memorial Survey because it was conducted in honor of Dr Gallup who had died in 1984 and members of Gallup International donated one million dollar worth of field work to its execution. But it differs from the early international Gallup polls in that it is not a scattering of topics of journalistic interest, but a broad piece of social research with the entire questionnaire devoted to one and the same public issue. This survey encompasses environmental concerns in 24 major nations, 11 classified as high income nations by the World Bank and 13 covering the remaining categories of medium, and low income nations. Previous opinion research on environmental issues stemmed mainly from Europe, North America and Japan and created and supported a conception that only publics in rich and highly educated countries developed deep concerns about the environment.
The interviewing began with the classical George Gallup question —
before respondents were aware of the survey's particular emphasis on
environmental issues —
"What do you think is the most important problem facing our nation today?" The
publics thus define the issues, not the researchers and their sponsors. Among
the industrialized nations, the percentages volunteering environmental problems
as their nation's most serious problem ranged from a low of 3 percent in Great
Britain to a high of 39 percent in the Netherlands. There were no such high
numbers in economically developing nations, but most of them showed more
widespread concern for the environment than the British.
Another mark of quality questioning is the qualifying of public priorities by taking into accounts not only their appealing consequences but also other less appealing consequences and negative results. Most everybody is otherwise against war, for clean air and water, et cetera. In the Health of the Planet Survey respondents were asked whether "protecting the environment should be given priority, even at the risk of slowing down economic growth," or whether "economic growth should be given priority, even if the environment suffers to some extent." Here the percentages choosing environmental protection exceed those choosing economic growth in every nation except Nigeria, and majorities choose environmental protection in all but Nigeria, India, and Turkey. There is not a major difference between the industrialized and the developing nations in emphasis on environmental protection over economic growth. The widespread assumption that residents of poor nations are willing to accept environmental degradation in return for economic growth is not supported by the survey. Overall, the researchers conclude, that citizens of the developing nations are only slightly less enthusiastic in their support for environmental protection at the expense of economic growth. Pluralities in fifteen nations (absolute majorities in seven) said that government has the primary responsibility to protect the environment. The exceptions are Poland, Korea, the Netherlands, and Finland where the publics assigned primary responsibility for environment to business and industry, and in Chile, Mexico, Uruguay, Brazil, and Switzerland, where primary responsibility was assigned by pluralities to citizens and citizens groups.
The international characteristic of many environmental problems was illuminated by questions on educational and technological assistance between countries. Most interesting is that majorities of citizens in both industrialized and developing nations support the establishment of an international agency to set environmental policy with authority to rule over national policy, Residents of the developing nations are only slightly less favorable toward such an agency than are those living in the industrialized nations. Only in Brazil did a majority reject this intergovernmentalism.
Here we see a qualification of the rule of thumb that no one wants to be ruled by strangers, everyone prefers to be ruled by their local kind. The general public will accept rulings from intergovernmental bodies on issues involving the survival of the globe as we know it. Here remains, however, the resistance from the built-in reluctance of national governments to international schemes that reduces their authority.
Rewards in the Polity
In the contemporary polity, the reward pattern centers on symbols of position, such as titles and uniforms, on constant publicity and evaluation by mass media, on approval from cheering masses, on ceremonial rights and decorations. Successful men may also have cities, roads, bridges, public buildings, acts of legislation, and the like named in their honor; they may have statues, portraits, and memorial plaques created to commemorate their deeds. An ultimate evaluation, here as in other fields, may be the judgment of future historians.
Chapter 23
The Realm of Morality: A Search for Virtue
This chapter is incomplete and unedited and needs reorganization
The Compassionate are welfare-minded people who practice a lifestyle of doing welfare and doing good. They are reformers with ethics and virtue as their lodestars. Or, they are Good Samarians acting spontaneously to help when they see sufferings. Their self-image is that of a person who aims to act decently, support acts of decency, and who, in return, has a clean conscience. Humanitarian movements, social welfare agencies, voluntary organizations and religious or secular charities are the anvils for their good deeds, not to speak of the many sacrifices made to aid members of their own families.
In the Judeo-Christian tradition morality is a part of religion and ethics a branch of theology. In Greek and Roman civilization ethics was a branch of philosophy.
The slow development of an independent life sphere of morality represents an apparent weakness in the modern Western social fabric. One cannot claim that morality is as well developed as art, science, religion, business and governance. In large measure morality in Europe and its former Christian colonies still exists within the confines of religion.
The entire Western world is now trying to make up for this deficit of strong independent institutions of morality. Ethical committees at hospitals and research institutions, ethical watchdogs at financial markets, ethical ombudsmen at corporations and the media, ethical codes for the professions – all are under way. But the latter are mini-ethics adjusted to be embedded in other life spheres, not the realm of morality in its own right for the creation of virtue. In the growing concerns for welfare, environment, animal rights, and peace we may, however, sense the emergence of genuine sphere of morality. The contours of a realm of morality is apparent, and it comes out organized under the same categories as other realms based on language. (Figure 23.1)
Figure 23.1. Morality in Society
|
6. |
Societal Structures |
Societal Functions |
||||||||
|
Organi- |
Network |
Media |
inside realms |
between realms |
||||||
|
zations |
with |
with |
Create |
Preserve |
Disperse |
Receive |
Export |
Import values |
||
|
with |
Parti- |
Audi- |
the cardinal value of virtue |
|||||||
|
Members |
cipants |
ences |
Maker |
Keeper |
Broker |
Taker |
Provider |
Procurer |
||
|
B |
Symbol-type |
J |
K |
L |
M |
N |
O |
P |
Q |
R |
|
|
Emotive |
Civil organiza-tions
Institutions for sick, handi- capped, elderly, child care
Guidance agencies
|
Donors of time and money
Moral movements for
|
Appeals |
Creators of high norms for inter- personal relations, for health care, for dangerous tech-nologies, for environ-ment
|
Ethicists |
Practicing
Carers of |
Decent people |
Ethics counce-lors |
|
|
prescriptions |
Persons and organi- zations on the outlook to other realms for something beneficial for morality e.g.support from religious leaders, politicians |
|||||||||
|
A |
Realm |
|||||||||
|
|
MORALITY |
|||||||||
|
C |
Lifestyle: |
|||||||||
|
|
Welfare-Minded |
|||||||||
|
D |
Cardinal Value |
|||||||||
|
|
Virtue |
|||||||||
|
E |
Stratification: |
|||||||||
|
|
Rectitude |
|||||||||
|
F |
Reward System: |
|||||||||
|
|
Testimonials |
|||||||||
|
G |
Rationality: |
|||||||||
|
|
Ethics |
|||||||||
|
H |
Type of Freedom: |
|||||||||
|
|
Freedom of conscience |
|||||||||
|
I |
Spontaneous Order |
|||||||||
|
|
Unplanned civilities |
|||||||||
The letters marking the rows are those found in a summary of the various language-products in society called Table of Societal Realms in Chapter 9. The letters after "I" continue as columns to make space in the center for some illustrative examples.
Figure 23.2. Semiotics of Virtue

Hypocrisy is the homage which vice renders to virtue. [Fr., L'hypocrisie est un
hommage que le vice rend a la vertu.] - Francois De La Rochefoucauld ..
Bo Anderson (2005) argues effectively that the concept of "virtue" is more important than contemporary social scientists admit. It has had several meanings in the course of history. Plato's word for virtue is arete. It means excellence in important pursuits, doing well. It slides easily into being good at achieving any cardinal value. But the Greeks includes also physical achievements in being virtuous. Plato does not restricted the term to humans; the brave soldier and the good cook have arete, but also animals may respond to fear by standing their ground and fighting, thus showing arete. In the same vain, Aristotle thought that much of what we call courage in human beings is also shown by animals. But adult humans have also what animals do not, proairesis, a capacity for deliberate choice into which one can also take others than oneself into account. Wherever this faculty of deliberate will is involved we can talk about specific human virtues.
Machiavelli may seems to equate virtue with the characteristics of great leaders that make them prevail. His term “virtue” does not always easily map into the “arete” of Plato, or "proairesis" of Aristotle. Sometimes, says Anderson, it seems to mean no more than “manly strength,” particularly in coping with unique historical opportunities when rise-to-occasion politics is called for.
The search for virtue has often ended in enumerations, which was the simplest way our intellect can bring order out of chaos. In Plato's Republic (the fourth book) the four classical virtues were Wisdom, Justice, Courage, Moderation. This list was enlarged by Christianity with the three Pauline virtues: Faith, Hope, and Charity, making a total of seven. They were counterbalanced by the seven deadly sins: Pride, Avarice, Lust, Anger, Envy, Gluttony, and Sloth. One can follow the fate of the seven virtues and sins through the art and history of ideas from the Middle Ages and up to the present time. They are portrayed in words and in images. Rising our sight to other civilizations than the European, the enumeration of virtues gets longer. For example, from Confucius we learn the virtues of Li: filial fidelity, benevolence, and fellow feeling. From Lao Tze we learn the virtue of Tao, the unperturbed poise at all turns in life, somewhat similar to the stoic virtues of Antiquity.
Moses on the Mountain of Sinai
In the Jewish religious myth Moses steps down from the mountain Sinai carrying a tablet with God’s Ten Commandments. These rules applied to all Israelites. They addressed the problems of a relatively undifferentiated nomadic people traveling through a desert landscape dreaming of a land of milk and honey.
But do they apply to all people at all times? In the 1970s, professor Jan Kerkhofs SJ of the Catholic University of Leuven in Belgium began planning for a study of European values to be carried out in the ten states that at that time were members of the European Union (EEC). He was less interested in avant garde values and more interested in how much of the European heritage of values from Jerusalem remained relevant, and whether any alternative meanings had replaced those of Christianity. He literally set out to read to representative samples of European respondents each one of the Ten Commandments and ask whether it was applicable today. He received funding from a wealthy Catholic business family, and could set up a separate European Value Systems Study Group Foundation with his Dutch colleague Ruud de Moor. The survey was a success and was developed and repeated with additional countries, also non-European, in four waves before the turn of the century. By that time an umbrella organization headed by Ronald Inglehart, The World Values Surveys, was in place at the University of Michigan. By then the researchers had more trivial priorities.
In Figure 23.2 are the results of the interviewing on the Decalogue by Kerkhofs' team of opinion researchers. The numbers are percentages of adults who say that the command applies fully today.
Figure 23.3. Acceptance of the Ten Commandments in Western Europe in 1979
|
|
Spain |
|
France |
Belgium |
Holland |
Germany |
UK |
Ireland |
Denmark |
Sweden |
Finland |
|
1. You shall have no other gods before Me |
48 |
68 |
30 |
47 |
40 |
45 |
48 |
80 |
45 |
30 |
44 |
|
2.
|
52 |
66 |
24 |
42 |
49 |
50 |
43 |
56 |
29 |
32 |
31 |
|
3.
|
38 |
51 |
20 |
33 |
24 |
29 |
25 |
68 |
13 |
16 |
25 |
|
4. Honor your parents |
75 |
91 |
67 |
73 |
69 |
72 |
83 |
77 |
62 |
61 |
65 |
|
5. |
81 |
96 |
80 |
80 |
82 |
88 |
90 |
93 |
90 |
90 |
79 |
|
6. |
58 |
62 |
48 |
61 |
50 |
64 |
78 |
85 |
67 |
69 |
67 |
|
7. |
78 |
93 |
69 |
76 |
79 |
81 |
87 |
88 |
84 |
88 |
78 |
|
8. |
56 |
88 |
67 |
61 |
57 |
73 |
78 |
86 |
74 |
83 |
61 |
|
9. |
65 |
64 |
52 |
65 |
65 |
62 |
79 |
85 |
72 |
73 |
65 |
|
10. |
68 |
73 |
62 |
69 |
59 |
70 |
79 |
87 |
72 |
69 |
65 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Religious
commandments
(1,2,3) |
46 |
62 |
25 |
41 |
38 |
41 |
39 |
68 |
29 |
26 |
33 |
|
Family morality |
67 |
73 |
57 |
67 |
61 |
67 |
80 |
84 |
68 |
68 |
66 |
|
Civil commandments |
72 |
92 |
72 |
72 |
73 |
81 |
85 |
89 |
83 |
87 |
73 |
Source: First European Values Survey.
The first three commandments have religious content. They deal with monotheism, incantation, and Sabbath. They had very low acceptance outside of Catholic Italy and Ireland. The numbers confirm that in the second half of the twentieth century France and Sweden were the most secular countries in Europe.
The fourth, sixth, ninth, and tenth commandments deal with family and household morality. They are fully accepted but a sizable minority, every third person in Western Europe at time did not agree. In short, they are too controversial to be called universally accepted norms.
The fifth, seventh and eighth commandments concern civilized living and are grounded not only in morality but also in the legal order: you shall not murder, steal, or lie. Here the acceptance was highest and the dissenters fewest. Appeals to these thus have special force in public discussions. These three commandments are candidates for a universal ethic. The others are candidates for special ethics.
Solon on the Rock of Acropolis
Let us join those who have created another myth with Solon stepping down from a rock in Athens — a budding city state with the exceptional clear skies of his days that promote clear thinking — to the agora with laws for the people of Athens. The Athenians did not live solely for their gods, but also for beauty and knowledge. They were the most successful businessmen at the times in the Mediterranean. Their armies were victorious. One of the constitutions they tried was called democratic. Solon could not possibly have fitted his commandments on a single tablet. He would have to carries three tablets, balancing them precariously: one with rules for the state’s politicians administrators and warriors, one for the business community, and a third one with rules for the rest of society. The remarkable thing is that the text on the three tablets had different contents. In this society we find only a few rules, a constitution, that applied to all.
Some of the commandments from Sinai could be codified as rules for Athens' civil society. They were and have continued to be fundamental for individual development before one could rightly become a person in the state or in business. The other two tablets addressed the guardians and businessmen. In Book 1 of The Republic Plato reviewed their dictates in Socrates' dialogue with a circle of people discussing that which is "right," in some translations called "justice," that is, the commandments that concern the different parts of society. Socrates asked Cephalus, a businessman of the third generation, who had created a larger fortune than the one he had inherited, what was the greatest blessing that his money had brought him. Cephalus, an aged man, looks back on his life in business, and says he has not had any reason "to lie to or cheat others, whether inadvertently or deliberately." These are the thoughts of a man who suggests that throughout his life he has entered business deals based on honesty and voluntariness, that he has always kept his part of agreements and has repaid all debts. He can therefore meet death with peace of mind.
Socrates thought that this was well put, but was still not satisfied with the answer. Not because he doubts Cephalus or suspects that he is just a cheap crook, but because answers from the business community cannot be generalized to hold for all of society. He gives an example that which shows that good business ethics do not always apply.
“justice, what is it? — to speak the truth and to pay your debts — no more than this? And even to this are there not exceptions? Suppose that a friend when in his right mind has deposited arms with me and he asks for them when he is not in his right mind, ought I to give them back to him? No one would say that I ought or that I should be right in doing so, any more than they would say that I ought always to speak the truth to one who is in his condition“.
Faced with this difficulty, Cephalus thought it best to leave the conversation. But the gathering agreed that "a friend should always do good to his friend and never do him harm." Plato had thus revealed that moral dictates in the economy are not only different from those in the micro-world of friends, but that some of those dictates can conflict with those based on friendship. We can generalize this in modern terms to mean that the discovery of the basic social norms of the business world differ from and in some cases conflict with those of the civil society. Here I use the term "civil society" in its present meaning to connote family life, social circles, associations and clubs, religious and cultural life. In antiquity, "civil society" meant something quite different that was more in line with the area of body politic.)
The dictates of the guards also differ from others. Socrates asks: "Is then the best (man) to watch the camp the one who can sneak into the enemy's camp?" The gathering responds, "Of course:" For a guard, stealing the enemy's plans is honorable.
Plato's norms for statecraft and business have been updated by Jane Jacobs (1992). Like her antique model, Jacobs uses the form of a dialog. She regards the problem of whether or not to return the deposited weapon as a gulf between the commercial moral syndrome and that of the guardians: not to return the weapon is seen “as a form of policing” (p.30). Jacobs is forced to this conclusion inasmuch as she does not acknowledge that civil society has its own moral syndrome, which differs from the syndromes of both the guardians and businessmen. A revised version of Jacobs that includes also civil norms from Moses is given in Figure 22.3. Under the heading "Civil Society" are listed the three universal candidates from the Decalogue and a typical Western norm of sociability: "Be sociable, do not withdraw ignoring others!"
Figure 23.3 Some Norms in Ancient Athens
STATECRAFT :
Maintain order
Use force effectively
Maintain discipline
Respect the power hierarchy
Be loyal, promote the loyalty of others
Do not enter into business deals
Use information selectively
Be generous in order to attain goals
Enjoy pomp and circumstance
Stand up for your rights and honor
Be courageousBUSINESS:
Create wealth
Reach voluntary agreements that are advantageous
Respect contracts
Compete
Never use force
Be open to all information
Cooperate with foreigners
Take initiative and be enterprising
Look for innovations and inventions
Invest in effective production and trade
Be industriousCIVIL SOCIETY:
Do not lie
Do not steal
Do not kill
Be sociable, do not withdraw ignoring others
The oppositions between the norms of the civil society, the state, and business are usually not apparent, but they are obvious to an inquiring Socrates.
In the civil society love and devotion are to rule, not the dictate of business to compete. In the civil society one shall not lie or kill, but in the name of the state the soldier is commanded to deceive and kill his enemy. Such conflicts, as familiar as they are irreconcilable, have always plagued sensitive young people in differentiated societies.
Sophocles’ drama Antigone, presented the Athenians with a clear example of the clash between the ethical syndromes of the civil society and the state. Oedipus’ daughter Antigone follows the moral dictates of the civil society and wishes to give her fallen rebellious brother Polyneice a worthy funeral. Thebes’ ruler Creon follows the dictate of statecraft to strip the enemy of all honor and wishes to throw the body to the dogs. The conflict cannot be resolved: the tragedy is built into the structure of the differentiated society.
Despite the built-in opposition between the civil society and the state it is obvious that the civil society cannot function well if the state does not keep peace and order. Nor can the state function effectively without the trust and support of the civil society: it would be too cumbersome to try to replace civil obedience with police force. The two parties, state and civil society, may be in conflict, but they also need each other.
The same applies to the state and business. Some of the elements in the conflict between the ethical rules of statecraft and those in business life are insurmountable. State authorities shall not compete. A citizen may be able to appeal a case to a superior court, but not to a rival court. Politicians are not supposed to strike business deals or accept bribes. If they were to make money by virtue of the arms at their disposal they would turn into a gang of robbers or a mafia.
However, without recourse to force, politicians can see to it that others can make business deals and compete. Laws about property rights and legal guidelines for the interpretation of contracts are needed if the market is to work. The business community also needs the trust in other people that a spirited civil society can create.
Business firms, on the other hand, shall only make deals that are voluntary, without resort to coercion by force. Not only are physical violence and the force of arms prohibited, but also the coercion exercised by a monopoly. A firm that uses force in order to do business is a band of gangsters, a “mafia.” A private monopoly is a form of exploitation, just like a state monopoly.
The principal lines of reasoning in the dialog The Republic, led Plato to believe in a state in which the guardians, traders, and slaves were kept strictly separate. The guardians had a monopoly on political power and the right to bear arms, but were excluded from commerce and the right to make money. The tradesmen were excluded from the use of force but had the right to make money. The slaves had no rights at all. Plato, like many later philosophers, considered working for the state preferable to doing business. He reserved all higher education for civil servants.
Plato’s subsequent reasoning reveals a weakness. In spite of the evidence of the differences and oppositions he discovered between the fundamental social norms in the state, business life, and the civil society, he persisted in asserting that there is only one common justice. He argued that the republic is just if governed by the philosophers-guardians, if tradesmen work, and if slaves slave. Plato formulated an intellectual defense of the idea that such politicians ought to govern all of society, not only the political sphere. This is, as Karl Popper has shown, not a reasonable concept of justice but simply a recommendation for a totalitarian order.
We can accept Plato’s basic idea that different realms in society have different fundamental norms and that the norms in one realm may contradict the norms in another. But we cannot accept the conclusions he drew in respect to the assignment of power in society to philosopher-kings, not even if extended to philosopher-queens. There is no reason to elevate the political realm to be the ruler of all there is in a society.
Temperance: A Universal Virtue of the Many-splendored Society?
Of the four classical virtues, Moderation is the one that best supports a many-splendored society.
An attitude toward life with a focus on temperance, setting limits, self-discipline and a sound lifestyle was developed in classical antiquity; it has taken many forms and has contained different emphases. Homer used the Greek concept sophrosyne to describe persons who can withstand the temptation to succumb to pride and fight against the gods, the temptation to live carelessly and frivolously, the temptation to indulge in drinking. In the spirit of sophrosyne, the Delphic Oracle warned against excess in everything. As we know, the major Greek tragedies often told of the disaster that strikes the hero who refuses to set limits for his ambition and lust. In Cicero's rhetoric and philosophy, sophrosyne became temperantia in Latin and was colored by a closely related local value, modestia.
Rationalities in Morality
In the nineteenth century many maintained that society would degenerate if a sufficient number of children were not born to the elite. Friedrich Nietzsche held that the process of civilization was turning out to be a victory for the majority, which was composed of weak people, over the minority of perfect, strong people. In the wake of Charles Darwin, biologists focused on the theory that our heritage conceals a dormant potion of cruelty and bestiality that could one day mean the fall of civilization. Had not certain European royal lineages become genetically bankrupt? Criminologists such as Cesare Lombroso explained rising crime rates as a result of increasing atavism, that is, a return in new generations of hidden primitive genetic dispositions. There were many speculations about the demise of civilization: Untergang des Abendlandes was the vignette common to them all. The main and broad consensus among intellectuals that the primary reason for the degeneration was that the lower classes had more children than the middle classes.
All these ideas were crazy at the time and remain without ground in our contemporary scientific knowledge. The spread of these ideas among an earlier generation of intellectuals is an object lesson that a wide consensus among them is no guarantee of their accuracy. Nor is the argument legalizing euthanasia acceptable to contemporary juridical reasoning that takes pride in separating descriptions of crimes judgments of value, and the prescriptions in law.
Gunnar Myrdal and his wife Alva adopted one of the thoughts current at the time as part of their welfare program for nativity, namely large-scale sterilization of the retarded. For some women, this meant they would not be able to have any children at all. In their 1934 book Kris i befolkningsfrågan (Crisis in the Population Question) they wrote:
In certain respects sterilization has a very large impact on society. This is particularly true from the point of view of genetic hygiene; especially since the sterilization of the mentally defective when done to a sufficient extent will lead to a decrease of the frequency of mental deficiency in the population. The sterilizations that are done for social reasons are also very important from the point of view of society since they prevent the birth of children who would otherwise grow up under very unfavorable conditions. From a purely objective point of view, the interests of society and of the individual must coincide in most cases of sterilization on the grounds both of genetic hygiene and social factors, since sterilization is aimed to prevent social misery." (Myrdal & Myrdal 1934, p.? , translated by Greta Frankel))
Legal sterilization was carried out in Sweden between 1934 and 1976. More than 60,000 women were sterilized. Most sterilization was done 1948, the year after the introduction of the general governmental child allowance to all mothers with children under 16. Apparently, some women should be physically altered so that they would not be eligible to receive these allowances.
By all accounts, the women's own consent to undergo sterilization was illusory. Today, according to the statutes of the International Court of Justice, compulsory sterilization is considered a crime against humanity. The Swedish state has given financial compensation to survivors from the time when sterilization was allowed.
The conclusion to be drawn from this period in Swedish history is not that Sweden was conducting Nazi racial policies at the time, nor that the Myrdals misunderstood the position of science at the time, nor that Swedish Social Democracy embraced Social Darwinism. The lasting lesson to be learned from this, as I see it, is that social policies in general and family policies in particular cannot be conducted exclusively on the basis of the rationalities that exist in the realms of science and body politic. The real that we call morality — and is promoted by civil society — must also be included in decision-making.
There are varieties of ethics in the relm of morality. An ethics based on social utilitarianism (Jeremy Bentham and John Stuart Mill) might conceivably defend a sterilization program in accordance with the Myrdals' reasoning "to prevent social misery." An ethic based on each person's own value (Immanuel Kant) could not defend a sterilization program that exploits and mutilates people as means for the ends of others. Christian ethics sees a sterilization program as incompatible with the thought that all people are God's children, irrespective of the genes they may carry and the ethnic environment of their formative years.
In any discussion of ethics — for example, in respect to human rights, the family, welfare, or foreign policy — it is not enough to speak of ethics in general; one must specify which ethics one is referring to.
Rewards in Morality
In morality, Western culture has not developed any elaborate reward pattern, and the badges of moral rectitude are few. While virtue is, of course, appreciated, to do it visible honor is, strangely enough, widely thought to cancel it out. Such is the workings of the Law of Jante. Only history can tell whether this lack in Western culture will prove significant or not.
Providing Flows of Virtue from the Realm of Morality to Other Parts of Society
The societal realms of science, art, economy, religion, and polity need to embed elements from the realm of morality. In all cases they need to import virtue to cope with the area of the semiotic square for their cardinal value that lies between "What seems to be" and "What is not." In other words, to keep magic out of science, to keep kitsch out of art, to keep swindles out of economy, to keep pious pretense out of religion, to keep spin out of polity — in all these efforts they need to embed virtue, the cardinal value of morality. See figures Figures 17.1, 18.1, 19.1 20.2, 21.1, and 22.1 and their adjoining discussions.
Providing Moral Education in Schools
Aristotle asserted that if you practice virtue you will become virtuous. Ethics is not only a theoretical subject, but one that is learned by doing, a “character subject” as it is sometimes called today. There is, however, a dearth of examples for lessons. It is not enough to have the students vote on ethical questions. Freedom of conscience should prevail, and an ethical discussion can never be said to be decided by a majority decision (Gutmann & Thompson 1996).
There is a proposal that ethics be studied as a core curriculum in the gymnasium or junior college, that is, that it be taught in all subjects. This would be acceptably in alternative (free) schools – the students’ choice of school is also a choice grounded in ethics. However, Europe’s compulsory schools would do well to avoid an ethics sanction by the state, whether it be Social democratic, Christian democratic, or something else. What we have so far seen of proposals for an ethical core subject has been a mishmash of equality, feminism, pacifism, radical environmentalism, and other trendy issues. The more fundamental values in our civilization that the new humanists sought in their school with its emphasis on antiquity — civility, dignity, honesty, courage, temperance, et cetera – are largely absent from the debate on including the subject on ethics in the curriculum.
Nowadays people try to program themselves to attain a desired performance, body, shape, and state of mind. The life area of physical activity is represented in schools in the form of sports and systematic physical exercises.
The focus on physical performance, health and fitness in today’s society resonates in the discussions on schools. The increasing obesity and immobility among pupils is said to be causes by a lack of exercise and gymnastics in the curriculum. The advocates of fitness also complain about the fatty and unbalanced diet served in school cafeterias. But the problem in some places may be that students do not eat the food served in the school cafeteria but prefer junk food from vending machines or nearby markets.
Public and Private Welfare as Moral Institutions
Welfare in the sense of taking care of needy and social outcasts is fundamentally an ethical problem. It may be economically worthwhile to help the ill to regain their health, so that they may be useful again. But there are few purely economic reasons for looking after the chronically ill, the disabled, deformed infants or sufferers from senile dementia. We do so for ethical reasons, not economic ones. Human dignity is a treasure that lacks market price. On the scale from faithfulness to pragmatism human, dignity is found at the pole of faithfulness where bargaining and compromise are forbidden.
When the state assumes moral responsibility for children, elderly people and outcasts, the citizens' responsibility is reduced to financing such care, i.e., paying taxes. Ethical responsibility is transformed into an obligation to pay. Tax evasion becomes the equivalent of sneaking away from the suffering victim at the roadside and not providing help as a compassionate Samaritan. As an unplanned consequence, a large measure of fiscal moralism therefore accompanies the European welfare states.
The responsibility for the young, the old, and the sick/disabled have been lodged mostly in the households and families and neighborhood. In the history of the West, responsibility for social and health care has been assigned here, there and everywhere: to the extended family, the cooperative bodies of the local community, the church, the guild, the feudal lord and his household, the charitable establishment run by the industrial magnate (or his wife). Only when these tasks are transferred to the state we obtain a welfare state. When they are predominantly lodged in civil society we can talk of a 'welfare society,' not a 'welfare state' (Robson 1976).
Welfare Populations
"Welfare" entails three recurrent problems found in every society. How are we to take care of children before they can look after themselves? How shall we take care of the elderly who can no longer look after themselves? And how are we to take care of the sick and disabled who cannot work or feed themselves, or, do everything else that is normal for adults in their prime?
To the three universal welfare populations many societies must add special groups that fare particularly poor in that particular society.
War widows and war veterans become a special welfare population in warring societies. In Paris the tourist guide will point out the Hôtel des Invalides in the very midst of the city, a housing project to honor those who lost a limb or an ability in the nation's war. The United States in the 20th century had a full-fledged welfare mini-state in the Veterans' Administration with tax-financed education, housing, and health programs. The easiest way to describe the European welfare state to Americans at that time was to say that every citizen here has typical VA entitlements.
The most common special welfare populations in the market economies in modern societies are not the veterans but the unemployed. Healthy and able persons of working age routinely lose their jobs and salaries in a dynamic market economy. Unemployment, as you know, is at present running very high in Europe, and the share of long-time unemployed is much higher than in the United States. In Denmark in the 1980s the unemployed formed their "union" to claim benefits for their special population much like the veterans' associations do in the United States.
The responsibility for the special welfare populations has also been assumed by the governments of the welfare states. Since only states wage military wars I think it is entirely appropriate that they also take care of their needy veterans. For the unemployed the argument must be different.
Business is the main beneficiary of being able to restructure and hire and fire according to need. I think it is reasonable that the employers should be responsible for the lion's share of an unemployment insurance, both the financing and the administration. An EMO (employment maintenance organization) is as feasible in a market economy as an HMO (health maintenance organization). Both can conform to the rules of a market economy.
Contemporary Welfare Models
In the United States, where one tends to thinks of welfare as schemes that temporarily enter into some people's lives. A typical North American book title on this topic is Protecting Soldiers and Mothers (Skocpol, 1992). Welfare policy in the United States emerged when the state helped returning veterans of the Civil War and foreign wars, and when widowed (or single) mothers received a kind of temporary state pension so that they did not have to leave their small children and go to work.
In Europe one usually thinks of state welfare as permanent schemes that are a part of all people's lives, and therefore they qualify better as bases for societal creeds. A typical book title on European welfare is Not for The Poor Alone (Kahn & Kamerman 1975). European welfare policy emerged around the needs of male breadwinners, primarily industrial workers, who, unlike their American cousins, were considered less able to fend for themselves in times of adversity. Within this start Europe has developed three different systems of welfare, the Anglo-Saxon, the Continental, and the Nordic systems (Cf. Esping-Andersen 1990).
The Anglo-Saxon system provides uniform local bureaucracies for welfare, housing, and health. The central government has a key role in their financing and control. Charities supported by business and private gifts play a part. The market also offers many choices in the Anglo-Saxon system, but not as many on the British Isles as in the United States and some other former colonies. The goal of the Anglo-Saxon welfare state is human decency. It is not financed to maintain income levels when adversity strikes, as in the Nordic system, but it gives a good helping hand. A consensus on welfare which is required to make it an effective societal creed has been promoted by the Liberals and Labour, but not always by the Conservatives. A break allowing some opt outs from parts of the system came in the 1980s from the Thatcherites. New Labour has in theory promoted a three-pronged welfare order in which the responsibility for welfare is formally shared by the state, the civil society, and the market, but in practice the system is still state-dominated and state-run. A societal creed does support the Anglo-Saxon system, but it does not seem to be quite as strong a creed as the ones supporting the Continental and Nordic systems.
In the Nordic system, financing, decision-making, and implementation are matters for the government. The system is huge, comprising about half of the public budget. It represents both a flight from the community and a flight from the market into the supposedly more equitable aegis of government. In the name of "justice" and "egalitarianism," the state, and the state alone, is seen as responsible for individual welfare from the cradle to the grave. The goal of the Nordic welfare state is equality, meaning equality of outcome, not equality of opportunity as in the United States. When sickness strikes, when a child exhibits asocial behavior, when a job is lost, when grandfather is not getting enough nourishment, the citizen is not expected to turn for assistance to his family, to his parish, to his neighbors, to volunteer agencies, or to his own insurance provider. According to the Nordic societal creed, it is the government that is to remedy such ills. The system nowadays generally presumes a two-income family. State-supported paternity leaves are expected to be shared between father and mother. Employment of both spouses is also a requirement to provide enough tax revenue to run the system. A strong societal creed supports the Nordic system.
The European Continental system, like the Anglo-Saxon, has national welfare programs, but more sizeable ones than the Anglo-Saxon system. True to its historical start by the conservative Fürst Bismarck in the 1880s, the continental welfare system has been pungently supported by the political right, but is well received also by the left, a fact that promotes it as a feature in a societal creed. Most welfare decisions on the European Continent, however, are taken at lower levels than the central government, and welfare services are normally co-opted by the financial and legal involvement of the civil society or local community. The implementation of national welfare schemes thus rests not only with local governments, but also with legally established roles for unions, churches, and community agencies. Or, it rests on subsidized insurance plans for health care, sick pay, and pensions that may be specific for major occupational groups. Thus the complex system has many roots; it is not necessarily run by government employees as is the Nordic system.
In 1995 Germany introduced an old age insurance that illustrates the combined efforts of the state, the civil society, and the marketplace to meet the demands of a growing group elderly in the population. The insurance becomes due when a person needs care for a minimum of one and a half hours per day. Relatives and other caregivers are paid for their services and receive four weeks' vacation. The elderly can chose the home care services they want within the framework and fees of the insurance system. The insurance pays for wheelchairs, special beds, and other aids to daily living. The three types of service for the elderly – home care, service residences, and nursing homes/hospices – are available on three levels. The form and level that the insurance plan entitles one to is determined by a physician, not by local politicians or civil servants. Even if they have different care needs, married couples are kept together as far as possible. The form of service granted can be upgraded by the recipient. For example, a person who has been granted home care can move to a service residence by paying the difference out of his own pocket.
In 2004 two million Germans availed themselves of old-age insurance. More than anything else, the qualification that a person requires care a minimum of an our and a half daily affects the extent to which the insurance is can be utilized and make it affordable for the sorely pressed official treasuries. Germany's capacious social insurances are partly financed through the federal and constituent states, but it is not implements by them. Approximately 85 percent of Germans have placed their sick insurance in the public system (Gesetzliche Krankenkasse or GFV). Others carry private insurance. The efficiency of the system benefits from the competition that exists between insurance companies that vie to deliver GFV's sick care. They are known by their three-letter abbreviation: AOK, BEK, BKK, DAK, KKH, TKK, among others.
The German old-age insurance is automatic for all members in the public system, GKV, and is obligatory for all others. The cost is 1.7 percent of wages/salaries (split evenly between employer and employee), and 1.7 percent of the pensioner's income. The above mentioned insurance companies either buy the practical implementation of the policies or handle it themselves. Unlike the Nordic arrangement whereby counties and municipalities implement the insurance plans, in the German welfare state, voluntary association, churches and unions have traditionally carried out the practical aspects of the plan. They can provide home care and service residences as well as out-patient treatment and some hospital care. In Germany there are rules governing the division of responsibility in the public sphere between the state, industry and business, and the civil society. All is not relegated to either the market, the state, or the civil society.
Another difference between Germany and the Nordic countries in respect to their welfare systems is the German voter's tendency to associate German welfare policies primarily with the conservative Christian Democrats, whereas Scandinavian welfare policies as mainly viewed as a project of the Social Democrats.
The general goal of the Continental welfare state is human dignity, which is inspired by Christian, particularly Roman Catholic, social doctrines. Throughout most of the twentieth century the system provided levels of support to its clients that were even sufficient to provide for a housewife with no income of her own, i.e. a support for a patriarchal household.
A Coda on a Celebrated but Sorrow Hegemony of the Body Politic
One of the most famous societies that approximate a many-splendored one, the Roman Republic, turned into a hereditary, authoritarian empire.
The Roman Republic had a structure that at least somewhat approximated a many-splendored society in the antique world. The Republic belonged to the Roman people. The people's power was housed in various comitae, that is, citizens gathered in council. Not all these groups were permanent, but they could be called when popular interests, leaders of emerging realms of the republic, judges or administrators needed grounded decisions by voting, for popular voting was the foundation of the Republic. These councils were in continuous collaborations and struggles with a permanent council of elders (patricians), Senatus. The latter was the most important advisory body that many times determined legislation and binding decisions on appointments rather than merely deliver opinions about them. The logotype SPQR, which has been preserved on many of Rome’s ruins and stands for Senatus Populusque Romanus, that is, “the Senate and the People of Rome,” bears witness to the importance of both sources of authority.
The executive power was exercised by two consuls with one year terms of office. They were the high commissioners responsible for administration in different sections of society. To hold these highest offices in the Roman Republic you did not have to belong to families with wealth from land or trade, or with hereditary political connections, or have experience as a military commander. Cicero, for one, rose to his consulship in 63 BC from humbler origins on the basis of proven skills in some high-profile legal cases. In all, this organization of the Roman Republic allowed people to have different priorities and follow different life courses, pursuing different cardinal values.
In difficult times, such as facing war, natural catastrophes, epidemics, this distribution of power became impractical. To overcome the difficulties and to preserve the Republic then became a dominant concern shared by all. With war on the doorstep, the regular power structure was superseded by the appointment of a dictator for a six-month period, during which he enjoyed unlimited authority in all spheres, not only the military.
This arrangement worked well for a while, but during the social unrest that prevailed during the first century B.C., several dictators refused to step down at the end of their terms, among them Caius Magnus, and Cornelius Sulla. They had not only learned the use of rule by cruelty on the battlefield, they had also been able to amass fortunes from plunder of the defeated enemies, thus becoming independent of the taxation income in Rome. They continued in power beyond the statutory six months. When the war lord Caius Julius Caesar subsequently appointed himself dictator for life, the republicans eventually had had enough and assassinated Caesar. The term dictator, which had previously commanded respect, became a term of aspersion.
Caesar did not have a biological son, but had adopted his nephew Caius Julius Caesar Octavianus. Supported by the soldiers who had been loyal to Caesar and who could be paid by the estate he had left, Octavianus seized power. After the defeat of the republicans at Filippi, Octavianus shared power with Caesar’s general Marcus Antonius and another general, Lepidus. The friendship of this gang of three did not last long; after yet another civil war Antonius was defeated at a large naval battle at Actium.
Rome was now in turmoil, and Octavianus, who had assumed the name Caius Julius Caesar, was determined to set things right. He began by formally reinstating the Roman Republic, a popular measure. The different groups in Rome thought that they had regained their autonomy; no one had absolute power.
However, gradually, but within the framework of the constitution of the republic, Caius began to appropriate leadership in all of the most important groups in society. He was already imperator, commander-in-chief. He was appointed princeps senatus, “the first in the senate” (thereof the word “prince”). This did not mean that he became president of the senate, but that when the senators were assembled Caius would be the first to give his opinion and to vote – a shrewd way of swaying opinion in the direction he wanted. He also succeeded in getting himself appointed tribunus plebes, a kind of ombudsman for the people, a position that had long been available in the Republic. The people’s tribune had the opportunity to veto important decisions. He was also inviolable and could not be removed from office. In addition, he became the high priest, pontifex maximus, a kind of archbishop who officiated at the most important offerings to the gods. (The term survives today as a designation for the Pope.) Although the republic still existed formally, as holder of these offices, Caius now had total control of the central zone of the empire, that is, what we call absolute power. He made this power hereditary and founded what is known as the Julian dynasty.
It is often written about Caius that the once reckless and ruthless youth matured into one of the wisest rulers in history. In time, the senate awarded the honorary title pater patriae, “the father of the fatherland,” as well as the new title augustus, "the venerated." Caius would become known to history under this title, not his name.
Augustus (as we thus call him) demonstrates a model for transformation of a many-splendored republic with power sharing into a hereditary authoritarian state. He shows that a single determined person (and his party or junta) can kidnap all realms of a society. If successful he gets the multiple honors of all their different reward systems. To be sure this benefited him and his times. But in the long run Roman society did not maintain the freedom, flexibility, and vitality of its republican days and it lost its moral fiber. The sense morale is that the Augusti of human history should not be venerated.
Subsequent Roman emperors always called themselves Caesar. As is the case of all hereditary rulers, some are good and some are bad. In the Julian line, a father was not always followed by a biological son; other relatives or adopted heirs could occasionally succeed. The full force of the random power of heredity was thus not at hand. But all in the Julian dynasty, good and bad, continued to govern as absolute rulers. The last one of them to mount the throne was Nero.
Figure 24.1. The Grand Structuration of Europe

The hegemony of the political realm created by Augustus, i.e. the Roman Empire, is the starting point for the historical process we highlighted in the opening pages of this treatise. We described there how it took Europe nearly 2000 years to relieve itself from a yoke, the hegemony of body politic. This was illustrated by a figure, "The grand structuration of Europe," repeated here. In this process the societal realms of religion, economy, art, and science received a bounded autonomy. Social movements promoting civic liberties, free trade, religious freedom, academic freedom, artistic freedom, and freedom of conscience were heroes in this outcome.
Please send your comments on this chapter by email to the author.
>
Chapter 24
On the Dynamics of Realms:
Their Search for National Hegemony and Global Reach
This chapter is incomplete and unedited and needs reorganization
When the societal realms of economy, polity, science, art, religion, and morality are free and equal and joined together so that no one rules over the others, we have a many-splendored society. Like other societies, the many-splendored one has a central zone where elites from the six societal realms meet formally and/or informally. In the central zone of a many-splendored society the elites from all societal realms meet as equals.
Already at the outset we may state one of our conclusions: A many-splendored society is not a guaranteed social structure. It survives at the mercy of the ability of its central zone to withstand attempts to hegemony from its strong societal realms and to uphold the autonomy of the weak realms in its own society, and at the same time resist the imperialism of foreign realms.
Intellectual Enemies of the Many-Splendored Societies
Hegel and his student Marx, as we have seen, are poles apart in many respect. One more difference between the two should be noted. Each points to one realm in society as the leading one, but they differ in their choice.
In Hegel's world there are only two societal realms, the state (Der Staat) and the civil society (Die bürgerlische Gesellschaft). In the latter he included family life, trading, farming, and manufacturing (small-scale in his days), as well as artists, priests, and professors. Hegel's firm conviction was that the state held the decisive role in developing a region and a civilization; it is what we called an imperialist realm and illustrated in our section on cancerous politics. A many-splendored society in which the body politic was just one societal realm, equal in importance to several others, was unthinkable to him. No wonder his name often turns up when we search the intellectual roots of Nazism and other recent totalitarian ideologies. A many-splendored society would succumb to state hegemony if and when Hegel's philosophy dominates in its central zone.
Marxian theory assumes extraordinary power in the economic realm of a society. In Marx' world there are only two realms: the the economic "base" and its "superstructure." The main trends in politics, art, science, religion, and morality are shaped by the economy; it is what we called an imperialist realm. Everything, particularly in a market economy, becomes a commodity and gets a price: friendship, beauty, knowledge, virtue, and salvation. Science becomes applied and is used mostly for economic calculation. Art becomes window-dressing of the rich. Religion is seen as an opiate to keep the poor contented. It is striking that in Marxian thinking the body politic is also determined by its economic base. A government of a country is thus seen as an executive arm of the richest class. Therefore, a many-splendored society in which different realms, such as science, art, religion or morality, have separate and independent developments is ruled out in Marxian analysis. A many-splendored society succumbs to economic hegemony if and when Marx's philosophy dominates in its central zone.
Let us us emphasize that one should not accept a claim that a realm has hegemony in advance of proof. To be sure, money rules supreme in business firms, particularly in a capitalist economy. Nor is there any argument about the fact that a church, a museum, a university, a government agency also have incomes and expenditures. However, this fact does not determine the direction of their efforts as it does in business where you above all want to make money. In capitalist business you also make more money with the money you have, sometimes to the exclusion of anything else.
In the other societal realms than the economy, wealth do not set as the goal of your efforts, they are only one among the several resources that enable you to reach the goal. Marxism fails to see that the moneyed class is not the lord of every modern realm. Hegelianism fails to see that the power of the state is not the determinant of all history. It is easier to fathom the parallel conclusion about scientific knowledge; it is used in every realm to facilitate its efforts. But this does not make scientists lords of the entire society.
This said, I do not argue that we shall stop reading Hegel and Marx. We need them for many insights and also to see the perfection of the broader notion of a many-splendored society.
Once we have presented the grand social realms — science, economy, polity, art, religion, and morality — two topics become interesting: how they seek hegemony within their society, and how they obtain a global reach. These two topics require first a study of the domestic competition between realms, and second, a study of international competitions of societal realms. The latter gets us to the heart of current globalization debate with the intriguing perspective that the actors of globalization are nothing but the societal realms.
Struggles Among Societal Realms Inside a Society
Education
The societal realms of science, economy, polity, art, religion, and morality are all language products. They share the need of training children in speaking, reading and writing. Some social realms such as science and economy, are also dependent on mathematics. Thus in all advanced societies there is firm backing of the three Rs, reading, writing, and arithmetic as mandatory learning for children. In addition there is a commitment to civilized living, i.e. that children should learn to settle their conflicts by words, not fist fights or weapons. This is an agenda for the young that families and elementary schools may share.
Beyond this consensus there are many concerns within different societal realms about education. There is in fact a continuous struggles between societal realms over education in any advanced society. Education of the youth is an arena where different social realms compete for influence. Who shall own the schools? And who shall decide the curriculum of a school? Who shall train the teachers? Who shall be educated? We can assume that education will differ depending on which societal realms prevail in a society. All have sought to colonize the schools. For a long time the battle over the curriculum was about the place that various academic specialties would occupy. How many hours should be allotted to the natural sciences, to classical languages, modern languages, geography, history, et cetera. Now, the battle is between the various areas of life. How many hours should schools for children and young people devote to train a student suitable for advanced studies? A citizen? A professional with his/her own income used for rational consumption? A person with aesthetic sensibilities and opinions? An ethically conscious individual? A physically fit person? A young adult and prepared member of the family and household which he or she wants to create?
Today’s schools impart not only documented knowledge, but other values as well. Thereby The Enlightenment’s ideal that all schools should essentially be schools of learning has been undermined.
Schools and their teaching plans are arenas where the different demands from the various institutions in the society as a whole meet and compete. In the process, most schools seem to lose their autonomous character. Their teachers become influenced by all manner of external forces.
The main reason for this is not a lack of confidence in the school administration, but lies in the general development of society. All life areas in the West, with the exception of religion and family life, have expended quickly during the last centuries. The driving force for change in the schools as been the rapid development of life areas at the same time as the shortcomings of the primary groups have been on the rise. Then the higher authorities enter the arena and try to steer. The imperative decision of the local and state governments, the demands of business and industry, and the desires of the scientific community all made an impact on the schools. And they did not always agree.
A superficial but visible symptom of the colonization of schools in Sweden is to be found in the interviews we conducted with 100 teachers in the last two classes of the elementary school and 100 teachers in the gymnasium. All were teachers in core subjects. They were asked “Have you had a visit in your school from.../the local government, a company, a trade union, a college or university/.....to participate in teaching?” The question was not whether an external source supplied teachers with teaching material for lessons – which is very common – but whether these representatives from outside life areas had personally assisted in or taken over the role of teachers.
Table 26:1. External Teachers in Swedish Schools
|
Andel lärare som haft medverkan i undervisningen från:
|
Lärare på högstadiet |
Lärare i gymnasiet |
| Kommunen eller landstinget |
26% |
25% |
| Privata företag |
38% |
64% |
| Kommunala och statliga företag |
18% |
27% |
| Fackliga organisationer |
32% |
43% |
| Högskolor och universitet |
29% |
68% |
Källa: ValueScope, fältarbete Sifo, september 2000
At the gymnasium level, 68 percent of the teachers had had assistance in teaching from colleges or universities, 64 percent had been assisted by representatives from private business companies, and 43 percent by representatives of unions. Every fourth teacher, 25 percent, reported that a representative from a local government had assisted in the classroom, and 27 percent said that they had been assisted by representatives from state or municipal companies. In the last three years of elementary school representatives from the municipality or district participate in classroom work as frequently as in the gymnasium, but participation from the other groups is lower.
Many people are horrified at the sight of these and similar statistics showing how the schools are colonized by different societal realms. I am not one of them. The total society has developed to such a degree that the different realms in considerable measure need to conduct their own education. I am instead concerned that politicians in the state or local governments will alone through majority decisions determine the content in school education, to the detriment of science, business and industry, art, religion and ethics, and of political minority opinions.
The Many-Splendored Society and Its Enemies
In the limited historical time that approximations to many-splendored societies can be found, the main threats to their survival has come two directions: from from the expansions of religions onto monotheistic theocracies and from cases of cancerous expansions of the body politic. In recent times when science has grown into a full-blown societal realm we can also identify some social scientists as enemies of the many-splendored society.
Threats from Hegemony of the Body Politic
One of the most famous societies that approximate a many-splendored one, the Roman Republic, turned into a hereditary, authoritarian empire.
The Roman Republic had a structure that at least somewhat approximated a many-splendored society in the antique world. The Republic belonged to the Roman people. The people's power was housed in various comitae, that is, citizens gathered in council. Not all these groups were permanent, but they could be called when popular interests, leaders of emerging realms of the republic, judges or administrators needed grounded decisions by voting, for popular voting was the foundation of the Republic. These councils were in continuous collaborations and struggles with a permanent council of elders (patricians), Senatus. The latter was the most important advisory body that many times determined legislation and binding decisions on appointments rather than merely deliver opinions about them. The logotype SPQR, which has been preserved on many of Rome’s ruins and stands for Senatus Populusque Romanus, that is, “the Senate and the People of Rome,” bears witness to the importance of both sources of authority.
The executive power was exercised by two consuls with one year terms of office. They were the high commissioners responsible for administration in different sections of society. To hold these highest offices in the Roman Republic you did not have to belong to families with wealth from land or trade, or with hereditary political connections, or have experience as a military commander. Cicero, for one, rose to his consulship in 63 BC from humbler origins on the basis of proven skills in some high-profile legal cases. In all, this organization of the Roman Republic allowed people to have different priorities and follow different life courses, pursuing different cardinal values.
In difficult times, such as facing war, natural catastrophes, epidemics, this distribution of power became impractical. To overcome the difficulties and to preserve the Republic then became a dominant concern shared by all. With war on the doorstep, the regular power structure was superseded by the appointment of a dictator for a six-month period, during which he enjoyed unlimited authority in all spheres, not only the military.
This arrangement worked well for a while, but during the social unrest that prevailed during the first century B.C., several dictators refused to step down at the end of their terms, among them Caius Magnus, and Cornelius Sulla. They had not only learned the use of rule by cruelty on the battlefield, they had also been able to amass fortunes from plunder of the defeated enemies, thus becoming independent of the taxation income in Rome. They continued in power beyond the statutory six months. When the war lord Caius Julius Caesar subsequently appointed himself dictator for life, the republicans eventually had had enough and assassinated Caesar. The term dictator, which had previously commanded respect, became a term of aspersion.
Caesar did not have a biological son, but had adopted his nephew Caius Julius Caesar Octavianus. Supported by the soldiers who had been loyal to Caesar and who could be paid by the estate he had left, Octavianus seized power. After the defeat of the republicans at Filippi, Octavianus shared power with Caesar’s general Marcus Antonius and another general, Lepidus. The friendship of this gang of three did not last long; after yet another civil war Antonius was defeated at a large naval battle at Actium.
Rome was now in turmoil, and Octavianus, who had assumed the name Caius Julius Caesar, was determined to set things right. He began by formally reinstating the Roman Republic, a popular measure. The different groups in Rome thought that they had regained their autonomy; no one had absolute power.
However, gradually, but within the framework of the constitution of the republic, Caius began to appropriate leadership in all of the most important groups in society. He was already imperator, commander-in-chief. He was appointed princeps senatus, “the first in the senate” (thereof the word “prince”). This did not mean that he became president of the senate, but that when the senators were assembled Caius would be the first to give his opinion and to vote – a shrewd way of swaying opinion in the direction he wanted. He also succeeded in getting himself appointed tribunus plebes, a kind of ombudsman for the people, a position that had long been available in the Republic. The people’s tribune had the opportunity to veto important decisions. He was also inviolable and could not be removed from office. In addition, he became the high priest, pontifex maximus, a kind of archbishop who officiated at the most important offerings to the gods. (The term survives today as a designation for the Pope.) Although the republic still existed formally, as holder of these offices, Caius now had total control of the central zone of the empire, that is, what we call absolute power. He made this power hereditary and founded what is known as the Julian dynasty.
It is often written about Caius that the once reckless and ruthless youth matured into one of the wisest rulers in history. In time, the senate awarded the honorary title pater patriae, “the father of the fatherland,” as well as the new title augustus, "the venerated." Caius would become known to history under this title, not his name.
Augustus (as we thus call him) demonstrates a model for transformation of a many-splendored republic with power sharing into a hereditary authoritarian state. He shows that a single determined person (and his party or junta) can kidnap all realms of a society. If successful he gets the multiple honors of all their different reward systems. To be sure this benefited him and his times. But in the long run Roman society did not maintain the freedom, flexibility, and vitality of its republican days and it lost its moral fiber. The sense morale is that the Augusti of human history should not be venerated.
Subsequent Roman emperors always called themselves Caesar. As is the case of all hereditary rulers, some are good and some are bad. In the Julian line, a father was not always followed by a biological son; other relatives or adopted heirs could occasionally succeed. The full force of the random power of heredity was thus not at hand. But all in the Julian dynasty, good and bad, continued to govern as absolute rulers. The last one of them to mount the throne was Nero.
Figure 24.1. The Grand Structuration of Europe

The hegemony of the political realm created by Augustus, i.e. the Roman Empire, is the starting point for the historical process we highlighted in the opening pages of this treatise. We described there how it took Europe nearly 2000 years to relieve itself from a yoke, the hegemony of body politic. This was illustrated by a figure, "The grand structuration of Europe," repeated here. In this process the societal realms of religion, economy, art, and science received a bounded autonomy. Social movements promoting civic liberties, free trade, religious freedom, academic freedom, artistic freedom, and freedom of conscience were heroes in this outcome. There are a number of insidious ways in which the day-to-day running of a society can be detrimental to its many-splendored possibilities.
Rushing to Resolutions of a Problem Outside the Realm with the Problem
Fallacies made by searching all remedies for a societal problem outside its societal realm are common. The great Depression of the 1930s provides a telling example.
In the United States of the 1930s there was no lack of nourishments in the soil, no lack of machines in the factories, no lack of agricultural labor, factory workers, or engineers. But starvation and poverty and general misery spread because important parts of the economic system had collapsed. “Mr. Sociology“ of that time, Robert S. Lynd, the professor who was known inside and outside the universities for his studies of Middletown, looked for a solution. In an influential book called Knowledge for What? Lynd wrote: “For it is the intractability of the human factor, and not our technologies, that has spoiled the American dream; and the social sciences deal with that factor“ (p 4). The social sciences had not done their job. They had simply accepted the assumptions about society prevalent in American capitalism. “This over-ready acceptance of the main assumptions of the going system has been a source of confusion and embarrassment to the social sciences as that system has become highly unmanageable since the World War, and particularly since 1929“ (Lynd 1939, p 3).
Lynd’s advice was to abandon the economic theory of the invisible hand and develop a theory of social and political planning. “There is no way in which our culture can grow in continued servicability to its people without a large and pervasive extension of planning and control to many areas now left to casual individual initiative“ (s 209). Many agreed, and a new research tradition emerged at Columbia, Lynd’s university. We got celebrated dissertations on Roosevelt’s great piece of social engineering, the Tennessee Valley Authority , on agrarian socialism in Canada , and on the European Coal and Steel Community (Selznick 1939, Lipset 1950, Lister 1960).
Nowadays we know that it is questionable whether large-scale central economic planning can cure economic depressions in advanced economies. There is a fairly extensive research literature on the Depression of the 1930s . Roughly speaking, it was not a lack of economic planning, but a lack of money that pushed the depression forward. (Friedman 1956) The expansion of economic activity had long since outstripped the expansion in the mining of gold. The gold standard strangled economic activity by limiting the money supply (Eichengreen 1992) This was accompanied by political decisions on protectionism and less government spending, which further weakened business activity.
You should not go to the realm of politics to find the root cause of the economic Depression and rush to recommend the use political planning as the remedy. The root cause was economic, the shrinking money supply. Politicians, to be sure, made the matter much worse by retrenching state budgets and raising trade barriers. Reversals of those policies became part of the remedy. But the keys to the solution were economic: reducing or abandoning the gold standard for currencies and increasing capital, credit limits, and lending by the banks.
Threats from Use of Organizational Forms Borrowed from Other Realms
Grotesque misunderstandings have arisen from inability to separate the main show of a societal realm from its embedded side-shows.
Inappropriate Forms from Polity
The rules of democracy require equality among citizens at the polling place, where all voices are worth the same, they require equality in law courts, where the upper and lower reaches of society, the good and the wicked, are judged by the same law. They require the same treatment in public insurance plans and the same right to health services and care for children and the aged according to public decisions. These are huge steps forward in modern polity. Of course equality shall prevail and the rules of the polity shall govern here. However, there are many other realms where the democratic forms of majority rule and equality are irrelevant. (Irrelevant is a polite way of saying balderdash.) It is and will continue to be a mistake to automatically demand democracy outside of the political sphere.
Grotesque misunderstandings arose from myopic conceptions of realm embeddings. As the victory for political democracy progressed over the world in the 20th century, democratic organizational forms sector also spread to sectors others than political one. Employees received "democracy at the workplace," pupils gained "democracy at school," and students received "democracy at the universities." Popular movements and political parties democratic by-laws that had turned into oligarchies — as they tend to do according to Michels (19xx) and become governed by non-elected life-time administrators in head offices — began to revive their democratic practices. Unions that were ruled by bosses looked over their internal democracy.
My country of Sweden took an extreme stance in this process. Eminent jurists, learned political scientists, and experienced politician joined hands in giving the Swedes new basic laws in the 1970s that encouraged the trend of copying the state's democratic procedures and ideals in the rest of society. The first chapter, second paragraph, of the Constitution states that "government shall see to it that the ideas of democracy become guidelines in all the areas of society." Yes, it states all areas. For example, the Lutheran state church got a democratically elected assembly with authority in administrative and theological matters over the bishops!
The authors of the sentence that "government shall see to it that the ideas of democracy become guidelines in all the areas of society." were apparently incompetent consultants on organization. Or, more likely, they were zealous promoters of the hegemony of the body politic over all other realms. In any case, they were enemies of the many-splendored society.
Political problems do, indeed, have democratic solutions. But in all essentials the problems of business have economic solutions, problems about knowledge have scientific solutions, problems about spirituality have religious solutions, problems of art and literature have aesthetic solutions, and moral problems have ethical solutions. Sometimes democratic ideas can contribute to these solutions, but as soon as you move out of the political sphere, they seldom become essential parts of any solution.
Inappropriate Use of Organizational Forms from Business
Toward the end of the 1900s, a trend was apparent in Europe to the convert many government-run activities limited liability companies. This was called privatization. The activities involved were electric and thermal power stations, water power stations, street and road networks, the post office, telephone networks, railroads and other traffic. Often it did not go farther than that a division of a large public administration became smaller corporations in which the state and municipality kept all the shares. In large cities municipalities have brought together their various companies into a concern, the highest form of business organization.
It was the hope of neo-liberals that this breakup of large public administrations into smaller limited-liability companies would lead to greater efficiency and lower prices for the taxpayer. We do not know if this has happen. The accounting practices before and after the break have been too inadequate to reveal such figures.
In local government agencies reorganized into corporations owned by the government it became easier to demand the high salaries current in the business world for former public officials. It became also easier to provide generous golden parachutes for top management, to give bonuses, to distribute credit cards with generous rules for their use, to find jobs and assignments for old friends. Not surprisingly, the result was a number of scandals about corruption and perhaps also a decline in civil service morale.
If the business world's language of buy and sell suited the public administrations, it would have been better to privatize them full out and list them on the stock exchange. This has, for example, been done in Europe's telecommunications. If the business world's language does not fit – which was discovered in a number of cases – the line of work should be returned to public administration. It is a mistake to require the formation of limited liability companies outside the sphere of business.
Different realms need different forms for their line of work. It is not only a question of different rules for politics and business. It is a fact that realms such as science, art, religion, or ethics are not served either by the ideals of the market economy or the ideals of politicians if they are to flourish. They have their own ideals.
To force the rules of democracy on cultural life, on the churches, on the schools and universities and on research, and think it contributes to a better society. Nor has the right really understood that the distinctive character of the realms needs protection. It lets loose the rules of the market in cultural life, in churches, schools, welfare institutions, the universities and research, and thinks it has benefited them.
A political and judicial order cannot be replaced by the spontaneous order of the market, at least not all of it. The parliament and the courts cannot be split into companies. There are more specific restrictions regarding the formation of a company.
A company will never succeed without a real market for it products. Many newly formed companies in the public sector do not have more customers (which is preferable in our definition of a market), but just the one, the local government. They remain half-baked as companies; they have names that connote independence, but they are not independent financially. A similar dependency can be found among some suppliers to large companies.
XXXX the organizational form of firms may prove ineffective. This can occur, for example, when customers do not pay the best market price but rather a standard rate determined by an authority. It would not benefit a private school to chose conversion into a business corporation as long as charging tuition is prohibited and its only source of income would be the sum of tax money decided by the community council. It would also be pointless for a hospital to work as a business corporation as long as the socialized medical establishment is its only customer. It would only be of interest if many insurance companies and other firms were to become its customers.
Enterprises that do not give top priority to profitability cannot enjoy all the advantages of articles of a business corporation. If the key figures that are used to measure a firm's success are other than profit and capital increments, the form of organization would give incorrect signals and turn secondary factors into main concerns. The measure of a pupil's education is more important than the school's profitability. The originality of basic research is more important than the surplus of the department or university.
The measure of a patient's health is more important than the value increase of the hospital. The quality of the defendants’ defense is more important than the profit margin of the law firm. An individual’s adjustment to society is more important than the profit of a social service agency. A criminal's rehabilitation is more important than the prison's surplus. Of course, one can point to single cases where such enterprises in the form of limited companies have been successful, but this usually is because the personnel have worked according to their own professional ethics, not primarily to maximize the profitability of the organization.
Enterprises for which thinking in terms of profitability is disturbing should not be limited companies. This comprises different forms of contemplation. The search for worldly wealth can inhibit the search for spiritual riches and deep aesthetic experiences. At present, the market's forces are drowning us in a materialistic culture of the senses, and the acting out of violent passions. They crowd out the more exacting exercises of ideational culture. Both progressive and conservative critics argue that not only the spiritual virtuosos but also individuals who seriously want to test the possibilities and limits of the culture of the senses are crowded out. And they are right.
[Given these longues conjonctures, I distrust the present attempt to write a constitution for the European Union that contains no serious checks on the vested interest of the Commission, the Council of Ministers, and the Court to expand the superior power of the Union. In the long run any European constitution must match the Grand Differentiation of Europe and grant a fuller independence of other life spheres from the political sphere. The attempted constitution treaty for the European Union with its French-inspired political centralism of everything European is bound to be a short-lived episode. (See also the section entitled "What Unique Aspects of European History Should Shape a Constitution for a European Union?")]
End of Incomplete Draft of Book 4. To an Incomplete Draft of Book 5.
|
Book 1 |
Book 2 Edifice (done) |
Book 3 Vocab- ularies (done) |
Book 4 Realms (soon) |
Book 5 Coping (still scraps) |
Preface | |
| Table of Content | ||||||
| Bibliography |
